Okuma OSP-P300S Macturn Multus Series Operation Manual LE32-163-R03a

CNC SYSTEM

OSP-P300S
MACTURN/MULTUS series
OPERATION MANUAL(3rd Edition)Pub No. 5947-E-R2 (LE32-163-R3) Oct. 2012

5947-E P-(i)SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The machine is equipped with safety devices which serve to protect personnel and the machine itself from hazards arising from unforeseen accidents. However, operators must not rely exclusively on these safety devices: they must also become fully familiar with the safety guidelines presented below to ensure accident-free operation.This instruction manual and the warning signs attached to the machine cover only those hazards which Okuma can predict.Be aware that they do not cover all possible hazards.

1. Precautions Relating to Installation

(1) Please be noted about a primary power supply as follows.

Do not draw the primary power supply from a distribution panel that also supplies a major noise source (for example, an electric welder or electric discharge machine) since this could cause malfunction of the CNC unit.

If possible, connect the machine to a ground not used by any other equipment. If there is no choice but to use a common ground, the other equipment must not generate a large amount of noise (such as an electric welder or electric discharge machine).

(2) Installation EnvironmentObserve the following points when installing the control enclosure.

Make sure that the CNC unit will not be subject to direct sunlight.

Make sure that the control enclosure will not be splashed with chips, water, or oil.

Make sure that the control enclosure and operation panel are not subject to excessive vibrations or shock.

The permissible ambient temperature range for the control enclosure is 5 to 40°C (41 to 104°F).

The permissible ambient humidity range for the control enclosure is relative humidity 50% or less at 40°C (104°F) (no condensation).

The maximum altitude at which the control enclosure can be used is 1000 m (3281ft.).

2. Points to Check before Turning on the Power

(1) Close all the doors of the control enclosure and operation panel to prevent the entry of water, chips, and dust.

(2) Make absolutely sure that there is nobody near the moving parts of the machine, and that there are no obstacles around the machine, before starting machine operation.

(3) When turning on the power, turn on the main power disconnect switch first, then the CONTROL ON switch on the operation panel.

5947-E P-(ii)SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

3. Precautions Relating to Manual/Continuous Operation

(1) Follow the instruction manual during operation.

(2) Do not operate the machine with the front cover, chuck cover, or another protective cover removed.

(3) Close the front cover before starting the machine.

(4) When machining the initial workpiece, check for machine operations, run the machine under no load to check for interference among components, cut the workpiece in the single block mode, and then start continuous operation.

(5) Ensure your safety before rotating the spindle or moving a machine part.

(6) Do not touch chips or workpiece while the spindle is rotating.

(7) Do not stop a rotating part with hand or another means.

(8) Check that the condition of hydraulic chuck jaws as mounted, operating pressure, and maximum permissible revolving speed.

(9) Check the condition and location of the cutting tool as mounted.

(10) Check the tool offset value.

(11) Check the zero offset value.

(12) Check that the SPINDLE OVERRIDE and FEEDRATE OVERRIDE dials on the NC operation panel are set to 100%.

(13) When moving the turret, check the software limits for X- and Z-axes or the locations of limit switch dogs to prevent interference with the chuck and tailstock.

(14) Check the location of the turret.

(15) Check the location of the tailstock.

(16) Cut workpieces with a transmitted power and torque within the permissible range.

(17) Chuck each workpiece firmly.

(18) Check that the coolant nozzle is properly located.

5947-E P-(iii)SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

4. Precautions Relating to the ATC

(1) The tool clamps of the magazine, spindle, etc., are designed for reliability, but it is possible that a tool could be released and fall in the event of an unforeseen accident, exposing you to danger: do not touch or approach the ATC mechanism during ATC operation.

(2) Always inspect and change tools in the magazine in the manual magazine interrupt mode.

(3) Remove chips adhering to the magazine at appropriate intervals since they can cause misoperation. Do not use compressed air to remove these chips since it will only push the chips further in.

(4) If the ATC stops during operation for some reason and it has to be inspected without turning the power off, do not touch the ATC since it may start moving suddenly.

5. On Finishing Work

(1) On finishing work, clean the vicinity of the machine.

(2) Return the ATC, APC and other equipment to the predetermined retraction position.

(3) Always turn off the power to the machine before leaving it.

(4) To turn off the power, turn off the CONTROL ON switch on the operation panel first, then the main power disconnect switch.

5947-E P-(iv)SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

6. Precautions during Maintenance Inspection and When Trouble Occurs

In order to prevent unforeseen accidents, damage to the machine, etc., it is essential to observe the following points when performing maintenance inspections or during checking when trouble has occurred.

(1) When trouble occurs, press the emergency stop button on the operation panel to stop the machine.

(2) Consult the person responsible for maintenance to determine what corrective measures need to be taken.

(3) When 2 or more people are working together, make sure to communicate with each other at each step.

(4) Use only the specified replacement parts and fuses.

(5) Always turn the power off before starting inspection or changing parts.

(6) When parts are removed during inspection or repair work, always replace them as they were and secure them properly with their screws, etc.

(7) When carrying out inspections in which measuring instruments are used - for example voltage checks - make sure the instrument is properly calibrated.

(8) Do not keep combustible materials or metals inside the control enclosure or terminal box.

(9) Check that cables and wires are free of damage: damaged cables and wires will cause current leakage and electric shocks.

(10) Maintenance inside the Control Enclosure

a. Switch the main power disconnect switch OFF before opening the control enclosure door.

b. Even when the main power disconnect switch is OFF, there may some residual charge in the MCS drive unit (servo/spindle), and for this reason only service personnel are permitted to perform any work on this unit. Even then, they must observe the following precautions.

MCS drive unit (servo/spindle)The residual voltage discharges two minutes after the main switch is turned OFF.

c. The control enclosure contains the NC unit, and the NC unit has a printed circuit board whose memory stores the machining programs, parameters, etc. In order to ensure that the contents of this memory will be retained even when the power is switched off, the memory is supplied with power by a battery. Depending on how the printed circuit boards are handled, the contents of the memory may be destroyed and for this reason only service personnel should handle these boards.

5947-E P-(v)SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(11) Periodic Inspection of the Control Enclosure

a. Cleaning the cooling unitThe cooling unit in the door of the control enclosure serves to prevent excessive temperature rise inside the control enclosure and increase the reliability of the NC unit. Inspect the following points every three months.

Is the fan motor inside the cooling unit working?The motor is normal if there is a strong draft from the unit.

Is the external air inlet blocked?If it is blocked, clean it with compressed air.

5947-E P-(vi)SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

7. General Precautions

(1) Keep the vicinity of the machine clean and tidy.

(2) Wear appropriate clothing while working, and follow the instructions of someone with sufficient training.

(3) Make sure that your clothes and hair cannot become entangled in the machine. Machine operators must wear safety equipment such as safety shoes and goggles.

(4) Machine operators must read the instruction manual carefully and make sure of the correct procedure before operating the machine.

(5) Memorize the position of the emergency stop button so that you can press it immediately at any time and from any position.

(6) Do not access the inside of the control panel, transformer, motor, etc., since they contain high-voltage terminals and other components which are extremely dangerous.

(7) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to confirm safety before proceeding to each new step.

8. Symbols Used in This Manual

In this manual, the following signs are used to denote items that require special attention. Pay particular attention to instructions accompanied by these signs.

5947-E P-(i)INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

Thank you very much for choosing our CNC system.This numerical control system is an expandable CNC with various features.Major features of the CNC system are described below.

(1) Compact and highly reliableThe CNC system has become compact and highly reliable because of advanced hardware technology, including computer boards equipped with high-speed micro processors, I/O link, and servo link.The ‘variable software’ as a technical philosophy of the OSPs supported by a hard disk.Functions may be added to the CNC system as required after delivery.

(2) NC operation panelThe following types of NC operation panels are offered to improve the user-friendliness.

Thin color operation panels (horizontal)

Thin color operation panels (vertical)One or more of the above types may not be used for some models.)

(3) Machining management functionsThese functions contribute to the efficient operation of the CNC system and improve the profitability from small quantity production of multiple items and variable quantity production of variations. Major control functions are described below.

a. Reduction of setup timeWith increase in small-volume production, machining data setting is more frequently needed. The simplified file operation facilitates such troublesome operation. The documents necessary for setup, such as work instructions, are displayed on the CNC system to eliminate the necessity of controlling drawings and further reduce the setup time.

b. Production Status MonitorThe progress and operation status can be checked on a real-time basis on the screen of the CNC system.

c. Reduction of troubleshooting timeCorrect information is quickly available for troubleshooting.

(4) Help functionsWhen an alarm is raised, press the help key to view the content of the alarm.This helps take quick action against the alarm.

To operate the CNC system to its maximum performance, thoroughly read and understand this instruction manual before use.Keep this instruction manual at hand so that it will be available when you need a help.

Screen display

Different screens are used for different models. Therefore, the screens used on your CNC system may differ from those shown in this manual.

5947-E P-(i)CONTENTS

CONTENTS

SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

SECTION 5 MULTI-EDGE TOOL FUNCTION FOR 8-/12- ANGLE INDEXING

SECTION 6 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS B200/B300/B400)

SECTION 7 B-AXIS CONTROL OVERVIEW

SECTION 8 LOWER TURRET CONTROL

SECTION 9 STEADYREST ZB-AXIS CONTROL

SECTION 10 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER FUNCTIONS

SECTION 11 APPENDIX

5947-E P-(i)TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION ..........................................................................1

1-1. Overview............................................................................................................................ 1

1-2. Turret Indexing Control ...................................................................................................... 2

1-2-1. Turret Index Position ........................................................................................... 2

1-2-2. Turret Number Assignment ................................................................................. 3

1-2-3. Turret Indexing Turret Control ............................................................................. 4

1-2-4. Indexing Angle Selection and Turret Rotation Function ...................................... 5

1-3. Turret B-axis Positioning Control ....................................................................................... 5

1-3-1. Positioning the B-axis.......................................................................................... 5

1-3-2. Movable Range of the B-axis .............................................................................. 6

1-3-3. Precautions for B-axis Positioning Control .......................................................... 7

1-4. Turret Indexing Command................................................................................................. 8

1-4-1. Command............................................................................................................ 8

1-4-2. Command Systems ........................................................................................... 10

1-4-3. Machining preparation command (tool number, edge number specification) ..................................................................................................... 11

1-4-4. Machining preparation command (group number specification) ....................... 15

1-4-5. Groove tool 2nd offset command ...................................................................... 17

1-4-6. Tool offset change command ............................................................................ 18

1-4-7. Tool offset change command ............................................................................ 19

1-4-8. Tool position offset command (tool group number specification) ...................... 21

1-4-9. Base cutting position index by tool number (TL mode) ..................................... 22

1-4-10. Vertical cutting position index by tool number (TL mode) ................................. 22

1-4-11. Base cutting position index by tool group number (TL mode) ........................... 23

1-4-12. Vertical cutting position index by tool group number (TL mode) ....................... 23

1-4-13. Base cutting position index by turret number (TL mode)................................... 23

1-4-14. Vertical cutting position index by turret number (TL mode)............................... 24

1-4-15. ATC position index by turret number................................................................. 24

1-4-16. Independent command with tool offset number, nose R offset number, and tool radius offset number (TL mode ) ......................................................... 24

1-4-17. Interlock............................................................................................................. 25

1-4-18. Alarms regarding the turret indexing command ................................................ 25

1-5. Turret B-axis Positioning Commands .............................................................................. 27

1-5-1. Command Systems ........................................................................................... 27

1-5-2. Positioning by Tool Number (TD mode) ............................................................ 27

1-5-3. Positioning by Tool Group Number (TD mode) ................................................. 28

1-5-4. B-axis Positioning Command in the Same Block as the TL Command (TL mode).......................................................................................................... 28

1-5-5. B-axis Positioning Command in the Same Block as the T Command (TL/TD mode) .................................................................................................... 28

1-5-6. Independent Command for Positioning B-axis .................................................. 28

1-5-7. Turret Rotary Position Offset Command in B-axis Positioning (G52)................ 30

5947-E P-(ii)TABLE OF CONTENTS

1-5-8. Terms Relevant to Turret Rotary Position Compensation................................. 32

1-6. Manual Turret Indexing Operation................................................................................... 33

1-6-1. Turret Indexing Position .................................................................................... 33

1-6-2. H1 Turret ........................................................................................................... 33

1-7. Manual B-axis Positioning Operation .............................................................................. 34

1-7-1. Positioning the B-axis........................................................................................ 34

1-7-2. Canceling B-axis Positioning............................................................................. 35

1-7-3. BA Angle Data Display ...................................................................................... 35

1-8. Manual Slant Feed Function............................................................................................ 36

1-8-1. Designating a Slant Feed Direction................................................................... 36

1-8-2. Selecting Slant Feed, Feed Operation .............................................................. 37

1-8-3. Caution on Recovering from Manual Interruption.............................................. 38

1-8-4. Relationship with the Slant Compound Fixed Cycle Function........................... 38

1-8-5. Others................................................................................................................ 38

1-9. Tool Index Function ......................................................................................................... 39

1-9-1. Relation between Turret Indexing and Tool Indexing........................................ 39

1-9-2. Relation between Tool Indexing and Graphic Display....................................... 39

1-9-3. Relation between Tool Index Command and Tool Compensation .................... 40

1-9-4. Tool Index Commands ...................................................................................... 41

1-9-5. Relation between milling tool and tool index command .................................... 41

1-10. Parameter Settings.......................................................................................................... 42

1-10-1. B-axis User Parameters .................................................................................... 42

1-10-2. B-axis System Parameter.................................................................................. 42

1-10-3. Turret Position Error Compensation.................................................................. 44

1-10-4. B-axis Indexing Angles...................................................................................... 44

1-10-5. M-axis Orientation ............................................................................................. 44

1-10-6. SYSTEM PARAMETER/SYSTEM PARAMETER 2 .......................................... 45

1-10-7. Machine System Parameters ............................................................................ 50

1-11. Tool Data Setting............................................................................................................. 51

1-11-1. Tool Shape Data ............................................................................................... 51

1-11-2. Tool Compensation ........................................................................................... 53

1-12. Other Functions ............................................................................................................... 54

1-12-1. Tool Compensation Automatic Calculation Function (TL mode) ....................... 54

1-12-2. Turret Coolant Interlock..................................................................................... 54

1-12-3. Interlocks ........................................................................................................... 54

1-12-4. Axis Travel Method Selection............................................................................ 55

SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION................................................................................64

2-1. Overview.......................................................................................................................... 64

2-2. Machine Specifications.................................................................................................... 64

2-2-1. Outline of the Machine ...................................................................................... 64

2-2-2. Machine operation............................................................................................. 66

2-2-3. ATC Operation .................................................................................................. 67

2-3. ATC Logic Tables ............................................................................................................ 71

5947-E P-(iii)TABLE OF CONTENTS

2-3-1. Input Logic Table............................................................................................... 71

2-3-2. Output Logic Table ............................................................................................ 72

2-3-3. Manual Interlock Table ...................................................................................... 72

2-4. Manual operation............................................................................................................. 73

2-4-1. Manual Magazine Operation ............................................................................. 73

2-4-2. Manual ATC Operation...................................................................................... 82

2-5. Program Commands ....................................................................................................... 85

2-5-1. ATC Commands................................................................................................ 85

2-5-2. ATC Macro Commands..................................................................................... 88

2-5-3. Others................................................................................................................ 90

2-5-4. Program example .............................................................................................. 91

2-6. AUTO............................................................................................................................... 93

2-6-1. Sequence Return Procedure............................................................................. 93

2-6-2. Considerations When Using Machine Lock....................................................... 94

2-7. Data Setting..................................................................................................................... 96

2-7-1. Magazine Information........................................................................................ 96

2-7-2. Tool Information ................................................................................................ 98

2-8. ATC Status Display ....................................................................................................... 100

2-8-1. ATC Status Display Screen............................................................................. 100

2-8-2. ATC Input/Output Display Screen ................................................................... 102

2-8-3. Machine Diagnosis Screen.............................................................................. 103

2-9. Parameter Settings........................................................................................................ 107

2-9-1. ATC Tool Change Position and Movable Range............................................. 107

2-9-2. Magazine Axis Parameter ............................................................................... 109

2-9-3. EC–axis (Tool Change Arm Rotation Axis) Parameter ................................... 109

2-9-4. EZ–axis (Tool Change Advance/Retraction Rotation Axis) Parameter (MULTUS B200/B300/B400) ........................................................................... 110

2-9-5. Positioning Point EC (MULTUS B200/B300/B400) ......................................... 110

2-9-6. Positioning Point EZ (MULTUS B200/B300/B400).......................................... 110

2-9-7. Turret Index Angle........................................................................................... 111

2-9-8. Magazine Panel Communication Parameter................................................... 111

2-9-9. Setting the Tool Change Arm Rotation Positions Immediately after Installing the Control Software (MULTUS B200/B300/B400) .......................... 112

2-9-10. Cam Shaft Timing Parameter (Machine System Parameter No.18-1).............. 113

2-9-11. Step Division Parameter.................................................................................. 116

2-9-12. ATC Tool Change Arm (Machine System Parameter No.18-2) ...................... 116

2-9-13. Tool Change Arm Torque Limit Parameter (Machine System Parameter No.18-3)......................................................................................... 117

2-9-14. Tool Change Arm Override 1 (Machine System Parameter No.18-4).............. 117

2-9-15. Tool Change Arm Override 2.3 (Machine System Parameter No.18-5.6) .................................................................................................................. 117

2-10. System Check ............................................................................................................... 118

2-10-1. System Check Mode Parameters.................................................................... 118

2-10-2. ATC Parameters.............................................................................................. 121

2-10-3. ATC Individual Operation ................................................................................ 123

5947-E P-(iv)TABLE OF CONTENTS

2-11. Others ............................................................................................................................ 127

2-11-1. G and M Code Macro Functions ..................................................................... 127

2-11-2. Optical In–process Workpiece Gauging Specification (Optional Specification)................................................................................................... 129

2-11-3. At the Occurrence of ATC Failure ................................................................... 130

SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL ............................................................................133

3-1. Outline Y-axis Control.................................................................................................... 133

3-1-1. Introduction...................................................................................................... 133

3-2. Machine Operation ........................................................................................................ 134

3-2-1. Machine Operation .......................................................................................... 134

3-2-2. Manual Operations .......................................................................................... 136

3-2-3. MDI Operation ................................................................................................. 138

3-2-4. AUTO .............................................................................................................. 138

3-2-5. NC Operation Panel Display ........................................................................... 139

3-2-6. Additional Functions ........................................................................................ 140

3-3. Programming ................................................................................................................. 150

3-3-1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 150

3-3-2. Y-axis Control Commands .............................................................................. 150

3-3-3. Y-axis Compound Fixed Cycles ...................................................................... 154

3-4. Slant Machining Mode Function .................................................................................... 165

3-4-1. Overview ......................................................................................................... 165

3-4-2. Coordinate System for Slant Machining .......................................................... 166

3-4-3. Slant Machining Mode Commands ................................................................. 167

3-4-4. Functions Usable in Slant Machining Mode .................................................... 168

3-4-5. Zero Point Shift Macro Command ................................................................... 171

3-4-6. Actual Position Display.................................................................................... 172

3-5. Data Operation .............................................................................................................. 173

3-5-1. Data Setting..................................................................................................... 173

3-6. Parameters .................................................................................................................... 180

3-6-1. Parameters...................................................................................................... 180

3-7. Appendix........................................................................................................................ 185

3-7-1. Y-axis Machining Examples (for A-turret Side Only) ....................................... 185

SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION.............................................................189

4-1. Overview........................................................................................................................ 189

4-1-1. Introduction...................................................................................................... 189

4-1-2. Machine Configuration .................................................................................... 189

4-1-3. Coordinate Systems ........................................................................................ 190

4-2. Operation Panel............................................................................................................. 191

4-2-1. Basic Configuration of Operation Panels ........................................................ 191

4-2-2. Option Panel for Sub-spindle Machines .......................................................... 192

4-2-3. Brief Explanation of the Panels ....................................................................... 193

4-3. Manual Operation .......................................................................................................... 194

5947-E P-(v)TABLE OF CONTENTS

4-3-1. Operations Related to the 1st Spindle (Main Spindle) .................................... 194

4-3-2. Operations Related to the 2nd Spindle (Sub Spindle)..................................... 196

4-3-3. Axis Feed Operation (X-, Z-, C-, and W-axis) ................................................. 198

4-3-4. M-tool Spindle Operation................................................................................. 201

4-3-5. Other Manual Operations ................................................................................ 203

4-4. MDI/Automatic Operation .............................................................................................. 204

4-4-1. Coordinate System Selection .......................................................................... 204

4-4-2. MDI.................................................................................................................. 205

4-4-3. AUTO .............................................................................................................. 205

4-5. Additional Functions ...................................................................................................... 206

4-5-1. Workpiece Transfer Function from the Main Spindle to the Sub Spindle ............................................................................................................ 206

4-5-2. Z-axis Mirror Image ......................................................................................... 207

4-5-3. Interlock (for Two-saddle Models Only)........................................................... 210

4-5-4. W-axis Cutting Function (Optional) ................................................................. 211

4-6. Programming ................................................................................................................. 213

4-6-1. Coordinate Systems ........................................................................................ 213

4-6-2. Program Commands ....................................................................................... 215

4-7. Data Operation .............................................................................................................. 217

4-7-1. Zero Setting..................................................................................................... 217

4-8. Description of Parameters ............................................................................................. 221

4-8-1. System Parameters......................................................................................... 221

4-8-2. User Parameters ............................................................................................. 222

4-8-3. Chuck Parameters........................................................................................... 223

4-8-4. Machine System Parameter (Airblow/Coolant) ............................................... 225

4-8-5. Machine User Parameter (Airblow/Coolant).................................................... 228

4-8-6. Machine User Parameter (Chuck)................................................................... 229

4-8-7. Machine User Parameter (Spindle) ................................................................. 230

4-8-8. Machine System Parameter (Spindle)............................................................. 231

4-8-9. Machine System Parameter (Door Interlock) .................................................. 232

4-8-10. Machine System Parameter (Milling Spindle) ................................................. 233

SECTION 5 MULTI-EDGE TOOL FUNCTION FOR 8-/12-ANGLE INDEXING .........................................................................................234

5-1. Overview........................................................................................................................ 234

5-2. Function......................................................................................................................... 235

5-2-1. Tool Management ........................................................................................... 235

5-2-2. Turret Rotation ................................................................................................ 236

5-2-3. Edge Index Command..................................................................................... 237

5-2-4. Interlocks ......................................................................................................... 238

5-3. Tool Data Setting Screen .............................................................................................. 239

5-3-1. Tool Registration Screen................................................................................. 239

5-3-2. TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT Screen (for the Machine with Tool Life Management Function) ................................................................................... 240

5947-E P-(vi)TABLE OF CONTENTS

5-4. System Variable ............................................................................................................ 242

5-4-1. System Variable for Specifying Tool Number.................................................. 242

5-4-2. System Variable for Tool Group ...................................................................... 242

5-4-3. System Variable for Turret Number................................................................. 242

5-4-4. System Variables with No Subscript ............................................................... 242

SECTION 6 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS B200/B300/B400)...................................243

6-1. Operation....................................................................................................................... 244

6-1-1. Setup Operation .............................................................................................. 244

6-1-2. Ordinary Operation.......................................................................................... 244

6-2. Tailstock Movement....................................................................................................... 245

6-2-1. Manual Tailstock Movement............................................................................ 245

6-2-2. Automatic Tailstock Movement ....................................................................... 245

6-3. Switching between High/Low Pressure ......................................................................... 246

6-3-1. Switching between High/Low Pressure Command ......................................... 246

6-3-2. Operation......................................................................................................... 246

6-4. Multiple Sizing Position Command ................................................................................ 247

6-4-1. Multiple Sizing Position Command.................................................................. 247

6-4-2. Operation......................................................................................................... 247

6-4-3. Restart Sequence (Operation Starting from the Halfway of the Program) ......................................................................................................... 247

6-5. Preparatory Operation ................................................................................................... 248

6-5-1. Setting the Sizing Position............................................................................... 248

6-5-2. No-load Torque Measurement ........................................................................ 249

6-6. Parameter ...................................................................................................................... 250

6-6-1. NC Tailstock User Parameter.......................................................................... 250

6-6-2. NC Tailstock System Parameter ..................................................................... 254

6-7. Interlocks ....................................................................................................................... 256

SECTION 7 B-AXIS CONTROL OVERVIEW........................................................258

7-1. Introduction.................................................................................................................... 258

7-2. Machine Operation ........................................................................................................ 258

7-2-1. Machine Operation .......................................................................................... 258

7-2-2. Manual Operations .......................................................................................... 260

7-2-3. MDI Operation ................................................................................................. 262

7-2-4. Automatic Operation........................................................................................ 263

7-2-5. NC Operation Panel Display ........................................................................... 264

7-3. Programming ................................................................................................................. 265

7-3-1. B-axis Command............................................................................................. 265

7-3-2. Offset............................................................................................................... 267

7-4. Data Operation .............................................................................................................. 271

7-4-1. Data Operation ................................................................................................ 271

7-5. Parameters .................................................................................................................... 272

5947-E P-(vii)TABLE OF CONTENTS

7-5-1. Parameters...................................................................................................... 272

7-6. Alarms ........................................................................................................................... 273

SECTION 8 LOWER TURRET CONTROL ...........................................................275

8-1. Overview of Lower Turret Control.................................................................................. 275

8-2. Operation Panel............................................................................................................. 275

8-3. Tool Registration ........................................................................................................... 277

8-3-1. Tool registration screen................................................................................... 277

8-3-2. B-turret Tool Registration Procedure............................................................... 280

8-4. Operations ..................................................................................................................... 292

8-4-1. Turret index command: T command ............................................................... 292

8-4-2. TD command................................................................................................... 293

SECTION 9 STEADYREST ZB-AXIS CONTROL.................................................295

9-1. Overview........................................................................................................................ 295

9-2. Operations ..................................................................................................................... 296

9-2-1. Manual operations........................................................................................... 296

9-2-2. Operations in MDI mode ................................................................................. 296

9-2-3. Operations in AUTO mode .............................................................................. 297

9-2-4. Animation simulation screen ........................................................................... 298

9-2-5. Check motion for interference with the NC tailstock........................................ 299

9-2-6. Check motion for interference with the sub spindle base................................ 299

9-3. Parameter ...................................................................................................................... 300

9-4. Alarm and error.............................................................................................................. 301

SECTION 10 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER FUNCTIONS ........................................302

10-1. Description of Other Functions ...................................................................................... 302

10-1-1. Override for Internal Arc Cutting...................................................................... 302

10-1-2. Helical Cutting Function (Optional).................................................................. 303

10-1-3. Tool Offset Change Function .......................................................................... 305

10-1-4. TL Command Mode......................................................................................... 309

10-1-5. Soft Jaw Process Function.............................................................................. 327

10-1-6. Edge position display function......................................................................... 337

10-1-7. Message Function ........................................................................................... 340

SECTION 11 APPENDIX ........................................................................................342

11-1. ATC Logic Tables .......................................................................................................... 342

11-2. ATC Input/Output Bit Tables.......................................................................................... 381

11-3. List of Data Formats ...................................................................................................... 395

11-3-1. Tool Data Setting (T) ....................................................................................... 395

11-3-2. Zero Point Data Setting (0).............................................................................. 396

11-3-3. Parameter Setting (P)...................................................................................... 397

5947-E P-1SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

1-1. Overview

This section describes the functions and operations of the turrets installed in MACTURN and MULTUS series.

MACTURN and MULTUS series can move its saddle in three directions X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis. The turret rotates around the Y-axis.The turret indexing function is available in two modes: “B-axis 1° indexing” by 1°, and “B-axis 1/1000° indexing” by 0.001°. However, only “B-axis 1/1000° indexing” is available in MULTUS series.)

B-axis indexing type

1° indexing 1/1000° indexing

MACTURN250/350/550

Available Available

MULTUS B200/B300/B400/B750

Not available Available


1-2. Turret Indexing Control

Since the turret of MACTURN and MULTUS series rotates around the Y-axis, a single tool can be used on the front or on a side according to the direction the turret is indexed.

1-2-1. Turret Index Position

(1) reference cutting positionOne of the basic indexing operations of the turret for MACTURN and MULTUS series machines is “base cutting position” indexing. The base cutting position means the state the tool attached faces the Z-axis direction.When a second spindle is equipped, the turret indexing position is 180 degrees shifted from the base cutting position.

(2) Perpendicular cutting positionThe “vertical cutting position” is the state the B-axis is shifted 90 degrees from the base cutting position in the positive direction.In this position, the tool attached faces the X-axis direction.

(3) ATC positionMACTURN and MULTUS series are generally equipped with an ATC. To mount a tool to the turret using an ATC, the saddle must be moved to the position where the tool can be replaced, and the turret must be indexed to the ATC position in advance. On MACTURN and MULTUS series machines, the ATC position and the turret indexing angle to the base cutting position are the same.Although physical turret indexing is the same, the control mode may be different.

H1 Turret

First spindle base cutting position

Second spindle base cutting position

Vertical cutting position

LE32163R0300300030001


1-2-2. Turret Number Assignment

With regular turrets such as an octagonal turret, for example, machining is performed with each of the indexed turrets from turret #1 to #8. However, with the MACTURN or MULTUS turret, it is possible to use each tool at two indexed positions. As such, internal to the NC, the H1 turret is controlled as a quadrangle turret.With a regular turret indexing command (such as T1000 and T3000), the turret number internally assigned by the NC is indexed to the base cutting position.

H1 turret numbersAlthough only one tool can be attached to the H1 turret, turret numbers 1 to 3 are assigned to it. The turret can, therefore, be indexed as shown below with a T command, but to which direction the tool will be faced will generally be directed.

T2

T1 T3

LE32163R0300300040001


1-2-3. Turret Indexing Turret Control

Because of the way the turret is structured, the H1 turret cannot be turn one full rotation. As shown below, it moves like a pendulum within a given range.In a machine with a turret indexing single-direction positioning function () for turret control, an error will occur if an overshoot in a single direction is in the turret indexing prohibition range.

H1 Turret

The MACTURN series can rotate the H1 turret between -15° and +195°, MULTUS B200/B300/B400 can rotate between -30° and +195° and MULTUS B750 can rotate between -30° and +210° with the base cutting position set at 0°.Indexing is performed in the order of T1 → T2 → T3 with the (+) manual turret rotation button, and in the order of T3 → T2 → T1 with the (-) manual turret rotation button.

MACTURN

MULTUS

Such a machine positions the B-axis from the B-axis negative direction to the positive direction, irrespective of the position of the target point. With a command of positioning to a smaller angle than the current one, the B-axis will move to -10 degrees and then in the positive direction to the target point.

LE32163R0300300050001

210(MULTUS B750)

195(MULTUS B200/B300/B400)

LE32163R0300300050002


1-2-4. Indexing Angle Selection and Turret Rotation Function

Set the tool indexing dial to the angle to which the H1 turret needs to be indexed, then press the INDEX button to index the turret to the direction set on the dial.

Procedure :

1 Set the dial on the left to the direction that the turret needs to be indexed.The dial can be set to one of five angles: 0, 45, 90, 135, or 180 degrees.

Pressing the INDEX button with a CCW (-) setting will rotate the turret in the minus (CCW) direction.Pressing the INDEX button with a CW (+) setting will rotate the turret in the plus (CW) direction.When set to off, the turret does not rotate even when the INDEX button is pressed.

2 Press the INDEX button on the right.This will rotate the turret to the angle set on the dial.

[Supplement]

1-3. Turret B-axis Positioning Control

When “B-axis one-degree pitch indexing mode” or “B-axis 1/1000-degree pitch indexing mode” is selected, the B-axis can be positioned to any set angle. This B-axis positioning control function is available for machining inclined faces.

1-3-1. Positioning the B-axis

With the exception of 45 degree indexing, the B-axis can be positioned only with an MDI command or program command. To perform manual operation with the B-axis positioned, the B-axis must be positioned in advance by MDI operation.For information on how to send B-axis commands, refer to [SECTION 1, 1-5. Turret B-axis positioning command].

CW (+) and CCW (-) rotation can be specified by the T command.To specify the angle, use the BA command.

LE32163R0300300760001


1-3-2. Movable Range of the B-axis

In B-axis positioning, the angular reference for the B-axis angle command is different depending on the turret indexed state. Basically, the increment in the B-axis angle from the turret indexing position as the reference is directed.Depending on the turret indexing position, an error will occur if the B-axis positioning angle is out of the movable range.Set the movable range with the mechanical system parameters “turret boundary angle” and “turret angle range.”

H1 Turret

Assuming that the indexed angle of the B-axis with T1 as the base cutting position is 0.000°, the B-axis positioning command range for MACTURN series is between -15° and +195°, MULTUS B200/B300/B400 are between -15° and +195° and MULTUS B750 is between -30° and +210°.

MACTURN

MULTUS

LE32163R0300300080001

210(MULTUS B750)

195(MULTUS B200/B300/B400)

LE32163R0300300080002


1-3-3. Precautions for B-axis Positioning Control

(1) The B-axis positioning data just after software installation is 0 degrees.

(2) Issue a B-axis angle data command in the “BA=” format.

(3) A B-axis positioning command must be set in the same block as a turret indexing command.

(4) “BA = 0” will be considered directed when only a turret indexing command is issued.

(5) After the operation mode is switched from automatic or MDI operation to manual operation, the angle data for the B-axis positioning command remains valid. The B-axis angle data is backed up in real time and will be retained even after the power is turned OFF.

(6) B-axis positioning angle data is displayed as the current position data, but if the actual B-axis position is different from the B-axis position in the command by 0.5 degrees or more, the current position is displayed as [*.***]. When this occurs, the display can be returned to normal by repeating turret rotation.

(7) The direction of the B-axis coordinates generally depends on the direction of the Y-axis coordinates. MACTURN and MULTUS series machines, however, always treat the counterclockwise direction as the B-axis positive direction. This direction will not be affected by Y-axis mirror images that will be described later. On machines equipped with a sub-spindle, the clockwise direction viewed from the turret is the B-axis positive direction when the coordinate system for the second spindle mode is selected.


1-4. Turret Indexing Command

There are many command methods provided for turret index to meet the purpose.First, get the outline of the command system, and then read the detail of the command method.

1-4-1. Command

There are two kinds of commands: TL mode and TD mode.The TL mode is a tool preparation command used with OSP-P200 or earlier.The TD mode is a mode used with the tool information management function which has been newly added from OSP-P300S. This mode allows the tool to be offset by specifying the posture number that has been registered on the tool data setting screen.

To perform machining on the machine with ATC, the following machining is necessary.

(1) Next tool preparation and tool change (next tool preparation command, tool change command)

(2) Changing the machining mode (release of the last machining mode, spindle mode selection, C-axis connection ON)

(3) Tool indexing (turret rotation, base/vertical indexing, BA command, M602/M603 command, G52 command)

(4) Tool offset specification

The following program shows when the operation above is represented by program commands.[In the TL mode]

In the TD mode, allowing the machining preparation above to be specified with the macro command in one block makes the part program easy to see and the operation in the MDI operation mode easy, improving operability.

MT=○○○○01 ... Next tool preparation

M421(M321) ... Tool change

G136 ... Coordinate conversion OFF

machining mode change

G126 ... Slant machining mode OFF

G302 ... 3D coordinate conversion OFF

M146 ... C-axis unclamp

M12 ... Milling tool stop

M109 ... C-axis connection OFF

G136 ... Y-axis mode OFF

G140/G141 ... Spindle mode selection

M110 ... C-axis connection ON

TL=ΔΔ○○□□ BT=□ BA=▼▼▼ G52 M602/M603 ... Tool indexing, tool offset specification


The mode can be switched using the parameter.EASY OP. in OPTIONAL PARAMETER, 1. Command mode (TL /TD)

LE32163R0300300110001


1-4-2. Command Systems

Command Purpose Command format Mode

TDMachining preparation command(tool number, edge number specification)

TD=ΔΔ○○○○M323/M423

TD mode

TDGMachining preparation command(tool group number command)

TDG=ΔΔ●●●●M323/M423

TD mode

OS Groove tool 2nd offset command OS= TD mode

TDS Tool offset change command TDS=ΔΔ TD mode

TSTool offset command(tool number, edge number specification)

TS=ΔΔ○○○○BT=□ BA=▼▼▼▼G52 M602/M603

TD mode

TSGTool offset command(tool group number specification)

TSG=ΔΔ○○○○BT=□ BA=▼▼▼▼G52 M602/M603

TD mode

TLSpecify the offset number using the tool number as argument.

TL=○○○▲▲▲BT=0/BT=1

TL mode

TGSpecify the offset number using the tool group number as argument.

TG=●●BT=1/BT=0

TL mode

TSpecify the offset number using the turret number as argument.

T■■○○▲▲TP=0/TP=1

TL mode

TCIndex the turret to the ATC position using the turret number as argument.

TC=01 TL mode

○○○○ : Tool number (fixed to 4 digits with TD mode)

ΔΔ : Tool position number

□ : Turret reference position 0, turret vertical position 1

●●●● : Tool group number

▲▲▲ : Tool offset number

■■ : Nose R offset number


1-4-3. Machining preparation command (tool number, edge number specification)

a. Command format

TD=ΔΔ○○○○ OS= M423/M421(M323/M321)

When the multi-edge tool function is providedTD=■■ΔΔ○○○○ OS= M423/M421(M323/M321)

[Supplement]

Restrictions

(1) In the same block as a TD command, only the sequence name and block skip command “/” can be specified before TD command. If any other command is specified, the following alarm is output to ban the command.Moreover, commands other than above are banned after the TD command in the TD command block. If a command other than above is specified, the following alarm is output to ban the command.

“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands 3”

Argument Content Omission Remarks

■■ Tool edge number Possible

2 digits (0 to 12)“1” is set when omitted.This command is enabled only on the A-turret side on the machine with multi-edge tool function.

ΔΔ Tool position number Possible2 digits (0 to 20)Reference position is applied when omitted.

○○○○ Tool number Impossible 4 digits (0, 1 to 9999)*

OS=Groove tool 2nd offset command OS=1: 1st offset, OS=2: 2nd offset

Possible1, 2OS=1 when omitted.

M423M323

Next tool preparation, tool change, machining preparation command

ImpossibleM421M321

Next tool preparation, tool change

* When “TD=0”, the program only returns the tool currently mounted in the turret as it is regarded as a tool return command.

M323 and M423 can be switched using the parameter.(NC Optional Parameter Other No42 M Macro command type selection enabled)(NC Optional Parameter Bit No 11 BIT0)The TD comamnd must be specified in the same block as M323/M423.


(2) TD commands must be specified in the same block as M423/M421(M323/M321) command.If a TD or M423 (M323) command is specified independently, the following alarm is output to ban the command.


(3) If tool number ○○○○ has an error shown below, the following alarm is output to ban the command.


(4) On the machine with multi-edge tool function, if tool edge number ■■ is out of the input range “0 to 4 (4 angles)/0 to 8 (8 angles)/0 to 12 (12 angles)”, the following alarm is output to ban the command.


(5) If tool position number ΔΔ has an error shown below, the following alarm is output to ban the command.


(6) The following alarm is output to ban the command under the following cases.


(7) If the OS command value is out of the input range “1 to 2”, the following alarm is output to ban the command.


(8) If the M423/M421 (M323/M321) command has an error shown below, the following alarm is output to ban the command.


1) “0” is specified to tool number ○○○○ when the tool edge number and tool position number are not “0”.

2) The tool number is out of the input range “1 to 9999”. However, “TD=0” is valid.

1) The tool position number is out of the input range “0 to 20”.

2) The specified tool position number has not been registered to the target tool.

3) The tool position number ΔΔ is “0” and the reference position number has not been registered.

1) The specified tool ○○○○ has not been supplied into the machine.

2) The specified tool ○○○○ has not been registered.

1) The M423 and M421 commands (or M323and M321commands) are specified in the same block.

2) The M323/M321 command is specified when optional parameter (others) “No.42 M code macro command type” is “Ineffect”, or M423/M421 command is specified when “Effect”.


(9) If a TD command is specified when the tool machining information management function is not selected, the following alarm is output to ban the command.

“2598 alarm B No Spec code. “Tool information management spec” ”

Moreover, if a TD command is executed when the machining mode is not selected, the following alarm is output to ban the command.

“2508 alarm B Machining mode command format”

(10) If a TD command is specified while the TL command mode is selected, the following alarm is output to ban the command.

“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands A”

(11) If a TD command is specified on the multifunction lathe with the sub spindle, the following alarm is output to ban the command under the following cases.The door is open, 1st spindle marker has not passed, and 2nd spindle marker has passed.


(12) If a TD command is specified on the multifunction lathe with the sub spindle, the following alarm is output to ban the command under the following cases.The door is open, 1st spindle marker has passed, and 2nd spindle marker has not passed.


(13) If a TD command is specified on the multifunction lathe with the sub spindle, the following alarm is output to ban the command under the following cases.The door is open, 1st spindle marker has not passed, and 2nd spindle marker has not passed.


(14) If a TD command is specified on the multifunction lathe with which the sub spindle is not selected, the following alarm is output to ban the command under the following cases.The door is open and 1st spindle marker has not passed.



[Supplement]

Position number

With TD mode, an position number must be set for each tool.On the machine that allows turret rotation, the position numbers as in the right can be registered.To specify multiple tool offsets with the same tool, use the numbers between 13 and 20.

No. 1 to 6 Position numbers for 1st spindle (fixed)

No. 7 to 12 Position numbers for 2nd spindle (fixed)

No. 13 to 20 Position numbers for use setting

LE32163R0300300130001


1-4-4. Machining preparation command (group number specification)

a. Command format

TDG=ΔΔ●●●● OS= M423/M421(M323/M321)

Restrictions

(1) Before the TDG command in the same block as the TDG command, only the sequence name and block skip command “/” can be specified. If any other command is specified, the following alarm is output to ban the command.In addition, the commands other than above are banned in the TDG command block after the TDG command. If a command other than above is specified, the following alarm is output to ban the command.


(2) The TDG command must be specified in the same block as the M423/M421(M323/M321) command.If the TDG or M423 (M323) command is executed independently, the following alarm is output to ban the command.


(3) If tool group number ●●●● has an error shown below, the following alarm is output to ban the command.




●●●● Tool group number Impossible 4 digits (1 to 9999)

OS=Groove tool 2nd offset commandOS=1: 1st offset, OS=2: 2nd offset

Possible1 to 2OS=1 when omitted.

M423M323

Next tool preparation, tool change, machining preparation command

ImpossibleM421M321

Next tool preparation, tool change

1) “0” is specified to tool group number ●●●● when the tool position number is not “0”.

2) The tool group number is out of the input range “1 to 9999”.

3) The tool in the specified tool group ●●●● has not been supplied into the machine.

4) The selected tool and tool edge don't exist in specified tool group ●●●●.


(4) If tool position number ΔΔ has an error shown below, the following alarm is output to ban the command.


(5) If the OS command value is out of the input range “1 to 2”, the following alarm is output to ban the command.


(6) If the M423/M421 (M323/M321) command has an error shown below, the following alarm is output to ban the command.


(7) If a TDG command is specified when the tool machining information management function is not selected, the following alarm is output to ban the command.

“2598 alarm B No Spec code. “Tool information management spec””

Moreover, if a TDG command is executed when the machining mode is not selected, the following alarm is output to ban the command.

“2508 alarm B Machining mode command format”

(8) If a TDG command is specified while the TL command mode is selected, the following alarm is output to ban the command.

“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands B”

(9) If a TDG command is specified on the multifunction lathe with the sub spindle, the following alarm is output to ban the command under the following cases.The door is open, 1st spindle marker has not passed, and 2nd spindle marker has passed.


(10) If a TDG command is specified on the multifunction lathe with the sub spindle, the following alarm is output to ban the command under the following cases.The door is open, 1st spindle marker has passed, and 2nd spindle marker has not passed.


1) The tool position number is out of the input range “0 to 20”.

2) The specified tool position number has not been registered to the target tool.

3) Tool position number ΔΔ is “0” and the reference position number has not been registered

1) The M423 and M421 commands (or M323 and M321 commands) are specified in the same block.

2) The M323/M321 command is specified when optional parameter (others) “No.42 M code macro command type” is “Ineffect”, or M423/M421 command is specified when “Effect”.


(11) If a TDG command is specified on the multifunction lathe with the sub spindle, the following alarm is output to ban the command under the following cases.The door is open, 1st spindle marker has not passed, and 2nd spindle marker has not passed.


(12) If a TDG command is specified on the multifunction lathe with which the sub spindle is not selected, the following alarm is output to ban the command under the following cases.The door is open and 1st spindle marker has not passed.


1-4-5. Groove tool 2nd offset command

Tool offset by the tool edge position of a groove tool is switched by using the following command.When the current tool is a groove tool, tool offset is switched with this command.This command can be used together with the TD/TDG command and the G73/G74 command as well as independent commands.

a. Command format

OS=

[Supplement]

b. OperationAt the time of calculation of tool offset, tool offset is computed by adding “Groove width (W)” to it when 2 (2nd offset) is designated, only when the tool kind of current tool is “Outside groove” or “Inside groove” while referring to the groove position command.


Groove position Impossible1: 1st offset <Groove width not to be added>2: 2nd offset <Groove width to be added>

1) If the OS command value is out of the input range “1 to 2”, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands 9”

2) If an OS command is specified when the tool machining information management function is not selected, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2598 alarm B No Spec code. “Tool information management spec””Moreover, if an OS command is executed when the machining mode is not selected, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2508 alarm B Machining mode command format”

3) If an OS command is specified while the TL command mode is selected, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands C”


1-4-6. Tool offset change command

The tool offset of the tool currently used is changed by using the following command.

a. Command format

TDS=ΔΔ

[Supplement]

b. OperationThe tool offset is changed to the one of specified position number.When “TDS=0” is specified, the tool offset is cancelled and the tool offset amount is cleared to “0”.


ΔΔ Tool position number Impossible 2 digits (0 to 20)

1) If tool position number ΔΔ is out of the input range “0 to 20”, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands 13”

2) When the tool currently used is not found (TD/TDG command is not executed), the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands 12”

3) The position of the tool currently used and that of the specified tool position number (spindle mode, base/vertical position, BA angle, A/B position) don't agree, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands 11”

4) If a TDS command is specified when the TL command mode is selected, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands 10”


1-4-7. Tool offset change command

By using the following command, tool indexing and tool offset calculation are performed by specifying the tool number and tool edge number.

a. Command format

TS=ΔΔ○○○○ BT=□ BA=▼▼▼ G52 M602/M603When the multi-edge tool function is provided:TS=■■ΔΔ○○○○ BT=□ BA=▼▼▼ G52 M602/M603

The following commands can be specified when the conditions in the table below are met: BT command, BA command, G52 command, and M602/M603 command.


■■ Tool edge number Possible

2 digits (0 to 12)“1” is set when omitted.This command is enabled only on the A-turret side on the machine with multi-edge tool function.


○○○○ Tool number Impossible 4 digits(1 to 9999)*

BT=□ Base/vertical position command Possible0 to 1BT=0 when omitted.

BA=▼▼▼ BA command Possible-359.999 to 359.999BT=0 when omitted.

G52 G52 command Possible G52 is ignored when omitted.

M602/M603 A/B position command Possible

Command Condition

BT=□ B-axis control function ON + A side

BA=▼▼▼ B-axis control 1° pitch function, or 0.001° pitch function ON + A side

G52 Same as above

M602/M603 L tool index function ON+ A side


[Supplement]

b. OperationIndex the turret station where the tool with specified tool number ○○○○ is mounted to the cutting position.Moreover, the tool offset is computed according to the tool number ○○○○, tool edge number ■■ (only on the A-turret side on the machine with multi-edge tool function), and tool position number ΔΔ.

1) If tool number ○○○○ is out of the input range “1 to 9999”, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands 1”

2) On the machine with multi-edge tool function, if tool edge number ■■ is out of the input range “0 to 4 (4 cutters)/0 to 8 (8 cutters)/0 to 12 (12 cutters)”, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands 5”

3) If the tool or tool edge has not been registered or has not been supplied into the machine, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands 1”

4) If tool position number ΔΔ is out of the input range “0 to 20”, and when the tool position number has not been registered, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands 2”

5) If an OS command is specified when the tool machining information management function is not selected, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2598 alarm B No Spec code. “Tool information management spec””Moreover, if an OS command is executed when the machining mode is not selected, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2508 alarm B Machining mode command format”

6) If a TS command is specified while the TL command mode is selected, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands D”


1-4-8. Tool position offset command (tool group number specification)

By using the following command, indexing of the selected tool and tool offset calculation are performed by specifying the tool group number.

a. Command format

TSG=ΔΔ●●●● BT=□ BA=▼▼▼ G52 M602/M603

The following commands can be specified when the conditions in the table below are met: BT command, BA command, G52 command, and M602/M603 command.

[Supplement]



●●●● Tool group number Impossible 4 digits (1 to 9999)*

BT=□Base/vertical position command

Possible0 to 1BT=0 when omitted.

BA=▼▼▼ BA command Possible-359.999 to 359.999BA=0 when omitted.

G52 G52 command Possible G52 is ignored when omitted.

M602/M603 A/B position command Possible

Command Condition

BT=□ B-axis control function ON + A side

BA=▼▼▼ B-axis control 1° pitch function, or 0.001° pitch function ON + A side

G52 Same as above

M602/M603 L tool index function ON+ A side

1) The following alarm is output to ban the command under the following cases.

a) Tool group number ●●●● is out of the input range “1 to 9999”.

b) Tool group number ●●●● has not been registered.

c) The selected tool in tool group number ●●●● has not been registered.“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands 6”

2) If tool position number ΔΔ is out of the input range “0 to 20” and when the tool position number has not been registered, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands 7”

3) When the machine lock and dry-run are both OFF and the selected tool in the specified tool group has reached its life end, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2410 alarm B Tool life management No spare tool ****”* The code **** indicates the tool group number with life end.

4) If the selected tool in tool group ●●●● doesn't exist or the selected tool edge doesn't exist, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2412 alarm B TOOL LIFE CONTROL no T-entry FFFFFFFF”

5) If the selected tool in tool group ●●●● is not mounted in the turret, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2411 alarm B TOOL LIFE CONTROL tool group ****”* The code **** indicates the tool group number with life end.

6) If a TSG command is specified when the TL command mode is selected, the following alarm is output to ban the command.“2575 alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands E”


b. OperationIndex the turret station where the selected tool in specified tool group ●●●● is mounted to the cutting position.Moreover, the tool offset is computed according to the selected tool number in tool group ●●●●, the selected tool edge number (only on the A-turret side on the machine with multi-edge tool function), and tool position number ΔΔ.

1-4-9. Base cutting position index by tool number (TL mode)

This command indexes the tool with the number specified with [○○] to the base cutting position.

■■: Nose R offset number

○○: Tool number

▲▲: Offset number

BT=0 command can be omitted.

When the number of tool offset sets is 200 (999), specify the tool number with [○○○] and the tool offset number with [▲▲▲]. The nose R offset number adopts the same value as the tool offset number.

1-4-10.Vertical cutting position index by tool number (TL mode)

This command indexes the tool with the number specified with [tt] to the vertical cutting position.


○○: Tool number


When the number of tool offset sets is 200 (999), specify the tool number with [○○○] and the tool offset number with [▲▲▲]. The nose R offset number adopts the same value as the tool offset number.

TL=■■○○▲▲ BT=0

TL=○○○▲▲▲ BT=0 ... the number of tool offset sets, 200 sets or 999 sets

TL=■■○○▲▲ BT=1

TL=○○○▲▲▲ BT=1 ... the number of tool offset sets, 200 sets or 999 sets


1-4-11.Base cutting position index by tool group number (TL mode)

This command indexes the tool in the tool group number specified with [●●] to the base cutting position.

BT=0 command can be omitted.

When the number of tool offset sets is 200 (999), specify the tool group number with [●●●].

To specify the offset group, use OG=[1/2/3].

The nose R offset number adopts the same value as the tool offset number.

1-4-12.Vertical cutting position index by tool group number (TL mode)

This command indexes the tool in the tool group number specified with [●●] to the vertical cutting position.

When the number of tool offset sets is 200 (999), specify the tool group number with [●●●].

To specify the offset group, use OG=[1/2/3].

The nose R offset number adopts the same value as the tool offset number.

1-4-13.Base cutting position index by turret number (TL mode)

This command indexes the turret number specified with [nn] to the base cutting position, which allows operation to be performed using the tool mounted at the base cutting position.


○○: Tool number


When the number of tool offset sets is 200 (999), specify the tool offset number with [▲▲▲]. The nose R offset number adopts the same value as the tool offset number.

[Supplement]

TG=●● BT=0

TG=●●● BT=0 ... the number of tool offset sets, 200 sets or 999 sets

TG=●● BT=1

TG=●●● BT=1 ... the number of tool offset sets, 200 sets or 999 sets

T■■○○▲▲ TP=0

Tnn000 TP=0 ... the number of tool offset sets, 200 sets or 999 sets

"TP=0" can be omitted. However, as the command without "TP=0" is merely a turret indexing command, thus, T2 command can be specified.


1-4-14.Vertical cutting position index by turret number (TL mode)

This command indexes the turret number specified with [nn] to the base cutting position, which allows operation to be performed using the tool mounted at the vertical cutting position.


○○: Tool number


When the number of tool offset sets is 200 (999), specify the tool offset number with [○○○]. The nose R offset number adopts the same value as the tool offset number.

1-4-15.ATC position index by turret number

TC=1 ... H1 turretThis command indexes the turret of the specified number to the ATC position.

1-4-16.Independent command with tool offset number, nose R offset number, and tool radius offset number (TL mode )

Generally the offset number is specified at the same time as the turret index command to specify a tool offset number, nose R offset number, or tool radius offset number. However, tool offset, nose R offset, tool radius offset can be specified independently by using this function, without using the turret index command.

a. Command format

This command allows the tool offset number and nose R offset number that are currently effective to be changed.

If an OF command is specified in the same block as the T command, TL command, or OG command, an alarm occurs

The offset number specified by an OF command is shared and applied to the tool offset number, nose R offset number, and tool radius offset number.

T■■○○▲▲ TP=1

Tnn000 TP=1 ... the number of tool offset sets, 200 sets or 999 sets

OF=▲▲

OF=▲▲▲ ... the number of tool offset sets, 200 sets or 999 sets


1-4-17.Interlock

When C-axis connection is performed at the time of switching the machining mode as one of the machining preparation operations by a TD/TDG command, the C-axis mode is established with the spindle rotated when the spindle marker has not passed.To prevent the above behavior from occurring with the door open, the following interlock is applied.

(1) Interlock for maker not passed with the door openIf a TD/TDG command is executed on the multifunction lathe, with the door open, and with the marker not passed, the following alarm occurs.

1-4-18.Alarms regarding the turret indexing command

2508 Alarm B Machining mode command format

There is an error with the machining mode specification command.

[Object]

System

[Code]

XNone: The command is specified even though machining mode specification is not allowed. 1: A command other than the sequence number is specified before the G270 command. 2: A command that is not permitted is specified after the G270 command.

[Probable Faulty Locations]

Program error1) Program example G140 G270

[Measures to Take]

Correct the program.

2575 Alarm B Mistake in 'TD','TDG ','OS' commands

There is an error with the machining preparation command (TD, TDG, or OS).

[Object]

System

[Code]

1-> Wrong TOOL number in TD COMMAND2-> Wrong TOOL Information Number in TD command3-> Unusual commands include in TD command block except for M323/M423,OS4-> Wrong Turret number in TD command5-> Wrong Edge point number in TD command6-> Wrong Group number in TDG command7-> Wrong Tool information number in TDG command

1. When the 1st spindle marker has not passed


2. When the 2nd spindle marker has not passed


3. When the 1st spindle and 2nd spindle markers have not passed



8-> Unusual commands include in TDG command block except for M323/M423,OS9-> OS command mistake A-> TD command is executed during TL command mode.B-> TDG command is executed during TL command mode.C-> OS command is executed during TL command mode.D-> TS command is executed during TL command mode.E-> TSG command is executed during TL command mode.F-> M323/M423 command is executed during TL command mode.10-> TDS command is executed during TL command mode.11-> Tool position command is different from actual tool position.12-> No tool mounted in turret when execute TDS command.13-> Commanded tool position is not registered.14-> M323/M423 is executed without TD/TDG command. 15-> TD/TDG command was executed when door open and 1st spindle PG marker not passing state.16-> TD/TDG command was executed when door open and 2nd spindle PG marker not passing state.17-> TD/TDG command was executed when door open and 1st/2nd spindle PG marker not passing state.18-> In the spec. of Steady rest ZB axis control, TD, TDG, OS, TS, TSG, M323/M423,TDS command is executed during B turret mode.


Incorrect program

[Measures to Take]

1) Correct the program.2) Execute turret index command.Change to TD mode then tool preparation command(TD command).3) Please close door and execute TD/TDG command. Rotate spindle until Pulse Generator marker signal pass.

2598 Alarm B No Spec code. “Tool information management spec”

A machining preparation command is issued with the tool information management function is not set.

[Object]

System

[Code]

None


Program error

[Measures to Take]

Correct the program.


1-5. Turret B-axis Positioning Commands

A wide variety of directing methods are available for turret positioning according to the purpose when the B-axis one-degree indexing function or B-axis 1/1000-degree indexing function is selected.First understand the outline of the command systems, and see details of the directing methods.

1-5-1. Command Systems

tttt: Tool numberpp: Tool position number (B-axis angle and G52 enable/disable is set when the tool is registered)gggg: Tool group numberttt: Tool number (3 digits for TL command only)ooo: Tool offset numbernnn: Turret numberG52: Command for blade tip offset calculation for B-axis positioning

1-5-2. Positioning by Tool Number (TD mode)

TD=pptttt M323/M423

This command indexes tool number [tttt] to the position specified in [pp].

[pp] contains the BA angle and G52 enable status.

Minimum BA setting unit depends on the specification.Minimum command unit = 1 degree B-axis one-degree pitch indexing functionMinimum command unit = 0.001 degree B-axis 1/1000-degree pitch indexing function

Commands

Purpose

Positioning from base cutting position

RemarksPositioning from vertical

cutting position

TD Positions with the TD command

TD=ppttttM323/423

TD mode

TDG Positions with the tool number and tool position number

TDG=ppggggM 323/423

TD mode

TL Performing positioning simultaneously with the TL command.

TL=tttooo BT=0BA=[angle] G52

TL mode

TL=tttooo BT=1BA=[angle] G52

TL mode

T Performing positioning simultaneously with the T command.

Tnnn000 TP=0BA=[angle]

TL/TD mode

Tnnn000 TP=1BA=[angle]

TL/TD mode

Independent

Indexing the turret to the ATC position with the turret number as an argument.

BA=[angle] G52

Used only with H1 turret.Angle from the reference cutting position


1-5-3. Positioning by Tool Group Number (TD mode)

TDG=pptttt M323/M423

This command indexes the tool in tool group number [gggg] to the position specified in [pp].[pp] contains the BA angle and G52 enable status.

1-5-4. B-axis Positioning Command in the Same Block as the TL Command (TL mode)

TL=tttooo BT=[0/1] BA=[angle] G52

This command indexes tool number [ttt] to the cutting position specified in BT, and from that indexed position, positions to a relative position equal to the angle data specified in BA.

Commands for BT = 0 can be omitted.

Minimum BA setting unit depends on the specification.Minimum command unit = 1 degree B-axis one-degree pitch indexing functionMinimum command unit = 0.001 degree B-axis 1/1000-degree pitch indexing function

1-5-5. B-axis Positioning Command in the Same Block as the T Command (TL/TD mode)

Tnnn000 TP=[0/1] BA=[angle] G52

This command indexes turret number [nnn] to the cutting position specified in TP, and from that indexed position, positions to a relative position equal to the angle data specified in BA.

[Supplement]

1-5-6. Independent Command for Positioning B-axis

BA commands can be specified in an independent block. It, however, requires attention since the tool offset is applied in a different way between the TD and TL command modes.

[In the TL mode]When a BA command is executed in the TL command mode individually with tool offset and wear offset effective, the tool offset value, the wear value and the nose R compensation value of the base position are used regardless of the state of the last BT command (BT = 0 or BT = 1).

Since "BT = 1" is specified in the first block, the turret is indexed to the vertical position. However, the BA command in the next block is replaced to [TL=010101 BT=0 BA=45] internally.

Although TP = 0 can be omitted, a simple turret indexing command will be set in this case, and positioning with the BA command will be performed from the base cutting position.

Example)

TL=010101BA=45 BA command: 45-degree Moves by 45-degree from the base position.

BT = 1 Nose R compensation no. 1, tool no. 1, offset no. 1,

LE32163R0300300190002


[In the TD mode]When a BA command is executed in the TD command mode individually with tool offset and wear offset effective, only the tool offset value is automatically calculated according to the angle of the BA command.

Since the TD command is specified in the first block, the tool offset value, the position offset value, and the nose R compensation value set to position no. 1 become effective. After the BA command in the next block is executed, only the tool offset value is calculated to the value inclined to 45 degree. The position offset and wear offset values should be set in the X- and Z-axis separately.

Example)

TD=010001BA=45 BA command: 45-degree Moves by 45-degree from the base position.

M323 Tool no. 1, position no. 1 (base A)

LE32163R0300300190003

(1)

(2)

(3)(4)

(3)

(4)

(1) Pivot compensation(2) Tool offset(3) Position offset(4) Wear value

LE32163R0300300190001


1-5-7. Turret Rotary Position Offset Command in B-axis Positioning (G52)

By executing the G52 command and the BA command together, it is possible to perform tool offset while internally calculating the offset value according to the angle in the BA command.

[In the TL mode]

The tool offset value and the wear value are automatically calculated according to the angle of the BA command.

Example)

TL=010101BA=45 G52 BA command: 45-degree Moves by 45-degree from the base position.

BT=0 Nose R compensation no. 1, tool no. 1, offset no. 1, turret base position

LE32163R0300300260001

(3)

(3)

(2)

(2) (1)

(1) Pivot compensation(2) Tool offset(3) Wear value

LE32163R0300300260002


[In the TD mode]

The tool offset value, the position offset value and the wear value are automatically calculated according to the angle of the BA command.

Example)

TD=010001BA=45 G52 BA command: 45-degree Moves by 45-degree from the base position.

M323 Position no. 1 (base A), tool no. 1

LE32163R0300300260003

(2)(3)(4) (1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(1) Pivot compensation(2) Tool offset(3) Position offset(4) Wear value

LE32163R0300300260004


1-5-8. Terms Relevant to Turret Rotary Position Compensation

Positions indicated by the terms relevant to turret rotary position compensation

(1) Tool reference pointThe offset reference point is factory-set at the point where the motor rotary axis intersects with the motor end face when the B-axis angle is set to 0°.

(2) Turret center offsetThe positional relation between the tool reference point and the turret rotation center can be set. Normally, this offset is already set before a machine is shipped. This value affects the calculation of the turret rotary position offset command.

(3) Tool edge offsetThis parameter sets the offset from the tool reference point to the user reference point set by a user.

LE32163R0300300270001

LE32163R0300300270002


1-6. Manual Turret Indexing Operation

Although the turret for MACTURN and MULTUS series machines is the H1 turret in appearance, it is internally controlled so that 90-degree indexing is possible. For turrets that are not designed to continuously swing due to the structure of the turret, turret control is performed instead.

1-6-1. Turret Indexing Position

There are three turret indexing positions: the base cutting position, the vertical cutting position, and the ATC position.On MACTURN and MULTUS series machines, the base cutting position and the ATC position are identical, but because the purpose of operation is different between them, for which purpose indexing will be performed must be selected with “turret indexing” on the ATC operation panel.

1-6-2. H1 Turret

The H1 turret cannot continuously swing. For this reason, the order of indexing to the cutting position is as shown below. Additionally, since only one tool can be attached to the turret, the turret does not operate even if the turret swing button is pressed after the tool has been indexed to the ATC position as long as “ATC position” indexing is selected.

Cutting position indexing

If either + or - is selected on the turret direction selection switch on the machine operation panel, perform turret indexing through the following sequence. However, when the B-axis positioning command (BA command) is set, the axis will be positioned to the position offset by the angle.

Designated angle indexing

When the turret direction selection switch on the machine operation panel is set to either 0, 45, 90, 135, or 180 degrees, the turret is positioned to the designated angle.

Indexing the turret to the ATC position

T1 is indexed directly to the ATC position, irrespective of the indexed state of the turret.However, by clicking the turret button in the state of T3, the turret suspends swinging in the state of T2. Holding down the button indexes the turret directly to the ATC position.

LE32163R0300300310001


Turret rotation condition

Either the X-axis or Z-axis is positioned on the positive variable limit.

On a machine equipped with a sub-spindle, the X-axis is positioned on the positive variable limit.

The saddle is positioned in the ATC tool replacement position.

The turret can swing when any one of the above conditions is met.

1-7. Manual B-axis Positioning Operation

When the “B-axis one-degree pitch indexing” function or “B-axis 1/1000-degree pitch indexing” function is selected, the turret swing can be not only positioned but also positioned as the B-axis. This section describes B-axis positioning.Since only the difference between one-degree pitch indexing function and 1/1000-degree pitch indexing is the minimum command unit, note that only the command values must be replaced with the appropriate ones when reading the text.

1-7-1. Positioning the B-axis

With the exception of 45 degrees indexing, B-axis position cannot be performed by manual operation. To position it in a specific position, executed the BA command in advance in MDI operation mode or automatic operation mode. Once the BA command has been executed, it remains valid until the next command is executed. It will be kept stored even if the machine is reset or the power is turned OFF.BA commands are issued in combination with a turret number, so when indexing the turret with a BA command while the turret direction selection switch (+ or -) is pressed during manual operation mode, positioning of the turret is influenced by the BA command.B-axis positioning described above cannot be performed until “cutting position” is selected for turret indexing on the ATC operation panel.


1-7-2. Canceling B-axis Positioning

To cancel B-axis positioning in manual turret indexing, index the turret to the base cutting position or vertical cutting position in MDI operation mode or automatic operation mode. When no BA command is attached, [BA = 0] is considered in the NC directed and the B-axis angle data is deemed cleared.

1-7-3. BA Angle Data Display

The BA data after B-axis positioning will be displayed as [BA] of the current position.When the B-axis one-degree pitch indexing function is used, decimals are not displayed. If there is a difference between the BA command and the actual B-axis positioning angle, . (asterisks) will be displayed.

LE32163R0300300370001


1-8. Manual Slant Feed Function

It is possible to feed the saddle in slanted directions (X-axis - Z-axis contouring) by manual pulse handle feed or JOG feed.

1-8-1. Designating a Slant Feed Direction

Set in “SLANT FEED ANGLE” on the PARAMETER/B-AXIS USER PARAMETER screen the angle at which manual slant feed will be performed(Setup method)

(1) Select parameter setting mode.

(2) Using [DISPLAY CHANGE], [ITEM], etc., have the “B-AXIS USER PARAMETER” screen displayed.

(3) Move the cursor to “SLANT FEED ANGLE,” and set specific angle data.

For control, set to what degrees the coordinate system formed by Z-X will be rotated around the Y-axis.The axis selection key (X/Z) for manual operation mode can select the axis to the coordinate system after rotation. (See figure below)

LE32163R0300300390001


1-8-2. Selecting Slant Feed, Feed Operation

To perform slant feed by manual operation, the “SLANT FEED” key on the machine operation panel must be pressed to select slant feed mode. During slant feed selection, the LED on the panel remains lit.During slant feed selection, the X-axis feed key and the Z-axis feed key are available, or pulse hand X-axis/Z-axis selection becomes valid for the X’-axis and the Z’-axis. Other operations relating to the Y-axis and the C-axis are the same as the regular operations.

[Supplement]

(1) Manual slant feed speed, slant feed distanceManual slant feed using the JOG keys is performed at the X-axis or Z-axis manual feed unit rate set in the axis data file, whichever is slower. The manual feed acceleration unit rate increases or decreases with the manual feed acceleration unit rate for the axis whose manual feed unit rate has been adopted.The feed distance in pulse handle feed is the travel distance in the manual slant feed direction designated by the pulse handle.During slant feed selection, the X-axis command is a radius value command as Y-axis control mode is selected.

(2) Control when the axis has reached the variable limitThe X-axis or Z-axis setting position is valid as the variable limit even during manual slant feed selection. When either the X-axis or Z-axis, which is in manual slant feed in the X’-axis or Z’-axis, has reached the variable limit, all axis feed operations will stop, and the X’-axis or Z’-axis will not move in the direction beyond the variable limit.

If two or more of the X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, and C-axis JOG keys on the operation panel are pressed at the same time when the “SLANT FEED” LED is lit, none of all of the feed axes will move.

Slant feed can be selected only in “manual operation mode or manual intervention mode” and “Y-axis control mode.”

Z'

Z

X

Slant feed rotation angle

LE32163R0300300390002


1-8-3. Caution on Recovering from Manual Interruption

[Supplement]

1-8-4. Relationship with the Slant Compound Fixed Cycle Function

The slant angle command value, which is issued simultaneously with the slant machining mode ON command (G127), is automatically set in “SLANT FEED ANGLE” on the B-AXIS USER PARAMETER screen. Before manually using the slant feed function, confirm that the feed angle set in “SLANT FEED ANGLE” is the appropriate value.

1-8-5. Others

Since the turret B-axis positioning angle and the coordinate conversion angle around the Y-axis specified in “SLANT FEED ANGLE” are independently handled, pay attention to both angle data when drilling a slant face.

During manual interruption, if slant feed is performed and the Sequence Return key is pressed, the X-axis and the Z-axis independently travel to the sequence restart position. Return will not take place by moving straight in a slanted direction. Each axis returns at the manual feed speed. Before pressing the SEQUENCE RESTART key, move the axes closer to the return position in advance to minimize the axis travel distance to return.


1-9. Tool Index Function

The H1 turret for MACTURN and MULTUS series machines has the same attachment structure for both turning tools and milling tools. The edge of a turning tool can even be set at any desired angle by means of the M-axis indexing function. Making effective use of this structure and turning the edge 180 degrees make it possible to use tool for other purposes. The tool index function is intended to index a tool and select its data.

1-9-1. Relation between Turret Indexing and Tool Indexing

1-9-2. Relation between Tool Indexing and Graphic Display

The tool index function changes the graphic display based on the preset tool shape data each time the tool direction is changed 180°. If you set the tool shape data with its angle set at 0°, the graphic display changes when the tool is indexed.

First spindle base position

Position A

First spindle base positionPosition B

First spindle vertical position A

First spindle vertical position B

Second spindle base position

Position A

Second spindle base positionPosition B

Second spindle vertical position B

Second spindle vertical position A

LE32163R0300300450001


1-9-3. Relation between Tool Index Command and Tool Compensation

When tool index command is performed, the tool shape graphics and reference offset data are switched in synchronous with the command, but tool offset data remains unchanged. Therefore, when tool indexing is performed, if tool offset is no longer valid, it is necessary to re-specify it.

A tool has 1 reference offset. In addition, a maximum of 20 positions such as reference position/orthogonal position, A position/B position, 1st spindle/2nd spindle, and BA command can be registered. For each of these positions, it possesses tool offset data.When the tool indexing command is issued, the previously specified position is changed. Therefore, when a tool indexing command is issued on its own, it is necessary to designate an position number.However, this is not necessary when the tool index is switch by specifying the position number in the TD command.

If already in position 1 position A with the offset in the shaded cells selected, by performing tool indexing, offset is switched to those for position 2 position B. Since the tables are independent, the compensation values are different between them.

Tool No.Position

No.Cutting position Tool offset

Nose R compensation

Nose R direction

1

1 1st spindle reference A

2 1st spindle reference B

31st spindle reference A BA=45

41st spindle reference B BA=45

5 1st spindle orthogonal A

6 1st spindle orthogonal B

7 2nd spindle reference A

8 2nd spindle reference B

92nd spindle reference A BA=45

102nd spindle reference B BA=45

11 2nd spindle orthogonal A

12 2nd spindle orthogonal B

13 (User defined)

14 (User defined)

15 (User defined)

16 (User defined)

17 (User defined)

18 (User defined)

19 (User defined)

20 (User defined)


1-9-4. Tool Index Commands

(1) M codeM-spindle indexing operation and M-spindle clamping operation after indexing are performed with the following M codes. M602 : M-spindle 0-degree indexing + clamp command M603 : M-spindle 180-degree indexing + clamp command

[Supplement]

(2) Manual operationBy pressing the tool indexing switch on the machine panel, M-spindle indexing to 0/180 degree can be executed separately. The tool offset is not updated.

1-9-5. Relation between milling tool and tool index command

Tool index commands can be executed even when a milling tool is mounted.Milling tools can be used for turning as well as milling. Use a tool index command that is appropriate for the purpose.As described in the previous page, when the tool offset multi-system function is provided, caution must be executed since the tool offset table is switched by the tool index command even when the milling tool is used for milling. Set the tool offset of the tool which is used only with milling to “position A”, and after the tool index command is executed, return the setting to “position A” so that milling is performed.

These M codes cannot be used in the TD mode; but can be used in the TL mode only.


1-10. Parameter Settings

1-10-1.B-axis User Parameters

(1) Slant feed angleThis parameter sets the Z-X coordinate turning angle in manual slant feed of the saddle.Setting unit: 1 degreeSetting range: -359.999 degrees - 359.999 degreesInitial value: 0.000 degree

(2) Tool edge offsetThis parameter sets the offset from the Okuma reference point to the user reference point set by a user.When the edge offset is changed, the tool offset must be reset.Setting unit: 1 mmSetting range: -9999.999 to 9999.999Initial value:0

1-10-2.B-axis System Parameter

(1) Turret center offsetSet the positional relation between the tool base point and the turret rotation center.Normally this has been set at the factory.Setting unit: 1 mmSetting range: -9999.999 to 9999.999Initial value: 0.000

[H1 turret]

The tool base point for the Z-axis and the X-axis are set at the pot end face and at the M-spindle rotation center respectively.

Pot end face

M-spindle rotation center

Turret rotation center

Tool base point

LE32163R0300300510001


[How to set]

Set the turret center offset in the B-AXIS SYSTEM PARAMETER screen.

Procedure :

1 When the X-axis or Z-axis turret center offset is changed, the difference is automatically added to the Z-axis base zero offset.For example, if the Z-axis turret center offset value is changed from "210" to "210.5", "+0.5" is added to the Z-axis base zero offset.However, this addition is only performed on the machine model where the Z-axis base zero is measured with the tool at the vertical position.

2 A confirmation window to show that the Z-axis base zero offset has changed appears.

3 If you do not wish to perform automatic addition shown in “1” such as when the Z-axis base zero offset is measured with the tool at the base position, uncheck the box "According to the change of TURRET CENTER OFFSET, change the Z-axis BASE ZERO OFFSET."(* This box should be checked normally.)

Note

The description in this item is given on the premise that the Z-axis base zero is to be measured with the tool at the vertical position. Therefore, the Z-axis base zero offset is determined by adding the turret center offset (rotation offset value) to the value measured at the vertical position.In addition to that, when measuring the Z-axis zero base with the base position, be sure to uncheck the box.

LE32163R0300300510002

LE32163R0300300510003


1-10-3.Turret Position Error Compensation

Turret position error compensation in the reference cutting position is the same as general turret position error compensation. However, turret position error compensation in the vertical cutting position becomes valid only when the “B-axis one-degree pitch indexing function” and the “B-axis 1/1000-degree pitch indexing function” are not provided.The turret compensation number is selected based on only the turret number.For example, the compensation value for “turret No. 2 in the vertical cutting position” is used for the turret position error compensation value for machining with the tool attached to turret No. 1 in the vertical cutting position.Setting unit: 1 mmSetting range: -99999.999 to 99999.999Initial value:0

1-10-4.B-axis Indexing Angles

This parameter is displayed only when the B-axis one-degree pitch indexing function is selected.Set the indexing position of each B-axis corresponding to the B-axis positioning command.Setting unit: 0.001 degreeSetting range: 0.000 degrees - 359.000 degreesInitial value set for each point according to the following rule:Initial value = (Point number - 1) × 1.000 degree

1-10-5.M-axis Orientation

This parameter becomes valid only when the M-axis orientation function and the B-axis control function are selected. Set M-axis orientation when the M-axis is indexed to the base cutting position, and that when it is indexed to the ATC position for each turret number.Setting unit: 1 degreeSetting range: 0 to 359.999Initial value:0


1-10-6.SYSTEM PARAMETER/SYSTEM PARAMETER 2

[SYSTEM PARAMETER]

When the machine with the H1 turret is equipped with the T-axis inductosyn detection function or the pitch error offset function, the ZERO OFFSET parameter is added to the T-axis in the SYSTEM PARAMETER screen as shown below.Other parameters including stroke end limit, PR zero offset, backlash, inposition, and PR connection compensation are the same as the regular parameters.

(1) ZERO OFFSETThe ZERO OFFSET parameter is used when the machine coordinate does not become 0.000 degree due to error of inductosyn connection or other similar reason although the PR zero offset is set so that the machine coordinate becomes 0.000 degree when turret no. 1 is indexed at the base cutting position.Setting unit: 1 degreeSetting range: - 0.999 to + 0.999Initial value: 0.000

LE32163R0300300550001


[SYSTEM PARAMETER 2]

The +/- stroke end limit in SYSTEM PARAMETER can be set with the base coordinate system.

(1) BASE ZERO OFFSETThe base zero offset is displayed or set.

(2) +/- STROKE (BASE POS.): (with all models; for X/Y/Z/W axes)The +/- stroke end limit is displayed or set with the base coordinate system.The stroke value shown in the working range diagram can be set.

(3) +/- STROKE (VERT. POS.): (for turret A and Z-axis with MULTUS and MacTurn only)The +/- stroke end limit with the base position is displayed or set with the base coordinate system. The Z-axis stroke value with the vertical position shown in the working range diagram is set.

The +/- stroke end limit with the machine coordinate system that exists in the SYSTEM PARAMETER screen does not need to be set as it is automatically set.

LE32163R0300300550002


[Supplement]

Relational diagram between the Z-axis base zero and the +/- stroke end limitThe Z-axis base zero is determined at the point where the tool installation end face matches the chuck installation end face with the base position.The Z-axis base zero offset is determined by adding the rotation offset value to the Z-axis zero that is measured with the vertical position.

The rotation offset value is determined with the following formula.Rotation offset value = Z-axis turret center offset + (X-axis turret center offset) / 2

Machine zero

Chuck installation end face

Base zero

B. Turret center offset(rotation offset value)

B-axis rotation center

C. Base zero offset

A. Zero offset measured with the vertical position

Tool installation end face

D. +stroke end limit (machine coordinate)

E. +stroke end limit (base coordinate/base position)F. + stroke end limit (base coordinate/vertical position)

+SL1078 (with MULTUS B300)

M-spindle center at the tool installation end face

LE32163R0300300550003


Base Zero

The base zero must be set at a point between the machine zero and the program zero.The base zero is a reference point for the program zero, which is to be set at a certain point (the end face to which the chuck is installed) in the machine structure.The base zero is the same point as the "graphic zero with the Collision Avoidance System".In addition, the soft jaw machining function works on the premise that the base zero is set at the chuck installation end face.

Base zero

Z-axis base zero offset

Z+

Program zero

Machine zero

X-ax

is ba

se ze

ro o

ffset

X+

Z-axis program coordinate systemZ-axis machine coordinate system

X+ X+

Z+Z+

Spindle center

Z-axis zero offset

X-axis base zero coordinate systemX-axis program coordinate system

Z-axis base zero coordinate system


LE32163R0300300800001


[Base zero of H1 turret]

X-axis The position where the spindle center matches the M-spindle rotation center with the tool at its base position

Y-axis The position where the spindle center matches the M-spindle rotation center with the tool at its base position

Z-axis The position where the tool installation end face matches the chuck installation end face with the tool at its base position

W-axis The position where the tailstock sleeve end face matches the chuck installation end face.On the machine having the sub spindle, this is the position where the chuck installation end face of the 2nd spindle matches that of the 1st spindle.

Machine zero


Base zeroM-spindle center at the tool installation end face

B-axis rotation center

Z-axis base zero offset

X-ax

is ba

se ze

ro of

fset

Turret center offset(rotation offset value)

X+

Z+

Turret A

LE32163R0300300800002


1-10-7.Machine System Parameters

This parameter sets the turret index prohibition area in turret index control.The turret index prohibition area is specified with the angle position of the boundary the turret must not enter and the angle width of the prohibition area.To disable turret index control, set “0.000” in the field of “Turret index prohibition width.”

(1) Turret index boundary angleSet the negative side angle of the prohibition area.Setting unit: 1 degreeSetting range: 0 to 359.999Initial value:0

(2) Turret index prohibition widthSet the angle width that defines the boundary the turret must not enter.Setting unit: 1 degreeSetting range: 0 to 359.999Initial value:0


1-11. Tool Data Setting

1-11-1.Tool Shape Data

The tool registration function in tool data mode is used for setting tool shape data that is used in machining simulation, Collision Avoidance System (optional), and Advanced One Touch IGF (optional). The reference cutting position and the orthogonal cutting position are indexed by the B-axis control turret capable of 2 kinds of machining, and the shapes of the reference cutting position and the orthogonal cutting position are switched.

Tool shape data setting by tool registration

Tool shape data is set by performing tool registration.

Procedure :

1 In the Tool Data sheet in TOOL DATA mode, press F1 (tool registration).

2 Enter the tool number and tool comment.

3 Press F6 (HOLDER/TOOL SEL).

4 Press F1 (holder selection) and select the holder from the list.

5 Press F2 (tool selection) and select the tool from the list.

6 Press F4 (change attachment) to set protrusion amount, etc.

7 Press F7 (OK) to complete change attachment, then press F7 (OK) again to complete holder/tool selection.

8 Select the reference position from the list.


When entry of BA is complete, tool shape is set as shown in the display above.

LE32163R0300300580001


1-11-2.Tool Compensation

This item describes the basic concept of tool offset or compensation on MACTURN and MULTUS series machines.20 positions can be registered for each tool.Position number is determined by elements such as reference position/orthogonal position, A position/B position, 1st spindle/2nd spindle, and BA angle.Position contains information on tool offset, tool adjustment, nose R compensation, nose R direction, and tool wear offset.

7 to 12 are fixed for the machines having the sub-spindle.For the machines with single spindle, they can be used freely as with 13 to 20.

Tool No.

Position No.

Cutting position Tool offsetTool

adjustmentNose R

compensationNose R

direction

1

1 1st spindle reference A

2 1st spindle reference B

31st spindle reference A BA=45

41st spindle reference B BA=45

5 1st spindle orthogonal A

6 1st spindle orthogonal B

7 2nd spindle reference A

8 2nd spindle reference B

92nd spindle reference A BA=45

102nd spindle reference B BA=45

11 2nd spindle orthogonal A

12 2nd spindle orthogonal B

13 (User defined)

14 (User defined)

15 (User defined)

16 (User defined)

17 (User defined)

18 (User defined)

19 (User defined)

20 (User defined)


1-12. Other Functions

1-12-1.Tool Compensation Automatic Calculation Function (TL mode)

A machine with the tool compensation multi-system function has a tool compensation table for each system. However, it uses the same tools in principle, and it is, therefore, possible to roughly calculate the tool offset data on the other tools by internal operation if the tool offset data on any one of the tools is obtained.This automatic calculation function is applicable to the data on the tool number in the field (tool offset or nose R compensation (including offset direction)) in which the cursor is placed. The tool compensation system currently selected is the basis for calculation.Pressing the function key [F4] (AUTO CAL) activates the automatic calculation function.

1-12-2.Turret Coolant Interlock

The turret coolant can be output only when the turret is performing cutting position indexing.When the turret is performing ATC position indexing or has not completed indexing, it will not be output even if the coolant operation switch on the operation panel is turned ON. Perform a coolant operation after cutting position indexing has been completed.Additionally, the turret coolant will not be output as long as the shutter of the ATC is open.

1-12-3.Interlocks

(1) Turret indexing conditionsThe H1 turret can rotate when it is at only the “X-axis positive limit”.

(2) Tool rotation command interlock

a. M spindle interlock during M tool unclampingWhile the M tool is unclamped, torque on the M spindle is limited to 60% of its rating.Also, while the M tool is unclamped, M spindle rotation, orientation, jogging, and oscillation are prohibited.(Including synchronized tap and flat turning.)

The turret ATC position indexing command does not perform M-axis orientation.(M-axis orientation command from the ATC is enabled.)


1-12-4.Axis Travel Method Selection

Overview

Axis travel commands during machining program are issued in order to move the tool nose to a certain position in the program coordinate.After an axis travel command is issued, the axis travels to the target position obtained by the following formula (1).

Target position = program command value + machine zero point offset + zero point offset + zero point shift + tool offset...(1)

For example, when the zero offset or the tool offset is changed, the tool nose position is ensured on the program coordinate including the axis to which no axis travel command is given while taking its program coordinate position into consideration. Thus all the axes are shifted to the last program command value using the formula (1) above.

Further, if an axis that is not commanded to move is moved due to changes of machine zero point offset, zero point offset, zero point shift, and tool offset, this may not be desired by the operator. Thus, when an axis travel command is issued, it is possible to select parameters either to shift all axes not commanded to move to the prior program command value, or to shift only those axis that receive an axis travel command.


Detailed Specifications

Function

When an axis travel command is issued, it is possible to select either way by setting the following parameter, between the following two selections: shift all the axes to which no axis travel command is given to the last program command value, or shift the axis to which an axis travel command is given only.

Optional parameter other functions No. 70 Move only axis for order. (1: Effect/0: Ineffect)

(1) Shift all the axes to the last program command value.Determine the target position of each axis by each program analysis using the following formula (1).

Target position = program command value + machine zero point offset + zero point offset + zero point shift + tool offset...(1)

All the axes move to the target position obtained above.

Example When the Z-axis values in N1 above are as follows:

Program command value : 200.000

Zero offset : 50000.000

Zero shift : 0.000

Tool offset 1 : 50.000


the Z-axis target position (the machine coordinate position) will be 50250.000 according to the formula (1).

LE32163R0300300720001


(2) Shift the axis to which an axis travel command is given onlyAlthough the method of calculating the target position is the same as the previous page, the target position is determined only to the specified axis. Thus only the specified axis will be shifted.In addition, after the offset is changed, the current value of the axis to which no axis travel command is given is changed as it is calculated based on the current offset.

The current value is determined with the formula (2).

Current value = target position - machine zero offset - zero offset - zero shift - tool offset...(2)

The tool offset is changed in N2, and the tool offset amount changed from 50 to 20. At this time, if an axis travel command is issued only to the X-axis, the Z-axis target position (the machine coordinate position) is set to 50220.000, and travels by 30.000 (tool offset change amount).

Example

When the Z-axis values in N1 above are as follows:

Program command value : 200.000

Zero offset : 50000.000

Zero shift : 0.000



the Z-axis target position (the machine coordinate position) will be 50250.000 according to the formula (1).

The tool offset is changed in N2, and the tool offset amount changed from 50 to 20. At this time, if an axis travel command is issued only to the X-axis, the Z- axis target position (the machine coordinate position) is not changed, being remained as 50250.000 without shifting.In addition, the Z-axis current position display of 200.000 in N1 is changed to the current position of 220.000 in N2 per formula (2). A change of 30.000 (tool offset change amount).

LE32163R0300300720002


(3) Travel pathThe travel path is different between two methods mentioned so far, which are the method to shift all the axes to the last program command value (currently selected specification) and the method to shift the axis to which an axis travel command is given only (newly selectable specification).The following diagram shows the travel path difference.

LE32163R0300300720003


(4) Axis travel warning display functionWhen the specification which is to shift the axis to which an axis travel command is given only is selected, at the time when an axis command is issued after the tool offset and others are changed, difference is made between the last program command value and the current value with the axis to which no command is given as shown in the following diagram.

While this difference is being made, the following alarm is displayed as a warning sign. 4304 Alarm D No move without order after change offset XX

And, this warning indication can be released by setting the following parameter if not necessary. Optional parameter other functions No. 71 Display warning for axis movement (0: Not display 1: Display)

As shown in the example in item 2., the above alarm is raised when the program command value is 200 and the current value is 230. In this case this alarm is released if a travel command to the corresponding axis is issued.Or, it can be released by the NC reset.

LE32163R0300300720004


Exception Operations

This item describes the exception operations of the axis to which no axis travel command is given when the specification which is to shift the axis to which an axis travel command is given only (newly selectable specification) is selected.

(1) Y- axis center height offsetWhile the center height offset function is activated, axis travel restriction regarding this specification is not provided even when the Y- axis tool offset is changed during the Y- axis mode OFF.However, the restriction is provided if the travel amount is generated due to other than the Y- axis tool offset (zero offset, zero shift, turret position error offset, etc.).

Axis travel example

When the Y- axis mode is set to OFF, both the Y- axis tool offset and the X-axis tool offset are changed, and no axis travel command is issued, the Y- axis will travel by the change amount of the Y- axis tool offset. The X-axis travels by the offset amount of the Y- axis travel and does not travel the X-axis tool offset change amount.Moreover, the following alarm is displayed: 4304 ALARM- D No move without order after change offset.

(2) Nose R offset functionIn the blocks in which the Nose R offset starts and ends, axes may travel by the offset amount even when no axis travel command is issued. At this time, axes are traveled regarding any axis travel command was issued even when the method to shift the axis to which an axis travel command is given only (newly selectable specification) is selected.

(3) Slant Machining Mode FunctionThe inclined turning mode allows the axis travel command to be issued on the conversion coordinate system by creating the conversion coordinate system (the inclined turning mode coordinate system) which turns the X-Z plane around the Y- axis.

YIYs

XA

[Program]N1 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 T1N2 T2N3 G0 Z100

(Tool offset 1: X=0, Y=0, Z=0)(Tool offset 2: X=10, Y=10, Z=10)<-- The alarm "4304 ALARM-D" occurs.

Y-axis tool offset = 10The axis travels only when the center height offset function is activated and the Y-axis mode is set to OFF.

The N3 position when axis travel restriction is provided

The N3 position when no axis travel restriction is provided

X-axis tool offset = 10The X-axis does not travel since the X-axis command is not issued.

The X-axis travels by the offset amount 5.774, which is the Y-axis tool offset travel amount.

LE32163R0300300730001


The axis travel based on the inclined turning mode coordinate system is generated by the synthesized travel by the X-axis and the Z- axis. Even if no axis travel command is issued on the inclined turning mode coordinate system, the X-axis and the Z- axis are regarded as an axis travel command was issued as the X-axis and the Z- axis which create synthesized travel are operated based on the base coordinate system. At this time, the X-axis and the Z- axis are traveled regarding any axis travel command was issued even when the method to shift the axis to which an axis travel command is given only (newly selectable specification) is selected.

(4) Coordinate parallel movement, rotation, and copying functionThe coordinate parallel movement, rotation, and copying function use the base coordinate system for respective movements. As the axis to be specified with the coordinate system and the axis operated on the base coordinate system are different, the X-axis and the Y- axis are treated as an axis travel command was issued.At this time, the X-axis and the Y- axis are traveled regarding any axis travel command was issued even when the method to shift the axis to which an axis travel command is given only (newly selectable specification) is selected.

(5) 3D coordinate conversion functionThe 3D coordinate system rotates the base coordinate system using the X-Y plane/X-Z plane/Y-Z plane. The axis to be specified with the rotated coordinate system and the axis to be specified with the tool offset, zero offset, and zero shift, which are applied on the shift the base coordinate system, are not matched.Therefore, with the first axis travel command after the change by the tool offset, zero offset, and zero shift during the 3D coordinate conversion mode, an alarm B is raised if all of the X, Y and Z axes are not specified. After that, axis commands on X, Y and Z axes can be issued by an individual command.

2445 ALARM- B 3D coordinate conversion command error 11


Parameter

(1) “Move only axis for order” selectionBy selecting this parameter, the specification to shift all the axes to the last program command value (currently selected specification) is switched to the specification to shift the axis to which an axis travel command is given only (newly selectable specification) even when no axis travel command is issued.

Optional parameter other functions No. 70 Optional parameter bit No. 48 bit0 1: Effect (default) 0: Ineffect

To enable the parameter, the power needs to be cycled.

(2) “Display warning for axis movement” selectionWhen the specification to shift the axis to which an axis travel command is given only is selected, when there is an axis to which no axis travel command is given after the offset change, an alarm D can be displayed as a warning sign. The alarm D indication can be switched by setting this parameter.

Optional parameter other functions No. 71 Optional parameter bit No. 48 bit1 1: Display (default) 0: Not display

(3) Parameter Screen

LE32163R0300300740001


Alarms

4304 No move without order after change offset

While the specification to shift the axis to which an axis travel command is given only is being selected in the parameter, when the axis travel command is issued after changing any of the tool offset, zero offset, or zero shift, if an axis to which no axis travel command has been given exists although the offset was changed, the alarm is raised as a warning sign.

[Object]

None

[Character string]

None

[Code]

YYXXXX : A-turret axis selection Bit0 : Z Bit1 : X Bit2 : C Bit3 : W Bit4 : Y Bit5 : BYY : B turret axis information Bit0 : Z Bit1 : X Bit2 : C Bit3 : W

2445 3D Coordinate conversion

G303/G302 command is wrong.

[Object]

SYSTEM

[Character string]

None

[Code]

11- > All X/Y/Z are not instructed in by the first axis movement instruction after the offset (zero offset, zero shift, and zero tool offset) is changed.

5947-E P-64SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

2-1. Overview

The ATC unit discussed here exchanges the tools in the turret with the tools stored in the magazine.The ATC provided in MACTURN and MULTUS is NC-controlled and rotates, advances, or retracts its tool change arm by the BL motor.

2-2. Machine Specifications

2-2-1. Outline of the Machine

Turret

MACTURN 250/350/550 and MULTUS B200/B300/B400/B750 has an H1 turret to which an L or M tool is mounted in the same location.For details on indexing operation, refer to [SECTION 1, Turret Operation].

Fig.2-1 Turret (Viewed from the Machine Front)

Special (Optional) SpecificationsThis manual contains operational information for machines equipped with the optional ATC device. Therefore, depending on the configuration of your machine, some information may not be applicable. For information on the configuration of your machine, please refer to the final specification document.

T1

H1 Turret

LE32163R0300400020001


Magazine

Each pot on the magazine can be equipped with a sensor for an L tool, M tool, or DT tool (dummy tool). (A sensor can be attached only if it is a sensor that allows tool exchange.

The magazine has two tool index positions. They are the ATC position where automatic tool change is performed by the ATC, and the manual tool change position where a tool is manually mounted to or removed from a magazine pot.

When a super-large diameter tool is stored in the magazine, the pots (magazine numbers) before and after the pot in which this tool is stored must be vacant. This means, when a super-large diameter tool is stored in the magazine, tools cannot be stored in the pots (magazine numbers) before and after this pot. Pots in this state are called “dummy pots”.

Similarly, a dummy pot is secured for an R-large diameter tool and an L-large diameter tool. With an R-large diameter tool, the pot at the right side (magazine number “n-1”) of the pot (magazine number “n”) where an R-large diameter tool is stored is secured as a dummy pot. With an L-large diameter tool, the pot at the left side (magazine number “n+1”) of the pot (magazine number “n”) where an L-large diameter tool is stored is secured as a dummy pot.

When a large diameter tool is stored in one of the pots in the magazine (magazine number n), pots on the left and right (magazine numbers n-1 and n+1) may store standard tools only. If a large diameter tool is stored in a pot, a super-large diameter tool may not be stored in either the left of right of that pot, and a large-left diameter tool may not be placed in the right pot or a large-right diameter tool may not be placed in the left pot. (MULTUS B200/B300/400 only)

When a large / super-large / large-right / large-left diameter tool is exchanged from the magazine to the turret, they are returned to their original magazine pot upon completion of machining. Therefore, when a super-large/large-right/large-left diameter tool is mounted on the turret from the magazine, the magazine pot which held that tool is a pot with a designated return tool (referred to as “reserved pot” ), and other tools will not be returned to such reserved pots.

Cutting Tools

Tool numbers 1 through 9999 may be used. Tool position numbers 1 through 20 may be used.Tools are managed by entering the following data for each tool in tool data setting mode.When exchanging a heavy tool, movement speed of the tool change arm can be changed to accommodate for such special weight considerations of the tool. By specifying the tool weight in tool data setting mode, when a heavy tool is changed, the tool change arm will switch the speed for rotation and forward/backward movement.The NC ATC specification requires the following data to be set.

Tool No.Tool kind (L-tool, M-tool, DT-tool, sensor)Tool size / tool weight (Standard, R-large / Heavy, L-large / Heavy, Super-large / Heavy / Super large: Heavy / Large: Heavy)

Standard tool Super-large diameter tool

Dummy pot

Magazine Magazine MagazineNo."n-1" No."n" No."n+1"

LE32163R0300400030001


2-2-2. Machine operation

ATC Operation of MULTUS B200/B300/B400

Tool change arm EAin RS position

Tool change armin ATC position

Tool change arm EArotation (EC axis)

Ready station RSin tool change/MG position

Ready station toolinsert/extract

Magazine MGrotation

Tool change arm/M-tool spindle position interlock

Tool change arm EAmovement (EZ axis)

Tool change arm(Insert/Extract)

M-tool spindleIndexing

M-tool spindle lock pinclamp/unclamp

ATC shutteropen/close

LE32163R0300400050001

LE32163R0300400050002


2-2-3. ATC Operation

MULTUS B200/B300/400

S1 Waiting for next tool command

S2 Magazine (MG) indexing

S3 Ready station (RS) tool insertion

S4 RS change position

S5 RS tool extraction

S6 RS MG position

S7 Waiting for the machine cycle end

S8 Tool change arm (EA) tool insertion/Shutter close

S9 EA rotation 90°

S10 Turret tool unclamp

S11 EA tool extraction

S12 EA rotation (180°)

S13 EA tool insertion

S14 Turret tool clamp

S15 EA rotation 90°

S16 EA RS position/Shutter close

S17 MG return pot indexing (EA)


S19 RS tool insertion

S20 RS MG position

S21 Skip RS


MULTUS B750



S3 Sub-arm (SA) MG position

S4 SA tool lock

S5 SA tool extraction

S6 SA RS position

S7 SA tool insertion

S8 SA tool unlock

S9 SA retract position


S11 Waiting for the command (M06 command)

S12 Starting the MG return pot indexing (Turret)

S13 Shutter openM-axis fixed position stop

S14 Move to replace position (approach position → replace position)

S15 Tool change

EA clamp

Turret tool unclamp

EA tool extraction

EA rotation (180°)

EA tool insertion

Turret tool clamp

EA retract position

S16 Move to approach position (replace position → approach position)

S17 Shutter close

S18 MG return pot indexing (RS)

S19 RS MG position

S20 SA RS position

S21 SA tool lock


S23 SA MG position


S25 SA tool unlock

S26 SA intermediate position


MACTURN250/350



S3 RS tool insertion


S5 RS tool extraction/Shutter 2 close

S6 Waiting for the machine cycle end

S7 Starting the MG return pot indexing

S8 Shutter open

S9 Tool change

EA clamp

Turret tool unclamp

EA tool extraction

EA rotation (180°)

EA tool insertion

Turret tool clamp

EA retract position

S10 Shutter close


S12 RS tool insertion/Shutter 2 close

S13 RS MG position

S14 RS tool extraction


MACTURN550



S3 SA MG position

S4 SA tool lock


S6 SA RS position


S8 SA tool unlock

S9 SA retract position

S10 Waiting for the command (M06 command)

S11 Starting the MG return pot indexing (Turret)

S12 ATC shutter closeTurret tool unclamp low pressure


S14 Shutter 2 close

S15 Shutter open

S16 Tool change

EA clamp

Turret tool unclamp

EA tool extraction

EA rotation (180°)

EA tool insertion

Turret tool clamp

EA retract position

S17 Shutter close

S18 Shutter 2 close

S19 RS MG position


S21 SA RS position

S22 SA tool lock


S24 SA MG position


S26 SA tool unlock

S27 SA intermediate position


2-3. ATC Logic Tables

For the ATC logic table, refer to the Appendix.

2-3-1. Input Logic Table

The input logic tables indicate the input signal statuses of ATC units necessary for the completion of individual ATC sequences.

(1) Code

(2) Status Input Items

a. The ON/OFF status of inputs No. 0120 to No. 0502 can be confirmed on the Check Data ATC Input screen. (Refer to [SECTION 2, 2-8. Program Command].

b. Concerning the item of “T Tool change position”, the status input is assumed to be ON (satisfied) when the actual position is within “0.1 mm of the position (machine coordinate) set at the parameter setting screen.

(3) How to Read the Input Logic TablesThe input logic tables show the ATC steps in the left part and the ON/OFF status of the input signals required to complete the individual steps is indicated in the corresponding lines.The Auto-branch data indicates that if M228 is executed, the ATC sequence No. branches to the specified sequence.

: Inputs that must be ON.

A/ : Input conditions for A mode

B/ : Input conditions for B mode

: Inputs that may be either ON or OFF.

(The input conditions that correspond to [ ] of the B–test data must be OFF. For the B–test data, refer to the input logic tables.)

SA: Sub arm

RS: Ready station

EA: Tool change arm

MG: Magazine

T: TurretLE32163R0300400080001


2-3-2. Output Logic Table

The output logic tables indicate the signals output at each ATC operation sequence.

(1) Code

(2) Operation Output Items

a. ON/OFF status of all output items can be checked at the CHECK DATA ATC OUTPUT screen.(Refer to [SECTION 2, 2-8. Program Command].

(3) Reading the Output Logic TableThe output logic tables show the ATC steps in the left part and the ON/OFF status of the input signals required to execute the individual steps is indicated in the corresponding lines.

2-3-3. Manual Interlock Table

During manual ATC operation using the 1-step advance/1-step reverse function, ATC operation sequence advances or returns by one step when all of the input conditions indicated in the interlock tables are satisfied.The table is organized in the same fashion as the input logic table.Manual step branch and manual step back show the destination of ATC sequence number where operation branches during 1-step advance/1-step reverse operation.

: ON output

: OFF output

A/ : A–mode output

B/ : B–mode output

: Outputs that go OFF when the NC is reset during operation

SA: Sub arm

RS: Ready station

EA: Tool change arm

MG: Magazine

T: TurretLE32163R0300400090001


2-4. Manual operation

2-4-1. Manual Magazine Operation

Magazine Operation Panel (MACTURN250/350/550, MULTUS B750)

The magazine operation panel screen transfers in the manner as illustrated above.The Magazine Manual Operation screen and the Tool Registration screen are the main screens which can be selected with the Page (triangle) buttons. Each of the main screens have pop-up sub-screens that display for setting Indexing No., Tool Kind, and Tool Size. Please refer to the above for which button to press for popping-up each sub-screen.

INT

POT NO.

TOOL NO.

INDEX NO.

32

19 L STD

32

CCW CW INDEX RESTART

CLRTOOL NO.

POT NO.

KIND

KIND SIZE

SETSIZE

32

19

L

STD

INDEX NO.

8

5

2

CLR

9

6

3

ENT

7

4

1

0

NO.1234

(Index Number Setting) (Tool Number Setting) (Tool Kind Setting) (Tool Size Setting)

8

5

2

CLR

9

6

3

ENT

7

4

1

0

NO.1234BR

STD

B

E

H

R- large

Standard

L- large

E- large

Heavy

L

M

S

DT

Turning

Mil lng

Senser

Dummy

TOOL NO.

(Manual Magazine Operation Screen) (Tool Entry Screen)

LE32163R0300400110001


(1) Manual Magazine Operation ScreenUse this screen to manually index the magazine.

a. [INT] buttonThe magazine operation panel can only be used when it is in interrupt state. The [INT] button is not operative in the following cases.

The present ATC sequence is neither the ATC start state nor the next tool prepared state.

An ATC command is being executed.

The ATC is in the individual operation mode.

A tool is being manually mounted/removed at the turret.

The magazine is waiting for the pressing of the [RESTART] button (blinking).

The indicating lamp at the side of the [INT] button lights when the magazine enters the manual interruption state.To cancel the manual interruption state, press the [INT] button again. If the button is pressed while the magazine is rotating or the magazine is waiting for the pressing of the [INDEX] button (blinking), pressing of the [INT] button is disregarded and the manual intervention state is not canceled.

b. [POT No.] buttonThe button is used to index the magazine manually by designating the magazine pot number.Press this button before pressing the [INDEX No.] button and the magazine pot number can be designated.The magazine pot number of the magazine pot that is currently indexed to the manual tool mounting/removal position is displayed in the field at the right of the [POT No.] button.In the state the pot number designation is selected, the [POT No.] button is displayed in the ON state.

c. [TOOL No.] buttonThe button is used to index the magazine manually by designating the tool number.Press this button before pressing the [INDEX No.] button and the tool number can be designated.The information of the tool stored in the magazine pot that is currently indexed to the manual tool mounting/removal position is displayed in the field at the right of the [TOOL No.] button.In the state the tool number designation is selected, the [TOOL No.] button is displayed in the ON state.

d. [INDEX No.] buttonUsed to display the 10-key sub-screen used for specifying the pot number or tool number when performing magazine manual indexing. Select either pot number or tool number designation in b or c, then press the [INDEX No.] button to display the pop-up 10-key. After entering the number, press the [ENT] key to close the pop-up screen. The specified indexing number is displayed on the right side of the [INDEX No.] button.

e. [CCW] buttonThe magazine rotates 1 pot to the left. By pressing and holding the button, it will rotate continuously. The button is not enabled unless the following conditions are met.

The magazine is not rotating.


The magazine door is closed.

The sub-arm is at either the RS position or the standby position.

The tool in the manual tool mounting/removal position is clamped (only for MACTURN550).

f. [CW] buttonThe magazine rotates 1 pot to the right. By pressing and holding the button, it will rotate continuously. The button is not enabled unless the following conditions are met.

The magazine is not rotating.

The magazine door is closed.

The sub-arm is at either the RS position or the standby position.

The tool in the manual tool mounting/removal position is clamped (only for MACTURN550).

g. [INDEX] buttonThe magazine pot number or tool number displayed in [INDEX No.] display is indexed to the magazine manual tool replacement position by rotating in the shortest direction. During magazine indexing operation, the [INDEX] button lights.When the magazine is put on hold during its rotation started by the [INDEX] button, the [INDEX] button will flash. When the [INDEX] button is flashing, if the magazine rotation conditions in e and f are met, pressing the [INDEX] button again will resume magazine rotation operation.

h. [RESTART] buttonIf an ATC command is issued during magazine operation manual interrupt or when the magazine door is open, the ATC command wait state is triggered. When magazine manual interrupt is released or when the magazine door is closed, ATC command execution becomes possible and the [RESTART] button flashes. By pressing the [RESTART] button while the [RESTART] button is flashing, the flashing stops and ATC command is executed.

i. [ ] (page) button

Press the [ ] (page) button while the magazine is in the manual interruption state to change the screen to the tool entry screen.

(2) Tool Entry ScreenUse this screen to set the information of the tools to be stored in the magazine.

a. POT NO. displayThis displays the magazine pot number of the pot indexed at the manual tool mounting/removal position.

b. [TOOL No.] buttonUsed for setting the tool number of the tool in the magazine manual tool replacement position. Press this button to display the 10-key pop-up sub-screen, then enter the tool number and press [ENT]. The tool number entered is displayed to the right side of [TOOL NO.].


c. [KIND] buttonUsed for setting the tool kind of the tool in the magazine manual tool replacement position. Press this button to display the tool kind pop-up sub-screen, then select the tool kind. The selected tool kind is displayed to the right side of [KIND].When the tool kind is selected, “STD” is automatically displayed for [SIZE].

d. [SIZE] buttonUsed for setting the tool size of the tool in the magazine manual tool replacement position. Press this button to display the tool size pop-up sub-screen, then select the tool size. The selected tool size is displayed to the right side of [SIZE].

e. [CLR] buttonThat is, tool number is cleared to “0000” and the settings of the tool kind and tool size are cleared and the data fields are blanked.


f. [SET] buttonThe button is used to enter the tool information displayed at the tool entry screen.In the tool registration screen, it is only possible to check the settings of tool information set in each of the sub-screens. Actual registration of tool information must be performed by pressing the [SET] button. If the tool registration screen is switched before registering the tool information, all the selected tool information will be erased.If tool kind and tool size are left blank when registering, tool kind is registered as dummy and tool size is registered as standard.

g. [ ] (page) buttonPress the [PAGE] button while the magazine is in the manual intervention state to change the screen to the manual magazine operation screen.

(3) Error Display ScreenIf an error is made on the magazine operation panel, an error message is displayed. Press the

[ ] button to clear the error screen.

(4) Tool Number Display for Dummy Pot and Reserved PotIf a tool pot set as a dummy or reserved pot is indexed to the manual tool mounting/removal position, the following code is displayed as a tool kind. Dummy pot D Reserved pot RIn this case, the tool number of the corresponding tool is displayed in the [TOOL NO.] data field.

Error code Error message Contents

20002Tool number duplicate registration

Attempted to register an already registered tool number for another pot.

20003 Tool does not existExecuted an indexing command with an unregistered tool number.

20004Large diameter tool registration error

Attempted to register a large diameter tool in a pot where large diameter tools cannot be registered.

20005Reserved pot registration error

Tool registration was performed on a reserved pot.

20006Fixed pot delete error

Tool deletion was made for a reserved pot.

20007Pot number not found

Tool selection command to index a non-existing pot number was executed.


Magazine Operation Panel (MULTUS B200/B300/B400)

(1) MG Manual InterruptionWhen the ATC operation sequence number is “S1 Waiting for next tool command” or “S7 Waiting for machine cycle end”, the MG manual interruption mode can be established by turning on the interruption ON/OFF select SW. Once in magazine operation manual interrupt mode, it stays in this mode even with a reset. The mode is turned off by the operation described below.However, if the machine is in any of the following states, magazine operation manual interrupt mode is not enabled even if the ATC sequence number is either of the above. Once the following state is cancelled, switch the Interrupt switch to Interrupt mode.

- Executing the ATC manual operation, ATC individual operation or manually attaching or removing the turret tool- Executing the ATC command (MT, M06, M228 and MG commands)- The machine is operating.- The machine lock is ON.

When magazine operation manual interrupt mode is on, it can be switched off by setting the Interrupt on/off switch on the magazine operation panel to off. Main magazine operation manual interrupt can be switched off regardless of the ATC sequence number, but to switch it off, the magazine door must be closed. When magazine operation manual interrupt is on but the magazine door is not closed, magazine manual interrupt is not possible even if the [INT] key on the magazine operation panel is pressed.The status of main MG manual interruption mode is not stored when the machine is turned off, so that the main MG manual interruption is turned off when the machine is turned on again.

During magazine rotation, magazine operation manual interrupt cannot be switched off. After rotation stops, set the Interrupt switch from on to off to switch off magazine operation manual interrupt mode.

(2) MG Manual RotationWhen magazine operation manual interrupt mode is on, and the magazine door is closed, manual rotation of the magazine is possible by operating the key on the magazine operation panel. Even if magazine operation manual interrupt mode is on, if the magazine door is not closed, key operation on the magazine operation panel is ignored, and the magazine does not rotate.

Although the “MG door is unlocked” when the “MG manual interruption mode is turned on”, the “MG door is locked” while the magazine is rotating.

[Supplement]

The manual rotation is not accepted unless the following conditions for rotating the magazine are met.

The MG door is closed.

The ready station is positioned at the “RS MG position” and “RS tool extraction position”


(3) EMG. STOPThis button functions in the same way as the emergency stop button on the operation panel and machine panel.

IO

MANUAL INT.

MG. MANUAL

INDEX START

DOOR INTERLOCK

RESTART

EMG. STOP

CCWCW

LE32163R0300400120001


Magazine Door

The interlock functions related to magazine door operation are described below.The magazine door is locked by the electromagnetic lock in the following statuses and thus it cannot be opened.

During ATC operation

During magazine rotation

In the magazine manual operation intervention mode OFF state

NC is running.

Even under these statuses, the electromagnetic lock does not lock the magazine door in the following cases.

In the machine lock state

Magazine door close signal is OFF.

Alarm message “Please open the magazine door” is displayed.

When the magazine door is not closed

(1) Any of the following operations or commands causes an alarm. Jog switch or pulse handle operation to feed an axis, rotation or inching operation of the spindle, sub-spindle and M-tool spindle, turret indexing operation, axis feed commands, rotation or orientation command of the spindle, sub-spindle and M-tool spindle, C-axis connection command, and turret index command.

(2) An alarm is triggered if any ATC manual operation and ATC operation command (MT, M06, M228, and MG command) is attempted.

(3) Although manual ATC operation is enabled by the setting at the “MACHINE SYSTEM PARAMETER” screen, starting manual ATC operation causes an alarm.

(4) Manual turret tool mounting/removal operation is permitted by pressing the [MANUAL TOOL EXCHANGE] key.If the [MANUAL TOOL EXCHANGE] key is pressed when the M-tool spindle is unclamped, an alarm will occur in response to the execution of the M-tool spindle orientation which is initiated by the pressing of the [MANUAL TOOL EXCHANGE] key.

Mounting/Removing a Tool Manually

To manually mount or remove a tool at the pot indexed to the manual tool mounting/removal position, follow the procedure indicated below.

Procedure :

1 Move the ZA-axis to the work position using the machine operation panel at the front of the machine.

2 Set the magazine manual operation intervention mode using the magazine operation panel at the rear of the machine.


3 Index the tool to be changed to the manual tool mounting/removal position.

4 Open the magazine door after the magazine has stopped.

5 Mount/remove a tool using a special jig.

6 Close the magazine door and set the magazine manual operation intervention mode OFF.


2-4-2. Manual ATC Operation

ATC manual operation is performed by using the operation screen that is displayed by pressing the MACHINE OPERATION key on the machine operation panel. Manual replacement of the turret tool is performed by operating the Tool Change Preparation, Tool Clamp, and Tool Unclamp keys on the machine operation panel.

(1) Turret IndexingThe turret can be indexed in either of the two positions; ATC position and cutting position. When the turret is indexed by using the TURRET INDEX key after selecting “INDEX TO ATC POSITION” or INDEX TO CUTTING POSITION, the turret index status is changed. Although the indexing status of the cutting position indexing reference point is similar to the ATC position indexing, the turret must be in the ATC position indexing status while the ATC cycle is in process. Therefore, care the difference when operating the ATC.

INDEX ATC POS : When the Turret CCW key is pressed, the turret is indexed to the ATC position. It will not operate with the CW key.

INDEX CUT POS : The turret rotates in the selected direction that corresponds to the NORMAL or REVERSE and the turret is indexed to the cutting position.

MACHINE OPERATION key

LE32163R0300400150001

LE32163R0300400150002


(2) ATC manual operationIf the Reset button on the machine operation panel is pressed during the execution of an ATC command, the moment the Reset button is pressed, ATC operation stops in the state in which the operation signals are output according to the ATC sequence output logic table. To restore the ATC operation, select the manual mode and return the ATC to the state before the execution of ATC operation using the 1 STEP ADVANCE and 1 STEP REVERSE buttons.

1-CYCLE START buttonOperation starts from the ATC start state, and the tool in the magazine pot indexed at the current ATC position and the tool indexed at the ATC position on the turret are exchanged. If the 1 CYCLE START button is pressed without performing ATC position indexing on the turret for which the tool will be changed, and without performing indexing of the tool change position, change operation is stopped midway.

Each time the 1 STEP ADVANCE button is pressed, ATC operation sequence is advanced 1 step at a time. However, if the current operational step is incomplete, it cannot advance to the next sequence step. Each sequence step is complete when all conditions shown in the input logic table are fulfilled.

Each time the 1 STEP REVERSE button is pressed, ATC operation sequence is reversed 1 step at a time. 1 Step Reverse cannot be performed from ATC operation sequence 1.

INTERLOCK RELEASE button This button is used to restore the ATC operation if it has been stooped halfway due to occurrence of an alarm.

(3) Shutter Open/CloseManually open or close the shutter provided between the machine and the ATC.

[Supplement]

[Supplement]

SHUTTER OPEN : The shutter opens.

SHUTTER CLOSE : The shutter closes.

Under the following condition, shutter open/close operation is disabled and switch operation is ignored.

The tool change arm is not in EA rotation position A or C.

When ATC operation sequence is executed while the shutter is opened by the shutter open command, or when an open shutter is opened/closed, the shutter will not be closed in ATC operation sequence thereafter. Close the shutter with the shutter Close key.


(4) Manual Tool Change for Turret-Mounted Tools

The tool can be mounted or dismounted to the turret in manual mount/dismount mode when manually changing the tool mounted to the turret without changing the ATC.

Procedure :

1 Index the turret to the ATC position or BA = 0°.

2 Select the manual operation mode and close the front door.

3 Press the “Tool Change Preparation” key. M-axis orientation is performed and the M-axis is clamped. During this time, the LED on the “Tool Change Preparation” key flashes.

4 When Tool Change Preparation mode is selected, the LED on the “Tool Change Preparation” key lights.

5 Press the Tool Unclamp key. The tool is unclamped.

6 Insert a new tool into the turret and press the Tool Clamp key to clamp the tool.

7 Press the Tool Change Preparation key again. This cancels Tool Change Preparation mode and the LED on the Tool Change Preparation key goes off.

8 Register tool data for a new tool in tool data setting mode. Make sure to do this.

[Supplement]

Tool change is not possible even if the Tool Change Preparation key is pressed unless the following conditions are satisfied.

The spindle is stopped.

The rotary tool is stopped.

The turret is not rotating.

LE32163R0300400150003


[Supplement]

2-5. Program Commands

2-5-1. ATC Commands

ATC related commands are as follows. The command contains 4 digits for tool number and 2 digits for tool position number.

(1) MT=○○○○01 …Next tool preparation commandThe tool with tool number specified in ○○○○ is indexed in the magazine and is prepared as the next tool at the ready station.

(2) TC=1 …Command to index the turret to the ATC positionThe turret with the turret number (H1 turrets are fixed to 1) specified in TC is indexed to the ATC position.

(3) M06...................Tool change commandThe tool prepared at the ready station is replaced with the tool indexed to the ATC position. The replaced tool is returned to the magazine.

(4) TD=□□○○○○ M423 (or M323) ... Tool change and index command (effective only in TD mode)The command indexes the turret as specified after changing the tool to the one with the specified tool number.□□ : position number○○○○ : tool numberTD command and M423 (or M323) should be specified in the same block; they cannot be specified together with other command in the same block.Example of bad program) G00 X1000 Z1000 TD=010001 M323

M423 and M323 can be switched each other by setting the parameter below.Optional parameter other functions No.42 M code macro command type selection Effect / Ineffect(Optional parameter bit No.11 bit2)

(5) M228...................Tool return commandThe command returns the tool prepared as the next tool to the magazine.

While in Tool Change Preparation mode, the following manual operations are disregarded.

Spindle rotation

Milling tool rotation

Other ATC manual operations

Turret Rotation


(6) MG= ○○ …Magazine index commandThe magazine pot with the pot number specified by ○○ is indexed to the ATC position.

[Supplement]

(7) G21 HP=1 …ATC position travel command (turret travel to tool change position command)Used to move the saddle to the tool change position. When the tool change position is not Y=0, this G21 command is issued while in Y-axis mode.

(8) M204/M205 …Shutter close/open commandThese commands close and open the shutter provided between the machining area of the machine and the ATC.The Shutter Close command is disabled under the following conditions and the message “Alarm A 1807 Shutter Close conditions missing” is displayed.

The tool change arm is not located in EA retract position A or EA retract position B.

(Turret current X-axis position) > (X-axis positive travel limit setting in system parameter)

[Supplement]

If a tool change cycle is stopped in the middle of it, the manual interruption key on the magazine operation panel is not enabled. Thus the magazine cannot be rotated by manual operation.Instead, the magazine can be rotated by executing the MG command in the MDI operation mode.

If a tool is in the magazine pot even though the pot is displayed as having no tool on the magazine information screen, the ATC sequence is stopped halfway when the tool is attempted to be returned to the pot.In such case, the tool change cycle can be proceeded normally by indexing an empty pot with execution of the MG command in the MDI mode.

When the ATC operation sequence is executed in the state the shutter is opened by the shutter open command or when the shutter is closed then opened by the shutter open and close commands in the state the shutter is open during the execution of ATC operation sequence, the shutter will not be closed in later ATC operation sequence even if the sequence includes shutter close operation.To close the shutter in such state, use the shutter close command.The 1 Step Reverse lamp flashes while executing 1 Step Reverse.Examples:

An ATC operation sequence is executed while the shutter is kept open by the M205 command. →The shutter is not closed by the ATC operation sequence.

Executing an ATC operation sequence continuously by once closing/opening the shutter by executing the M204/M205 command after the shutter was opened by the ATC operation sequence. → The shutter is not closed even if a step where the shutter should be closed is executed.


(9) M227...................ATC operating completion wait commandOf the ATC operation sequences, Next Tool Preparation and Tool Return are operations that can be performed regardless of the status of the machine. Therefore, the MT command returns an answer immediately, and the M06 command returns an answer when the ATC operation sequence number is in the tool return start state. Therefore, the command following the MT command or M06 command can be executed at the same time as ATC operation. However, if the front door is being opened after the M06 command, for safety reasons, the front door must be opened after ATC operation is fully completed.Therefore, the command that suspends front door opening operation until the completion of ATC operations is provided.When the M227 command is specified in the block next to the one containing the MT or M06 command, the commands specified following M227 are executed only after all ATC operations have been completed.

(10) M08/M09...................Turret coolant ON/OFFAutomatically detects when the turret is at Cutting position indexing (Reference cutting position indexing, Orthogonal cutting position indexing, B-axis cutting position indexing), and outputs turret coolant from the coolant discharge position of that turret. If the turret is in ATC position indexing state or turret indexing operation is incomplete, coolant is not output even if the coolant enable command is sent.


2-5-2. ATC Macro Commands

Command to move to the tool change position can be performed using the G171 command, which is the ATC macro command.By using the M421 command, which issues both the G171 command and the M06 tool change command together, it is possible to command both travel to tool change position and tool change with one M-code command.

(1) G171_ATP = 1 … Travel to tool change position command (_ represents a space.)The command includes the following three operations. Indexing turret station “1” into the ATC positionY-axis mode ONTo the tool change position corresponding to the type of tool mounted on turret number 1.(station “1”), by the “G21 HP = “1” ” commandThe above 3 operations are performed. After execution of this command, Y-axis mode is enabled.Also, when performing turret rotation ATC position indexing with the G171 ATP=ΔΔ command, the command is issued when the turret is at the positive variable limit position. When it is not at the positive variable limit, turret rotation cannot be performed, so it stays in the operation state.

(2) G171_AHP = ...................Command for positioning at tool change positionY-axis mode ONPositioning of the turret to the tool change position, corresponding to “AHP = ”, by the “G21 HP = ” command.Y-axis mode OFF if “AHP = 4”The above 3 operations are performed. After the execution of “G171 AHP = 1, 2”, the machine is in the Y-axis mode. After the execution of “G171 AHP = 4”, the Y-axis mode is OFF.


(3) M421...................Positioning at tool change position/Tool change command/Positioning at return positionIndexing the turret station ΔΔ to the ATC position according to the MT command executedY-axis mode ONPositioning of the turret to the tool change position, corresponding to the selected tool type(station ΔΔ), by the “G21 HP = ” commandTool changeExecute “G21 HP = 4” (With M421 command, after execution of tool change operation, it always returns to return position “4”.Y-axis mode OFFThe above 6 operations are performed. Before executing the M421 command, the following 2 conditions must be satisfied.(1) The MT command has been executed.(2) Positioned at the X-axis positive variable limit. Or, the turret is indexed at the ATC position.If the M423 command is executed without satisfying these conditions, the “Alarm B User reserved code” is triggered.If the NC is reset after the execution of an MT command, execute the MT command again before M421.

[Supplement]

(4) M423 …Travel to tool change position/Tool change command/Travel to return position/Turret indexingPursuant to the TD command executed prior to execution of the M423 command, the turret is indexed to the ATC position.Y-axis mode ONTravel to the tool change position by G21 HP=1 command.Tool changeExecute “G21 HP = 4” (With the M423 command, after executing tool change operation, it always returns to return position “4”.Y-axis mode OFFTurret indexing operation by position numberThe above 7 operations are performed. Before executing the M423 command, the following 2 conditions must be satisfied.(1) The TD command must be executed. Or, issue command within the same block.(2) Positioned at the X-axis positive variable limit. Or, the turret is indexed at the ATC position.

If the M423 command is executed without satisfying these conditions, the “Alarm B User reserved code” is triggered.If reset after execution of the TD command, execute the TD command again before M423 command.

Since G171 and M421 commands are macro commands, these commands call the corresponding macro subprograms from the operation area of the NC memory and execute them.Therefore, designation of these ATC macro commands is not allowed unless the corresponding macro subprograms are stored in the operation area of the NC memory.Macro subprograms are automatically registered to the operation area of the NC memory when the operation mode is switched to the automatic operation mode for the first time after turning on the power.To execute G171 or M421 immediately after turning on the power, change the operation mode to the automatic mode before executing them.


2-5-3. Others

(1) The A turret rotates when the following conditions are satisfied.(Saddle YS-axis positioning position) ≥ (Spindle center line position set for system parameter)The X- and Z-axis positions of the saddle satisfy the following relationship.(Variable limits of X/Z in the positive direction) ≤ (Saddle X/Z-axis positioning position) ≤ (Travel end limit of X/Z-axis)

(2) An alarm occurs if the turret is rotated in the state the tool change arm is in the machine.

[Supplement]

(3) If the RESET button on the machine operation panel is pressed during the execution of an ATC command, ATC operation stops in the state the operation signals are output according to the ATC sequence output logic table at the moment the RESET button is pressed.To restore the ATC operation, select the manual mode and return the ATC to the state before the execution of ATC operation using the 1 STEP ADVANCE and 1 STEP REVERSE buttons.

The state “the tool change arm is in the machine” means the following state.The tool change arm rotation status is not the EA rotation retraction position.


2-5-4. Program example

A sample program is shown below.

When tool life management function is not used (TD mode)

L-tool number: 3, 4 M-tool number: 11, 12Example 5)

[Supplement]

N001 M03 S500 M42

N002 G00 X5000 Z4000 Travel to turret rotation position

N003 MT=0401 Tool preparation command (04..Tool number)

N004 TD=010004 M423 Tool change command (Changed to tool number 4, indexes to position number 1)


N008 G00 X500 Z500

Program for turning process








N044 G00 X500 Z500

Program for milling process

N999 M02

In Example 5:If tool No. 4 is already mounted in the turret station, the following MT commands are ignored and the operation proceeds to N004 and later.N003 MT=0401N004 TD=010004 M423If there is no MT command, it is possible to call the tool using the TD command M423.


When tool life management function is used (TD mode)

L-tool number: 3, 4 M-tool number: 11, 12Example 6)

[Supplement]

N001 TLID

N002 M03 S500 M42


N004 TG=0004 MT=1 Tool preparation command (4..Tool group number)

N005 TDG=010004 M423 Tool change command

(Changed to the tool of tool group number 4, indexes to position number 1)


N007 G00 X5000 Z5000

N008 G00 X500 Z500






N024 G00 X5000 Z5000

N025 G00 X500 Z500






N044 G00 X500 Z500

Program for milling process

N999 M02

In Example 6: If the tool of tool group No. 4 is already mounted in the turret station, the following MT commands are ignored and the operation proceeds to N054 and later. N004 TG=0004 MT=1N005 TDG=010004 M423If there is no MT command, it is possible to call the tool using the TD command M423.


2-6. AUTO

For details of operating procedure in the automatic operation mode, refer to the Operation Manual for OSP-E100L.This section deals with the operation procedure of the functions specific to the ATC specification.

2-6-1. Sequence Return Procedure

The sequence recovery function is used when a job running under AUTO is stopped by a reset or emergency stop. It restarts the job from 1 sequence step before the interrupted step so it is not necessary to start the program from the beginning again. However, the following ATC related commands do not perform ATC operation even when the sequence recover function is used.

MT command

MG command

M204/M205 command

M06 command

M228 command

Operation example:

Procedure :

1 Mount tool number 20 to turret T1. Enter the following in MDI operation mode.[T][D][=][0][1][0][0][2][0][M][4][2][3][write/execute][start]

2 In AUTO, MDI, or MANUAL modes, check the current ATC sequence number on the ATC Status Display screen (see [2-8 ATC status display]). If the current ATC sequence number is not 1, set it to 1 by operating the ATC in ATC manual operation, for example.

3 Execute the sequence restart operation by selecting the automatic mode.

To execute sequence return from N0107: Operation restarts from sequence N0106.When restarting the operation from sequence N0106, the tool of tool No. 20 must be in the turret. Therefore, this tool must be mounted in the turret before the operation is restarted.

LE32163R0300400230001


2-6-2. Considerations When Using Machine Lock

The following are considerations necessary when using the program check and the graphic scale automatic setting functions while the machine lock function is ON.Machining may be carried out either by first changing the tool mounted in the turret using the ATC, or by having a tool pre-mounted on the turret and issuing the TL command (and the TG/OG command for the tool life management specification) to perform indexing without ATC operation before starting machining.In either case, it is possible to perform program check in the machine lock status, but the following points must be taken into consideration when using the TL command (or TG/OG command).Operation example:

If tool number 20 is not mounted on the turret, and if program check is performed on the above sample program in machine lock state, “Alarm B ATC TD” is triggered.This is because the same “Alarm B ATC TD” would be triggered and machining would not be possible even if machine lock were cancelled and machining were started immediately.In this case, either enable machine lock after mounting tool number 20 from the magazine to the turret then perform program check, or before enabling machine lock, on the ATC Tool Information screen (see [2-7-2 Tool Information] below), set initial status data of the tool that is pre-mounted on the turret for the machining program that will be program checked, then perform program check in machine lock state.In the example on the previous page, before enabling machine lock state, the tool data for tool number 20 is set in T1, then machine lock state is enabled and program check is performed.

NC program using No. 20 tool

The program shows the case - No. 20 tool is already mounted in the turret (T3 station) and tool change by ATC is not necessary.Since the program itself is correct, actual machining can be executed without problems. However, when checking the program, an alarm occurs at the sequence including the TL command due to the machine lock function if the tool of No. 20 tool is not mounted in the turret.

LE32163R0300400240001


(After finishing program check, return the data settings to the state prior to machine lock.

[Supplement]

When the TDG command for tool life control is used, “Alarm B tool life control tool group” is triggered. In this case follow the same steps as indicated above.

When the automatic scale setting function of the graphic function is used, the same alarm will occur for programs similar to the sample program. Take the same steps as indicated above to avoid this.

LE32163R0300400240002


2-7. Data Setting

2-7-1. Magazine Information

After manually mounting the tool on the magazine, in tool data setting mode, it is necessary to go to the magazine information sheet in Tool Data Setting and enter what kind of tool was set in the magazine. (Without properly performing this data setting, ATC tool change is not possible.

Setting Procedure

It is necessary to first perform tool registration with the tool data sheet.

Procedure :

1 Select the tool data setting mode.

2 Select the Tool Data Setting screen by pressing the function key [F6] (ITEM ↑), [F7] (ITEM↓), or [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE).

3 Select MAGAZINE INFO. with the Sheet key.

4 Press [F4] (Insert unmounted tool).

5 The screen for inserting unmounted tools is displayed. Press [F6] (MAGAZINE ATTACH).

6 The insert magazine screen is displayed. Enter the number of the magazine where the tool was inserted.

7 Press [F8] (CLOSE).

LE32163R0300400250001


Reserved Pots

When a super-large/large-right/large-left/large diameter tool is mounted on the turret from the magazine, the magazine pot which held that tool becomes a reserved pot (a pot with a designated return tool.) Therefore, tools other than the initially mounted tool are not returned to a reserved pot.On the Magazine Information sheet, magazine pots that are reserved pot are marked with a “R” by the tool number.

[Supplement]

To cancel reserved pot designation, go to the Magazine Information sheet, place the cursor on large diameter tool, and press F5 (Tool Removal) to remove display of the magazine pot tool number.On the Tool Information sheet (described below in 2-7 Data Setting, 2-7-2 Tool Information), delete data of the super-large/large-right/large-left diameter tool that have been mounted from the magazine to the turret by ATC, and the reserved pot designation is automatically canceled.Reserved pot designation is assigned automatically during tool change operation. Therefore, when returning a super-large/large-right/large-left diameter tool whose reserved pot designation has been cancelled, ATC mounting will search for a vacant pot in the magazine and return it.

LE32163R0300400250002


2-7-2. Tool Information

In tool data setting mode, specify what kind of tool is mounted on each pot of the turret. Normally, this tool information is automatically set after ATC, but when tools are replaced from the turret manually, this setting must be performed.

Setting Procedure

When a tool is removed:

Procedure :

1 Select the tool data setting mode.

2 Select the TOOL DATA screen by pressing the function key [F6] (ITEM ↑), [F7] (ITEM↓), or [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE).

3 Select MAGAZINE INFO. with the Sheet key.

4 Place the cursor on the turret.

5 Press [F5] (TOOL DETACH).

LE32163R0300400260001


When a tool is mounted:

It is necessary to first perform tool registration with the tool data sheet.

Procedure :

1 Follow steps 1 through 3 above to select Magazine Information.

2 Press [F4] (Insert unmounted tool).

3 The screen for inserting unmounted tools is displayed. Press [F7] (Insert turret).

4 Press [F8] (Close).

By removing a super-large/large-right/large-left diameter tool that was mounted from the magazine to the turret from the Magazine Information sheet, reserved pot designation of the magazine pot for that tool is cancelled automatically.

Tool data of a super-large/large-right/large-left diameter tool that was mounted from the magazine to the turret cannot be changed on the Magazine Information sheet. The tool must first be removed, then re-mounted after changing tool data in order to change the data.

When a super-large/large-right/large-left diameter tool manually mounted to the turret, is returned to the magazine using the ATC, the ATC searches and returns the tool to an empty pot.


2-8. ATC Status Display

When operating ATC while in AUTO, MDI, or Manual modes, the ATC status and the EC input/output status of ATC can be displayed on the screen. The following ATC status display screens are available.

2-8-1. ATC Status Display Screen

Displaying Procedure

Procedure :

1 Select the operation screen mode.

2 Press the extension (function) key [ ], then function key [F7] (Display Change) to display the ATC status display screen.There are 2 pages to the ATC Status Display screen. The screens can be switched with the Page key.To display the ATC Individual Operation screen (2/2), select “ATC Individual operation” in System Check mode on the Machine System Parameter/System Check Mode screen.

ATC Status Display Screen (1/2)

ATC Status Display Screen

… Displays the ATC's overall operational status

ATC Status Display Screen(Second Page)

… Displays the input status of each proximity switch and limit switch on the ATC and each operating switch and key on the operation panel, and the signal output status of the solenoid valve.

Machine Diagnosis Screen

… Displays diagnosis of the cause when ATC operation stops.

LE32163R0300400280001


Displayed information:

ATC SEQ. NO : Displays the current ATC operation sequence number.

MG ATC POS. POT NO. : Displays the magazine pot number currently indexed to the ATC position.

ATC POS. TOOL : Displays the tool data of the magazine pot currently indexed to the ATC position.

RS NEXT TOOL : Displays the data of the tool which is at the ready station to be mounted on the turret next.

RETURN TOOL : Displays the data of the tool which was removed from the turret by ATC and held at the ready station, and will be returned to the magazine.

TURRET ATC POS. NO. : Displays the turret number currently indexed to the ATC position.

ATC POS. TOOL : Displays the tool data of the turret currently indexed to the ATC position.

CUT POS. NO. : Displays the turret station number indexed to the cutting position.

CUT POS. TOOL : Displays the tool data of the turret currently indexed to the cutting position.

NEXT TOOL COM. MT= : Displays the content of the command specified for preparation of the next tool.

MG PANEL STATUS : Displays the communication status between CNC and the magazine panel.

ACTUAL POSITION : Display the current position (in machine coordinate system) that turret A is indexed to.

ATC START : Lights when an MT command or M06 command can be executed. MACTURN30... ATC sequence No. 1, 11 MACTURN50... ATC sequence No. 1, 8

ATC CYCLE ST. : Lights when the ATC cycle is in progress.

TURRET INDEX : Lights when the turret A can rotate.

MG PANEL INT. : Lights when the manual intervention is selected on the magazine panel.


ATC Status Display Screen (2/2)

MACTURN550

This above screen allows you to check individual ATC operation commands and ATC operation statuses with lamp indication.Normally, the [Status] lamp and the [Command] lamp are in the same display status. However, mismatch will occur if ATC operation is disabled for some reason.

2-8-2. ATC Input/Output Display Screen

Input/output signal status of the ATC operation panel and the ATC unit can be checked on the operation screen using the I/O monitor function.Please refer to the Appendix for the ATC input/output bit table.

LE32163R0300400280002


2-8-3. Machine Diagnosis Screen

If the ATC or the magazine stops due to unsatisfied machine conditions, such conditions can be checked on the diagnosis screen.If some conditions are missing in ATC sequence operation or magazine operation, the diagnosis screen shows the cause.

Display procedure

Procedure :

1 Select any of AUTO, MDI, or MANUAL mode.

2 Press the function key [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) to display the diagnosis screen.

3 If the screen consists of several pages, select a required page.

MACHINE DIAGNOSIS Screen

The following diagnosis messages are displayed.

“10403 MG Manual Interruption OFF is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the magazine manual interruption is not turned on.

“10414 Ready Station Magazine position LS is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station magazine position confirmation is not turned on.

“10419 Shutter Close LS is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ATC shutter close confirmation input is not turned on.

LE32163R0300400290001


“10420 Shutter Open LS is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ATC shutter open confirmation input is not turned on.

“10421 Turret ATC Position Indexing Completion is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the turret indexing angle is not positioned at the ATC position during the turret rotation.

“10422 Turret Tool Change Position 2 is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the X/Y/Z axes of the H1 turret are not set to the tool change position.

The tool change position can be set since the turret may index several stations. This message indicates that positions of X/Y/Z axes of the turret are not set to the registered tool change positions for each station.

“10423 Turret Tool Change Position 1 is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the X/Y/Z axes of the H1 turret are not set to the tool change positions.

This message indicates that positions of X/Y/Z axes of the turret are not set to the registered tool change position for the indexed station. However, only one station and one tool change position are available since MULTUS B200/B300/B400 are equipped with the H1 turret. Therefore, this message indicates that the X/Y/Z axes of the H1 turret are not set to the tool change positions.

“10424 Turret Tool is not clamped.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the turret tool is not clamped.

“10425 Turret Tool is not unclamped.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the turret tool is not unclamped.

“10426 M-tool spindle Indexing is not completed.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the M-tool spindle of the H1 turret is not indexed to the angle where the tool is changed.

“10427 Magazine Indexing Match is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the magazine indexing is not completed.

“10430 Tool Change Arm Movement to the advance position is not completed.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm is not moved to the tool arm tool extract position due to the movement of the tool change arm axis (EZ axis).

“10431 Tool Change Arm Movement to the retract position is not completed.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm is not moved to the tool arm tool insert position due to the movement of the tool change arm axis (EZ axis).

“10436 Without MG Tool is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the input confirming that no tool is mounted to the magazine is turned off.This is displayed when the tool information registered in the magazine information sheet does not match those actually mounted in the magazine.Or, the sensor to check tool presence in the magazine may be faulty.

The sequence progresses by indexing an empty pot with execution of the MG command in the MDI mode.


“10437 With MG Tool is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the input confirming that no tool is mounted to the magazine is turned on.This is displayed when the tool information registered in the magazine information sheet does not match those actually mounted in the magazine.Or, the sensor to check tool presence in the magazine may be faulty.

“10448 Ready Station Magazine position LS is not turned off.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station magazine position confirmation is not turned off.

“10456 Ready Station Change position LS is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station change position confirmation is not turned on.

“10458 Ready Station tool extraction is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station tool extraction position confirmation is not turned on.

“10461 With Turret Tool is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the input confirming that no tool is mounted to the turret is turned on.

“10472 Ready Station Change position LS is not turned off.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station change position confirmation is not turned off.

“10481 Ready Station tool insertion is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station tool insertion is not turned on.

“10483 Ready Station tool insertion is not turned off.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station tool insertion position confirmation is not turned off.

“10484 Ready Station tool extraction is not turned off.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station tool extraction position confirmation is not turned on.

“10940 Tool Lock for the Tool Change Arm is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool lock confirmation for the tool change arm is not turned on.

“10941 Tool Unlock for the Tool Change Arm is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool unlock confirmation for the tool change arm is not turned on.

“10947 Tool Lock for the Tool Change Arm is turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool lock confirmation for the tool change arm is turned on.

“10948 Tool Unlock for the Tool Change Arm is turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool unlock confirmation for the tool change arm is turned on.


“10949 Shutter Open EA Rotation is not turned on.”The ATC shutter of MULTUS B200/B300/B400 are equipped with the input for checking the “position where the tool change arm can enter into the machine with rotation”. If the confirmation input is not turned on, the ATC unit cannot operate.

“10950 Tool Change Arm RS movement is not completed.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm (EZ axis) is not positioned to the tool change arm RS position.

“10952 EA Rotation Position A movement is not completed.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm (EC axis) is not positioned to the tool change arm 0° position with the tool arm axis rotation.

“10953 EA Rotation Position B movement is not completed.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm (EC axis) is not positioned to the tool change arm 90° position with the tool arm axis rotation.

“10954 EA Rotation Position C movement is not completed.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm (EC axis) is not positioned to the tool change arm 180° with the tool arm axis rotation.

“10955 EA Rotation Position D movement is not completed.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm (EC axis) is not positioned to the tool change arm 270° position with the tool arm axis rotation.


2-9. Parameter Settings

Setting of the parameters used for controlling the ATC can be changed by selecting the parameter setting mode.To display the desired parameter, follow the procedure indicated below.

Procedure :

1 Select parameter setting mode.

2 Select the page that contains the desired parameter using [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE), [F6] (ITEM↑), [F7] (ITEM↓) and the PAGE key.

2-9-1. ATC Tool Change Position and Movable Range

The ATC tool change position and the axis movable range are set. (Machine coordinate system)Since the most appropriate values are set for these parameters before shipping, the setting must not be changed.

ATC POS:

P1: Tool change position

RETURN POS.

When tool change cycle is executed, an axis may move beyond the axis travel range set for machining. Therefore, turret rotation is not allowed at the ATC position.Concerning the Y-axis, it must be returned to the spindle center line position since it may move to a position off the spindle center position.In such cases, axis movements are controlled using RETURN POS. 4 and 5.The ATC macro command M421 moves the turret to the return position 4 after the completion of tool change operation.For the YS-axis, set the data so that it will be at the spindle center position set for the system parameter.

G21 RANGE:

The data sets the axis movable range for the operation to return to the home position called by G21.The axes can move beyond the range set by the variable limit setting data as long as they move within the range set by these parameters. Concerning the Z-axis, the range is identical to the range set by the variable limit setting.The position number corresponds to P1 - P5 of this parameter.

[Supplement]

The axis travel limits in moving to the ATC position set the saddle movable range in the status the turret is indexed to the ATC position and the shutter is open. The travel end limit data set for the system parameters sets the range where the saddle can move and the turret can rotate without interference independent of the status of turret indexing and shutter open/close.For HP = 4, set the position so that all of the following conditions are satisfied.

The YS-axis position is identical to the spindle center position set for the system parameter.

The X- and Z-axis positions are within the travel end limits and within the movable range limits.


[Supplement]

For the Z-axis position, set the same value as the L-tool change position, the face M-tool change position or the side M-tool change position to facilitate programming.


2-9-2. Magazine Axis Parameter

Set the parameters related to magazine control.

(1) Magazine Zero OffsetSet the data for MAGAZINE ZERO OFFSET when the magazine position encoder is mounted for the first time or after changing the magazine position encoder.Since the data is set before shipping the machine, usually the setting for this parameter is not necessary. By setting the offset data, the magazine pot number displayed at the ATC CONDITION DISPLAY screen is matched with the actual machine magazine pot number.Setting procedurea) Move the cursor to the MAGAZINE ZERO OFFSET item.b) Press function key [F3] (CAL).c) Input the pot number of the presently indexed magazine pot.d) Press the [WRITE] key.With the operation indicated above, the zero offset value is calculated and set.MAGAZINE ZERO OFFSET = (Actual position of position encoder)- (Magazine pot number indexed to the ATC position - 1) X (360 ÷ number of magazines)If the value obtained by the calculation indicated above is a negative value, the ZERO OFFSET value is re-calculated by adding 360.

(2) Magazine BacklashSet the backlash offset value as needed.Initial value: 0 Setting unit: 1°

(3) Magazine Droop AmountInitial value: 0.005 Setting unit: 1°

2-9-3. EC–axis (Tool Change Arm Rotation Axis) Parameter

Set the parameters related to the EC-axis (tool change arm rotation axis).

(1) Droop dataSet the droop data of the tool change arm rotation axis.

(2) Zero offsetSet the zero offset data of the tool change arm rotation axis.For the point data (MC SYSTEM PARAMETER: EC POINT), set the value obtained by subtracting the zero offset value from the EC-axis position data (coordinate value in the machine coordinate system).

(3) -/+ LimitSet the limits of the EC-axis movable range by the coordinate values in the machine coordinate system. The EC-axis can be moved within the range set by the limit data set for these parameters.Optimum values are set at factory shipment. Usually, data setting is not necessary.

(4) BacklashSet the backlash amount of the EC-axis.

(5) PR zero offsetSet the offset amount of the EC-axis position encoder.


2-9-4. EZ–axis (Tool Change Advance/Retraction Rotation Axis) Parameter (MULTUS B200/B300/B400)

Set the parameters related to the EZ-axis (tool change arm advance/retraction axis).

(1) Droop dataSet the droop data of the tool change arm advance/retraction axis.

(2) Zero offsetSet the zero offset data of the tool change arm advance/retraction axis.For the point data (MC SYSTEM PARAMETER: EZ POINT), set the value obtained by subtracting the zero offset value from the EZ-axis position data (coordinate value in the machine coordinate system).

(3) -/+ LimitSet the limits of the EZ-axis movable range by the coordinate values in the machine coordinate system. The EZ-axis can be moved within the range set by the limit data set for these parameters.Optimum values are set at factory shipment.Usually, data setting is not necessary.

(4) BacklashSet the backlash amount of the EZ-axis.

(5) PR zero offsetSet the offset amount of the EZ-axis position encoder.

2-9-5. Positioning Point EC (MULTUS B200/B300/B400)

Set the positioning points of the EC-axis (tool change arm rotation axis) for tool change operation.Set the coordinate values in the machine coordinate system by subtracting the zero offset value.Set the positioning points 1, 2, 3 and 4 to determine the tool change arm rotation positions.EA RET. POS. A 1.POINTEA CLP. POS. A 2.POINTEA RET. POS. B 3.POINTEA CLP. POS. B 4.POINTSince the most optimum values are set for these parameters before shipping, never change the settings.Usually, data setting is not necessary.

Input unit: 1/1000°Input range: ATC parameter EC-axis parameter- limit or more, + limit or less

2-9-6. Positioning Point EZ (MULTUS B200/B300/B400)

Set the positioning points of the EZ-axis (tool change arm advance/retraction axis) for tool change operation.Set the coordinate values in the machine coordinate system by subtracting the zero offset value.Set the positioning points 1 and 2 to determine the tool change arm retract and advance positions.Since the most optimum values are set for these parameters before shipping, never change the settings.Usually, data setting is not necessary.

Input unit: 1 μm


Input range: ATC parameter EZ-axis parameter- limit or more, + limit or less

2-9-7. Turret Index Angle

Set the turret index angles. Since the most optimum values are set for these parameters before shipping, never change the settings. Usually, data setting is not necessary.No. 1 to No. 4 are used to set the turret index target angle for indexing the turret to the cutting position, and No. 13 to No. 16 are used to set the turret index target angle for indexing the turret to the ATC position.For H1 turret, the turret angle can be set only at No. 1 to 3 and No. 13.

2-9-8. Magazine Panel Communication Parameter

Set the RS232C device number used for the communication between the CNC and the magazine panel.For details of the screen below, refer to the Instruction Manual for OSP-E100L.

(1) MG Panel RS232C Device No.Optional parameter (word) No. 81Set the device number used for the magazine panel.Initial value: 1 (CN1:) Setting range: 0 to 3

(2) Baud rate (bps)Initial value: 4800 Setting range: 110 to 19200

(3) RS232C stop bitInitial value: 1 Setting range: 0, 1

(4) RS232C parity bitInitial value: 1 Setting range: 0, 1

(5) RS232C busy timeInitial value: 5 Setting range: 1 to 99999


2-9-9. Setting the Tool Change Arm Rotation Positions Immediately after Installing the Control Software (MULTUS B200/B300/B400)

Immediately after the installation of the control software, the tool change arm rotation mode is indefinite, mode A or mode B.Therefore, it is necessary to determine the tool change arm rotation mode (mode A or mode B) by setting the tool change arm EC-axis zero offset data and EC-axis positioning point data for points 1 to 4 by selecting the system check mode.

Positioning point setting procedure

Procedure :

1 Position the tool change arm at the retract position or tool clamp position by using the system check mode.

2 Select the parameter setting mode and display the ATC parameter (EC-axis parameter) screen.

3 Move the cursor to the ZERO OFFSET column and set the EC-axis zero offset data.Set the zero offset data so that the positioning point data of the machine system parameter (EC-axis positioning point) will be as indicated below.Point 1 … 0Point 2 … 90000Point 3 … 180000Point 4 … 270000If the tool change arm rotation position is at the EA CLP. POS. B, for example, move the cursor to the ZERO OFFSET column and execute [CAL] + [90] + [WRITE]. The reason for inputting “90” is that EA CLP. POS. B corresponds to 2.POINT.

4 Display the machine system parameter (EC-axis positioning point) screen in the parameter setting mode.

5 Set Point 1 to Point 4 to 0, 90000, 180000, 270000, respectively.

6 Turn off the power and turn it on again.

To carry out tool change operation by actually holding a tool by the tool change arm, set the data for 1.POINT to 4.POINT accurately.To change the arm rotation position data, always contact Okuma Service Center.


2-9-10.Cam Shaft Timing Parameter (Machine System Parameter No.18-1)

Set timing of various hydraulic driving controls in relation to the cam shaft angle at ATC sequence No. 9, for the parameter as angle data.

(1) Angle of turret tool clamp/unclampPerform the turret tool clamp/unclamp output operation when the commanded angle of the cam shaft has entered the following angle range. For the cam shaft angle for clamping/unclamping a turret tool, override is different between automatic/MDI operation and manual operation. Thus prepare two sets for automatic/MDI operation and manual operation.Clamping/unclamping the turret tool and the cam shaft angle have the following relation:

<<Other than 1-step feed/return>>

Turret tool clamp output0° ≤ Angle of cam shaft < Turret tool unclamp start angleTurret tool clamp start angle ≤ Angle of cam shaft < 360°

Turret tool unclamp outputTurret tool unclamp start angle ≤ Angle of cam shaft < Turret tool clamp start angle

<<Upon 1-step feed/return>>

Turret tool clamp output0° ≤ Angle of cam shaft < 60°285° ≤ Angle of cam shaft < 360°

Turret tool unclamp output60° ≤ Angle of cam shaft < 285°

MULTUS B750 has these parameters for both standard and heavy tools.

(2) Angle of RS air blowOutput RS air blow at the following cam shaft angle.

RS air blow outputRS air blow angle 1 ≤ Angle of cam shaft < RS air blow angle 2

(3) Angle of ATC air blowATC air blow is supplied from the taper shank portion of a turret tool. Air blow is controlled at the following cam shaft angles for ATC operations using M codes and all manual ATC operations of 1-cycle or 1-step feed/return.

ATC air blow outputATC air blow angle 1 ≤ Angle of cam shaft < ATC air blow angle 2

ItemInitial setting

value:Setting range:

Turret tool clamp start angle 285.000 0 to 359.999

Turret tool unclamp start angle 0.000 0 to 359.999

ItemInitial setting


RS air blow angle 1 0.000 0 to 359.999

RS air blow angle 2 300.000 0 to 359.999


(4) Angle of end face air blowEnd face air blow is supplied from the end face of a turret tool (the portion gripped with the tool change arm). Air blow is controlled at the following angles of the cam shaft for ATC operations using M codes and all manual ATC operations of 1-cycle or 1-step feed/return.

End face air blow outputEnd face air blow angle 1 ≤ Angle of cam shaft < End face air blow angle 2

(5) Cam shaft answer angleThe completion answer of ATC sequence No.9 due to 1-cycle start of automatic operation, MDI operation, and manual operation is returned when the cam shaft has reached the angle set on this parameter, and the system goes to the next sequence.

Answer of ATC sequence No. 9Angle of cam shaft = Cam shaft answer angle

(6) Turret tool clamp/unclamp check angleTurret tool clamp/unclamp checks and the cam shaft angle have the following relations:

Perform the turret tool clamp/unclamp check operation when the commanded angle of the cam shaft has entered the above angle range.

MULTUS B750 has these parameters for both standard and heavy tools.

ItemInitial setting


ATC air blow angle 1 0.000 0 to 359.999

ATC air blow angle 2 285.000 0 to 359.999

ItemInitial setting


End face air blow angle 1 0.000 0 to 359.999

End face air blow angle 2 75.000 0 to 359.999

ItemInitial setting


Cam shaft answer angle 345 0 to 359.999

- Turret tool clamp outputTurret tool clamp check start angle ≤ Angle of cam shaft < Turret tool clamp check end angle

- Turret tool unclamp outputTurret tool unclamp check start angle ≤ Angle of cam shaft < Turret tool unclamp check end angle

ItemInitial setting


T TOOL CLAMP CHECK START

309.100 0 to 359.999

T TOOL CLAMP CHECK END 357.000 0 to 359.999

T TOOL UNCLAMP CHECK START

71.600 0 to 359.999

T TOOL UNCLAMP CHECK END

293.600 0 to 359.999


(7) Turret tool unclamp angle effective (MULTUS B200)This parameter assigns effective/ineffective values for turret tool unclamp time reduction in ATC sequence No. 10 (S10).

When the turret tool unclamp angle effective parameter is enabled, the turret tool unclamp start angle (automatic) operation is executed.However, when the parameter setting is zero, the original operation (same operation as when the parameter is disabled) is carried out.

ItemInitial setting


T TOOL UNCLAMP START EFFECTIVE

0 0: disable 1: enable


2-9-11.Step Division Parameter

ATC sequence No. 9 assigns a full rotation of the cam shaft as a sequence step, and controls replacement between a turret tool and an RS tool as a series of operation. On the other hand, step feed/return proceeding ATC individual operations one by one divides a step at any timing according to the purpose. Division is based on the angle of the cam shaft.For this parameter, operate the variable directly in the adjustment mode. No special setup screen is available.

Sequence No.9, first step0° ≤ Angle of cam shaft < First division cam angle

Sequence No.9, second stepFirst division cam angle ≤ Angle of cam shaft < Second division cam angle

Sequence No.9, third stepSecond division cam angle ≤ Angle of cam shaft < 360°

The following relation is assumed as magnitude relation between first division cam angle and second division cam angle. First division cam angle < second division cam angleWhen the parameter setting is zero, the sequence is not divided. That is, if either parameter is zero, ATC sequence No. 9 is two steps, and if both parameters are zero, the sequence is not divided but the cam shaft makes a 360° rotation as a series of operation.

2-9-12.ATC Tool Change Arm (Machine System Parameter No.18-2)

(1) When valid:Motor output torque is limited according to the torque limit value set on the tool change arm torque limit parameter (machine system parameter No.18-3).When invalid:Motor output torque is limited to the maximum output torque specific to the motor (300% of the motor rating).

(2) Set a delay time that begins with entry of confirmation input and lasts until the confirmation input is valid on the sequence for which clamping/unclamping a turret tool is the operation condition of ATC.

Item Initial setting value: Setting range:

First division cam angle 65.000 0 to 359.999

Second division cam angle 295.000 0 to 359.999

ItemInitial setting

value:Setting range: Setting Units

Tool change arm torque limit invalid 0 0,1 ―

ItemInitial setting


Turret tool clamp confirmation timer 50 0 to 1000 1 msec

Turret tool unclamp confirmation timer 50 0 to 1000 1 msec


2-9-13.Tool Change Arm Torque Limit Parameter (Machine System Parameter No.18-3)

The maximum output torque of the cam shaft motor can be limited by cam angles in order to protect the tool change arm driving system. These items can be valid by setting the tool change arm torque limit (machine system parameter No.18-2).

2-9-14.Tool Change Arm Override 1 (Machine System Parameter No.18-4)

(1) Cam shaft override functionSet override during the cam shaft operation at ATC sequence No. 9, for each operation mode. Set the override value for the machine system parameter.

(2) Cam shaft override enabling conditionYou can select either enabling override at any time in the automatic/MDI operation mode or enabling it only upon a 180° rotation of the large diameter tool and heavy tool and upon extraction/insertion of the EA tool.The angle of the cam shaft upon a 180° rotation of a tool and upon extraction/insertion of a tool ranges from 75° to 285°.

2-9-15.Tool Change Arm Override 2.3 (Machine System Parameter No.18-5.6)

You can apply override in each operation mode ranging any cam shaft angle.Six points for automatic/MDI operations and four points for manual operation can be set in the range of cam shaft angle. Outside the Setting Range of the override value, there is no difference among automatic, MDI, and manual operation modes.

ItemInitial setting


Angle 0 to 360 0.001 deg

Torque limit value 0 to 100 %

ItemInitial setting

value:Setting range: Remarks

Cam shaft override (automatic/MDI)

0 0 to 100Zero is handled as 100%.

Cam shaft override (manual) 0 0 to 50Zero is handled as 50%.

ItemInitial setting


Cam shaft override enabling condition

AlwaysAlways/large diameter and

heavy

ItemInitial setting

value:Setting range: Setting Units Remarks

Start position 0 0 to 359.999 1 degree

End position 0 0 to 359.999 1 degree

Override value 00 to 100 (manual)

50 to 100 (automatic/MDI)%

Zero is handled as 100%.

Enable/Disable Invalid Valid/invalid


2-10. System Check

When operating the ATC units manually at the start-up of the ATC system, for example, operating the ATC unit at a normal speed may constitute hazardous situation. For the operation of the ATC in such cases, pulse handle feed or jog feed is possible.

2-10-1.System Check Mode Parameters

The desired system check mode is selected using the MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (SYSTEM CHECK MODE) screen in the parameter setting mode.

Press the function key [F1] (MENU) and select the required system check item.While the system check mode is selected, the alarm D “4708 ATC system check mode” appears. This operation is effective only in MANUAL mode.

Operation

System check cancel

NC axis IL release

GA (3) axis P.H. mode

EC (4) axis P.H. mode

EZ (5) axis P.H. mode

EC/EZ override enable

MG axis rapid feed PB

EC axis rapid feed PB

EZ axis rapid feed PB

ATC SQ. NO change (ATC operation sequence number change)

ATC Individual Operation

RT (6) axis P.H. mode

RT axis rapid feed PB

LE32163R0300400490001


(1) System check cancelCancels the system check mode.

(2) NC axis IL releaseUsually, an interlock is set so that the X-/Y-/Z-axis of the A-turret cannot be moved when the ATC arm is in the machine. This interlock can be released by selecting this check mode.

(3) GA (3) axis P.H. modeEnables pulse handle operation of the ATC magazine axis (GA axis). In this check mode, pulse handle operation is disabled for other axes. Selection of the pulse handle magnification ratio is valid.

(4) EC (4) axis P.H. modeEnables pulse handle operation of the EC axis (ATC tool change arm rotation axis). In this check mode, pulse handle operation is disabled for other axes. Selection of the pulse handle magnification ratio is valid.

(5) EZ (5) axis P.H. modeEnables pulse handle operation of the EZ axis (ATC tool change arm advance/retract axis). In this check mode, pulse handle operation is disabled for other axes. Selection of the pulse handle magnification ratio is valid.

(6) EC/EZ override effectiveMakes rapid feed override (axis feed override switch) valid for manual one cycle of ATC operation and manual 1 step advance/reverse operation.

(7) MG axis rapid feed PBEnables jog feed of the ATC magazine axis using the JOG feed switches [←] and [→].

(8) EC axis rapid feed PBEnables jog feed of the EC axis (ATC tool change arm rotation axis) using the JOG feed switches [←] and [→].

(9) EZ axis rapid feed PBEnables jog feed of the EZ axis (ATC tool change arm advance/retract axis) using the JOG feed switches [←] and [→].

(10) ATC SQ. NO change (ATC operation sequence number change)When setting ATC operation sequence numbers at the machine system parameter [ATC] 1. ATC sequence no., select “ATC SEQ. NO. change”.

(11) ATC Individual OperationTo use the ATC individual operation function, select ENABLE at INDIVIDUAL OP.

(12) RT (6) axis P.H. modeEnables pulse handle operation of the RT axis (Ready station transport axis). In this check mode, pulse handle operation is disabled for other axes. Selection of the pulse handle magnification ratio is valid.

(13) RT axis rapid feed PBEnables the jog feed of the RT axis (Ready station transport axis) using the JOG feed switches [←] and [→].


The system check mode function is provided to operate the ATC if the ATC fails to operate automatically or when adjusting the machine.Therefore, interlock is not set at all and the ATC operates as intended even if the attempted operation does not follow the ATC operation sequence. Pay special attention to interference and operate the ATC very carefully.


2-10-2.ATC Parameters

The ATC parameters are not operated usually and operating them becomes necessary when recovering the ATC operation or initializing the system. Select the “ATC” at the MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (ATC) screen.

(1) ATC SEQUENCE NO.Used for defining an ATC operation sequence number.If a number is set for this parameter, the signals are output as shown in the output logic table according to the specified sequence number. Therefore, the ATC will move suddenly if a parameter is set inadvertently. Basically, the current ATC status must be checked and the corresponding ATC sequence number should be input.When setting ATC operation sequence numbers at this parameter, it is necessary to select “ATC SEQ. NO. change” on the machine system parameter [SYSTEM CHECK MODE] screen.Once an ATC operation sequence number is changed, [System check mode] is automatically changed to the state of [System check cancel].Therefore, each time you change the ATC operation sequence number successively, select the [ATC SEQ. NO. change] on the [SYSTEM CHECK MODE] screen.

(2) ATC A/B MODEDesignates the tool change arm rotation mode.Rotation mode A: 1Rotation mode B: 2To designate the tool change arm rotation mode, select “1” at the MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (SYSTEM CHECK MODE) screen.

(3) Ignore tool change pos. by ATC IL release PBWhen operating the ATC in 1-step advance/reverse mode while pressing the interlock release button at the ATC operation panel, set this parameter valid to disregard the tool change position condition from the input conditions indicated in the manual interlock table.

(4) Perform continuous motion by holding STEP PBWhen operating the ATC using the 1 STEP ADVANCE and 1 STEP REVERSE buttons, set this parameter valid and the ATC operates continuously when the 1 STEP ADVANCE or 1 STEP REVERSE button is kept pressed.

LE32163R0300400500001


(5) MG index offset with MG panel operationThere are two magazine pot index positions - ATC position and magazine panel position. At the ATC position, a tool is exchanged between the magazine pot and the turret, and at the magazine panel position, a tool is directly mounted to the magazine pot. The number of pots between the ATC position and the magazine panel position should be set for this parameter.

(6) GA axis overrideSet the override value for the GA axis (magazine rotation axis). The value set here is constantly enabled.

(7) EC axis overrideSet the override value for the EC axis (tool change arm rotation axis). The value set here is constantly enabled.

(8) EZ axis overrideSet the override value for the EZ axis (tool change arm advance/retract axis). The value set here is constantly enabled.

(9) Releasing communication error between magazine operation panel and the NCIf an error occurs at the magazine panel and correct communications cannot be established, a communication error keeps remain. Since the functions other than the magazine panel are operable, it is possible to enable resetting the communication error until correct communication is recovered. By selecting this parameter, communication errors of the magazine panel can be cancelled with NC reset.However, if a communication problem is detected at power-up, an alarm is displayed regardless of the setting of this parameter.

(10) ATC tool exchange 3STEP disableThis parameter is effective only when the cam type ATC is used.When a checkmark is put at this parameter, the tool change arm performs the following three steps successively: work extraction, rotation, and work insertion.

(11) Magazine int. cancelIf an error occurs at the magazine panel disabling correct communications while the magazine is operating in the magazine manual operation intervention mode, it becomes impossible to cancel the manual operation intervention mode. In such a case, put a checkmark at this parameter and reset the NC to cancel the manual intervention mode.

(12) MG panel communication retry counter Setting range: 1 to 20 Initial value: 3 When there is a communication problem (When error information from the NC is not 0)Number of consecutive communication problems ≥ Number of communication retries made by the magazine operation panel (this parameter)If the above occurs, communication problem control measures are taken.In the following case, occurrence of communication error is disregarded and corresponding processing is not executed.

The number of consecutive communication problems is determined. If:Number of consecutive communication problems ≥ Number of communication retries made by the magazine operation panelthen, the following control measures are taken.Communication problem alarm is displayed on the magazine operation panelMagazine operation panel switch operations are ignoredMagazine rotation or indexing that is underway by operating the magazine operation panel is cancelledIf a communication error occurs during magazine rotation or indexing by manual operation of the magazine operation panel, it is treated as a communication problem and the above control measure are taken, regardless of the number of consecutive communication problems.


(13) Tool Unclamp Status Confirmation Timer (MULTUS B200/B300/B400) When the machine output “Tool Unclamp: ON” and machine input “Tool Unclamp Confirmation PS: ON” continue for the period set for the tool unclamp status confirmation timer, the control status is set to “Turret Tool Unclamp”.Setting unit: 0.01 secInitial value: 0 (Setting value 0 → The control status immediately changes to “Turret Tool Unclamp” when the machine input conditions are satisfied.)Setting range: 0 - 1000

(14) Tool Clamp Status Confirmation Timer (MULTUS B200/B300/B400)When the machine output “Tool Unclamp: OFF” and machine input “Tool Unclamp Confirmation PS: OFF” continue for the period set for the tool clamp status confirmation timer, the control status is set to “Turret Tool Clamp”.Setting unit: 0.01 secInitial value: 0 (Setting value 0 → The control status immediately changes to “Turret Tool Clamp” when the machine input conditions are satisfied.)Setting range: 0 - 1000

(15) EZ Axis Torque Limit (MULTUS B200/B300/B400)To prevent the breakage of the tool change arm, the torque of the EZ axis (motor load factor) is always monitored and the alarm A activates when the value set for this parameter.Setting unit: %Initial setting: 280Setting range: 0 - 500

(16) EA Rotatable Position EZ (MULTUS B200/B300/B400)The position of the EZ axis exceeds the position set by this parameter while extracting a tool with the tool change arm, the tool change arm starts rotating and EC axis and EZ axis operate at the same time.Setting unit: 0.001mmInitial setting: 4250Setting range:0 to value set for EZ axis positioning point 2

(17) RT axis override (MULTUS B750)Set the override value for the RT axis (Ready station transport axis). The value set here is constantly enabled.

2-10-3.ATC Individual Operation

If automatic ATC operation is interrupted or if ATC operation cannot be recovered even if the 1 STEP ADVANCE/REVERSE buttons in the manual opertion mode are used, it is possible to return the ATC operation sequence to the initial state by operating the ATC individually. The individual ATC operation function is provided for this purpose. In individual operation of the ATC, however, each operation step can be executed without confirming the signal input status, meaning that interlock is not set.

Individual ATC Operation Mode

To enter the individual ATC operation mode, conditions indicated below must be satisfied.

Manual operation mode

ATC cycle is not being executed.

Machine lock function is not ON.

Magazine panel manual interruption mode is not ON.


Alarm A is not occurring.

Manual tool mounting/removal request is not given.

The NC is not in the power save mode.

Procedure for entering the manual ATC operation mode:

Procedure :

1 Select parameter setting mode.

2 Display the machine system parameter [SYSTEM CHECK MODE] by pressing the function key [ITEM] or [DISPLAY CHANGE].

3 Select [ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION] in the system check mode.

4 Select the manual mode.


6 Select [ATC CONDITION DISPLAY] using Display Change.

7 Press the PAGE key to display the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen.

Individual ATC Operation Screen

When the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION mode is selected, the ATC Status Display screen (Page 2) described in 2-8-1. is changed to the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen.

The items displayed at this screen are the same as the ATC Status Display screen.At the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen, however, the following items are additionally displayed.

(1) INDIVIDUAL OP

LE32163R0300400510001


When the individual operation is enabled, the cursor can move to the checkbox for each of the individual operation items, allowing you to select required individual operations.

(2) INDIV. OP. CANCELTo return the ATC to the previous ATC operating conditions from the individual operation mode after completing individual operations. However, there is no need to recover the previous ATC conditions such as operation checks of ATC components or initial settings or it is impossible to return to the previous ATC conditions, select ENABLE at INDIV. OP. CANCEL.

(3) Reverse display of individual operation items of current ATC status is identified by the reverse display of operation items at ATC SEQ. NO. on the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen.


Operating the ATC Individually

Procedure :

1 Select the ATC individual operation mode.

2 Locate the cursor at INDIVIDUAL OP. on the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen and select ENABLE.

3 Move the cursor to the checkbox of the required ATC individual operation items.

4 Put a checkmark at required ATC individual operation items using the MENU function.You cannot remove the checkmarks from the presently checked items. The check mark will disappear when you put a checkmark at the contradicting individual operation item. The contradicting individual operation items cannot be selected at the same time, but the several items indifferent to each other can be selected simultaneously.

5 Press the INTERLOCK RELEASE and 1 CYCLE START buttons on the ATC operation panel simultaneously. By pressing both button simultaneously, operation commands are issued for selected individual operation items.

Forced Canceling of Individual ATC Operation Mode

At the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen, move the cursor to the MAN. OP. CANCEL item.

Procedure :

1 Select ENABLE at INDIV. OP. CANCEL using the [MENU] key.

2 The INTERLOCK RELEASE and 1 CYCLE START buttons at the ATC operation panel start blinking.Press the INTERLOCK RELEASE and the 1 CYCLE START button, at the ATC operation panel, simultaneously.

3 Operation steps highlighted at the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen are executed at the timing the buttons are released.

ATC individual operation are functions to be used when ATC becomes inoperable. Therefore, the interlocks for interference prevention are disabled. When operating in individual operation, pay special attention to avoid interference with various parts of the machine.

The MAN. OP. CANCEL function is provided to forcibly exit the manual ATC operation mode.After exiting the manual ATC operation mode forcibly, the ATC operates so that the status before the entry to the manual ATC operation mode is restored. In other words, the ATC operates so that the status indicated by the highlighting operation step items at the ATC MANUAL OPERATION screen are restored. Note that ATC operation to restore the previous status is performed without interlock. The procedure after entering the individual ATC operation mode is described below.


2-11. Others

2-11-1.G and M Code Macro Functions

(1) G Code Macro FunctionCALL, MODIN and MODOUT statements, provided by the user task 2 specification (optional specification), can be specified by G code commands of the G code macro function.A G code macro command must always be specified in a block without other commands and only a sequence number may be specified before a G code.A G, S, T, and/or M code is disregarded if it is specified with a G code macro command in the same block.Note that G171 (Travel to tool change position), which is an ATC macro command, is a G code macro command which issues the Turret rotation ATC position indexing, Shutter open/close,and Travel to tool change position commands in a single “G171 ATP=?” block.

a. G224Cancels the MODIN statement, in the same manner as the MODOUT statement.Command format:G224

b. G161 to G170Just as with the MODIN statement, these G code commands remain valid until G224 (MODOUT statement) is executed. These G codes automatically call and execute the subprogram set at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen at each execution of an axis movement command.Command format:G161 <Q_> <Variable setting>Q: Designates the number of times the called subprogram is executed. If omitted, it becomes “1”.Variable setting: Sets the variables used in the called subprogram.

c. G171For the machine equipped with the ATC, this is interpreted as the ATC macro command of “positioning to the ATC position”.As with the CALL statement, it calls and executes subprogram OG171 in the maker subprogram file.Command format:G171 <Variable setting>Variable setting: Sets the variables used in the called subprogram.ATP is set for G171.

d. G205 to G214Just as with the CALL statement, these M code commands automatically call and execute the subprogram set at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen at each execution of an axis movement command.Command format:G205 <Q_> <Variable setting>Q: Designates the number of times the called subprogram is executed. If omitted, it indicates “1”.Variable setting: Sets the variables used in the called subprogram.


(2) M Code Macro FunctionCALL statement, provided by the user task 2 specification (optional specification), can be specified by an M code command of the M code macro function.An M code macro command must always be specified in a block without other commands and only a sequence number may be specified before an M code. A G, S, T, and/or M code is disregarded if it is specified with an M code macro command in the same block.Note that M421/M422 (positioning at the tool change position/tool change), an ATC macro command, is an M code macro command and one block of M code command “M421/M422” designates a series of operation of turret rotation to the ATC position, shutter open/close and positioning at the tool change position.

a. M421For the machine equipped with the ATC, this is interpreted as the ATC macro command of “positioning to the ATC position/tool change/positioning to the return position”.As with the CALL statement, it calls and executes subprogram OM421 in the maker subprogram file. Command format: M421

b. M422For the machine equipped with the ATC, this is interpreted as the ATC macro command of “positioning to the ATC position/tool change”.As with the CALL statement, it calls and executes subprogram OM422 in the maker subprogram file. Command format: M422

c. M423For machines equipped with ATC, this is interpreted as the ATC macro command for “Travel to ATC position/Tool change/Tool indexing”.The command is issued in combination with the TD command. It also can be issued individually. Command format: TD=□□○○○○ M423

d. M441 to M460Just as with the CALL statement, these M code commands automatically call and execute the subprogram set at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen at each execution of an axis movement command. Command format: M441 <Q_> Q: Designates the number of times the called subprogram is executed. If omitted, it indicates “1”.

(3) Subprogram Name SettingThe subprogram name of the subprograms to be called by the G/M code macro command is set at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen. A subprogram name must consist of five alphanumeric characters beginning with character O. An error occurs if a subprogram name is not set for the subprogram that will be called by a G or M code macro command.An error also occurs if the subprogram, selected in automatic mode, does not exist at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen.Conversely, if a subprogram name set at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen is changed after that subprogram is selected, and if the changed subprogram is not selected, the following alarm occurs at the execution of a G code macro command or an M code macro command.


2-11-2.Optical In–process Workpiece Gauging Specification (Optional Specification)

The NC lathe with ATC of the optical in-process workpiece gauging specification (optional specification) uses the sensor of the in-process workpiece gauging specification (optional specification) by mounting it from the magazine to the turret by the ATC. An optical sensor that transmits the touch signal by infrared ray is used. The sensor for this is an optical sensor that is capable of transmitting sensor touch signals using infrared light.

[Supplement]

(1) Added CommandsM270...........Sensor ON commandThe optical sensor operates using a built-in battery. Taking into consideration the battery life, gauging cycle is executed only after turning on the optical sensor by the M270 command.M269...........Sensor OFF commandThe command turns off the optical sensor.

M270/M269 commands are specified in the “in-process gauging MSB file” prepared by Okuma.Accordingly, it is not necessary to specify M270/M269 in a user’s program when the gauging function is called by the gauging subprogram prepared by Okuma.

TD = □□○○○○ M423/M323… Turret cutting position indexing commandOSP receives the sensor’s touch signal in the state the sensor is indexed to the cutting position.When the sensor is not indexed to the cutting position, the sensor signal input is disabled and OSP does not recognize the sensor’s touch signal even if it is input.

(2) Sensor Status CheckOSP checks the status of the optical sensor and an alarm occurs if the sensor ON command (M270) or the gauging cycle command (G30) is executed while battery voltage is low or when the sensor is in an error status.

(3) Gauging RangeSince an optical sensor is used, gauging is not possible if the signal transmitted by infrared ray from the sensor cannot be received by the receiver mounted in the CNC. Therefore, gauging must be carried out in the range where signal transmission between the sensor and the receiver is possible.

The optical in-machine workpiece measurement configuration offers identical measurement function as the optional workpiece measurement configuration with an optical sensor that can be used on the ATC. Therefore, in this section, we will explain operations that are unique to the optical in-machine workpiece measurement configuration. For information on the sensor's operation during measurement and how to develop a measurement program, refer to the [GAUGING SYSTEM INSTRUCTION MANUAL].


2-11-3.At the Occurrence of ATC Failure

The explanation given below shows the information useful to minimize machine down time at the occurrence of a trouble with the ATC.

Outline of ATC Control

Among the ATC operations, magazine rotation, tool change arm rotation/advance/retreat are controlled with a servo motor. Other operations are controlled with hydraulics.ATC operation is performed by changing over the hydraulic circuit using solenoid valves and operation status of the ATC is confirmed by limit switches, proximity switches, auto-switches, etc.In other words, the ATC controller recognizes the ATC status by the status of the signals input from the switches and sensors and outputs the commands to the solenoid valves and servomotors according to the input signals to operate the ATC.

Logic table

To operate the ATC, the controller operates the magazine, the tool change arm and other ATC units step by step to change tools.A tool change cycle is divided into operation steps and solenoid valve operation is controlled to realize the individual steps. The signals to be output to achieve these individual steps are summarized in the table form as the output logic table.Meanwhile, the controller cannot confirm if the ATC units have actually operated as instructed by the output signals if only outputs are sent to the solenoid valves. The control unit judges whether each step in the operation is completed based on inputs from the limit switches located throughout the ATC. The input logic table is a table that shows the input status checks for each step.In addition to the input and output logic tables, the manual interlock table is provided to show the status of confirmation input signals for each step to be used for manual one step advance/reverse operation. This table shows the signals that must be confirmed for judging the completion of ATC step.To understand the ATC operation, an operator is required to understand the input logic table, the output logic table and the manual interlock table.

(1) Reading the Output Logic TableThe output logic table is provided in “ATC Logic Tables”, “Output Logic Tables”.In this table, each operational step is listed vertically down the table with a description of each step.Horizontally, the table provides names of the solenoid valves that operate the ATC, and the operation command name. The status of these outputs can be checked on the Check Data display screen.Reading the table:Solenoid output statuses (ON/OFF) required to perform each ATC operation sequence (step) are indicated in the table. In the table “○” represents “ON” and blank represents “OFF”.

(2) Reading the Input Logic Table and the Manual Interlock TableThe output logic table is provided in [2-3 ATC Logic Table, 2-3-1].The manual interlock table is provided in [2-3 ATC Logic Table, 2-3-3].As with the output logic table, ATC operation steps are arranged vertically in the table with the input conditions necessary to complete the each step arranged horizontally. The status of the inputs can also be checked at the CHECK DATA screen.Reading the table:The ON/OFF status of the confirmation input signals, required for the completion of the ATC operation sequence (step), are shown in the table. In the table “○” represents “ON” and blank represents “OFF”.


If the ATC Fails to Operate

If the ATC fails to operate in response to manual ATC operation or ATC operation commands, the cause is probably one of the following:

(1) When manual ATC operation is attempted (other than 1 step advance and 1 step reverse operation), the actual ATC sequence number differs from the ATC sequence number in which the attempted step can be executed.

(2) When an ATC command is given, the actual ATC sequence number differs from the ATC sequence number in which the attempted step can be executed.

(3) When manual ATC operation is attempted, the ATC confirmation input signal status differs from the input signal status that allows the execution of the attempted ATC operation command, shown in the input logic table.

(4) When an ATC command is given, the ATC confirmation input signal status differs from the input signal status that allows the execution of the attempted ATC operation command, shown in the input logic table.

(5) The confirmation input signals are not input correctly due to a problem with the proximity switches/limit switches (operation failure due to misalignment of the mechanical parts, improper adjustments, damage, cable breakage, etc.) or due to blockage in the hydraulic piping, which means that the input conditions shown in the input logic table are not satisfied and thus completion of ATC operation sequence cannot be confirmed.

If the ATC Operation Sequence Number is Incorrect

If the ATC fails to operate due to incorrect ATC operation sequence number, as with cases (1) and (2) above, such a problem often occurs when operating the ATC in the manner as shown below.

Operating the ATC automatically using the ATC command by interrupting manual ATC operation (1 step advance, 1 step reverse).

Recovering the ATC after interrupting the ATC operation by pressing the reset button.

Recovering the ATC after interrupting the ATC operation by pressing the emergency stop button and resetting the emergency stop state by pressing the reset button.

When operating the ATC manually or executing an ATC command, the ATC operation sequence number at which the specific operation/command is allowed is predetermined. (Refer to [SECTION 2, 2-4-2. ATC Manual Operation]. Refer to [SECTION 2, 2-5. Program Command].Therefore, the ATC does not operate if manual operation is attempted or an ATC command is executed in a wrong ATC operation sequence number.In the case of (1), the attempted manual operation is disregarded and in the case of (2) an alarm occurs.

Recovering the interrupted operation:

Procedure :

1 Select ATC by pressing the Machine Manual Operation key on the machine operation panel.

2 The current ATC sequence number is displayed under operation number in the ATC Function screen. Check the current ATC sequence number.


3 Check the correct ATC sequence number by referring to [2-4-2 ATC Manual Operation/2-5 Program Command].

4 Advance or return the ATC operation sequence number by manually operating the ATC using the 1-step advance/1-step reverse buttons to set the ATC in the correct ATC operation sequence number.While the indicating lamp (LED) of the 1 STEP ADVANCE or 1 STEP REVERSE button lights, it indicates that 1 step advance/1 step reverse operation is permitted. Execute 1 step advance/reverse as instructed by the lighting of the indicating lamp (LED).

5 This completes the recovery of the ATC. Perform the desired manual ATC operation or the ATC command.If the ATC operation cannot be recovered by following the steps indicated above, it indicates that the ATC confirmation input signals differ from the input conditions indicated in the input logic table.

If the ATC Confirmation Input Signals Differ from the Input Condition Specified in the Input Logic Table

Provided the ATC is used normally, it will be possible to recover the operation by following the steps described in (1) above. However, if for some reason the ATC confirmation input signal status becomes different from the input condition indicated in the input logic table, it will not be possible to recover the ATC by using manual ATC operation.

(1) If manual ATC operation is impossibleIf manual ATC operation is not possible, the conditions not satisfied are displayed on the MACHINE DIAGNOSIS screen.

(2) If ATC commands (MT, M06, etc.) cannot be executedWhen an ATC command is executed, at each sequence step, the controller outputs the signals to each solenoid valve according to the output logic table. If the operation confirmation signal is not received within the specified length of time (120 s), “Alarm C 3734 Insufficient ATC Operation Condition” is triggered. At the occurrence of the alarm, the items for which the confirmation input signal has not been input correctly are displayed at the MACHINE DIAGNOSIS screen.In other words, by comparing the condition with the input condition in the input logic table, An item for which the input is OFF although it should be ON. An item for which the input is ON although it should be OFF.are displayed in the message.

As the result of confirmation, if there are items for which the input signal status differs from the status indicated in the input logic table although the signals are output corresponding to the present ATC operation sequence number indicated in the output logic table, it indicates that the machine will be faulty.If the check results show that there is an ATC input check item that does not match the input condition in the input logic table, there may be a problem with the machine even if the output operation corresponds to the matching ATC sequence number in the output logic table. Please contact the OKUMA service center.

5947-E P-133SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

3-1. Outline Y-axis Control

3-1-1. Introduction

This section describes the Y-axis controlled lathe, which has been developed by adding Y-axis control mechanism to a general multifunction lathe.Equipped with the Y-axis control, more complicated shape can be machined in only single setup. To use the Y-axis control lathe more profitably, use this manual as a NOTICE to the standard OSP operation manual and to the programming manual.

[Features of Y-axis controlling OSP]

(1) Compound fixed cycles are possible at a position offset in Y-axis direction.

(2) Y-axis control program can be created in the same way as programming for standard lathe.

(3) If you cancel the Y-axis control, the Y-axis unit automatically returns to the turning position.

LE32163R0300500010001


3-2. Machine Operation

3-2-1. Machine Operation

Basic Layout of Operation Panels

Machine operation panels are categorized as follows:

(1) NC operation panelThe NC operation panel is used to operate the NC except for manual operation.It is used for operations such as file handling and data setting.

(2) Machine panelThe machine panel has switches that are used primarily for manual operation.

(3) Option panelThe option panel is provided with the switches and lamps required for optionally selected functions. The arrangement of the switches or lamps on the panel varies depending on the selected optional functions.

Optional Panel for Y-axis Control Function

Operation Panel

LE32163R0300500030001


Brief Description of Switches and Operation Screens

(1) Y-AXIS OPERATION keyThis button is for JOG feed of Y-axis in the manual operation. This is valid only while you keep pressing the button. The override dial on the machine is usable for the Y-axis feed like the other feed axis.

(2) Pulse HandleY-axis movement is enabled when the X/Z/Y/W switch is positioned to Y. Multiplication of feeding is the same as of the X/Z axis switch.

(3) Y-axis modeThis key is used to select Y-axis mode or cancel Y-axis control mode in manual operation mode. When selecting the Y-axis control mode, the spindle must be set to C-axis connection. When canceling the Y-axis control, the tool edge position in the Y-axis direction must be returned to the turning position (Refer to (4)).

(4) Y-AXIS RETURNWhen canceling the Y-axis mode and executing the normal turning, the tool edge (center height) must be positioned in the center of the spindle. Since it is hard to restore the Y-axis to the turning position in manual mode, this Y-AXIS RETURN button is used. Although the Y-axis returns to the turning position while this button is pressed, the Y-axis stops moving when this button in released. The axial movement is not executed after the Y-axis was returned to the turning position.

LE32163R0300500040001

LE32163R0300500040002

LE32163R0300500040003


3-2-2. Manual Operations

Axis Movement (Y-axis)

There are following two ways to move the Y-axis.

JOG Feed Key

Pulse Handle

JOG Feed Key

Procedure :

1 Select the manual operation on the NC operation panel.

2 Press the Y-axis Mode key on the machine operation panel to switch to Y-axis Operation Mode.

3 Press Y-axis ↑ or ↓ key on the machine operation panel to move the Y-axis.

[Supplement]

Selected axis can move while you keep pressing JOG feed key.

Even if the Y-axis moving range is within the range set in the parameters, the Y-axis cannot move to the variable limit position depending on the X-axis position. In this case, the limit lamp lights ON.

With the OVERRIDE switch on the machine panel, you can change feed speed.


Pulse Handle

Procedure :


2 Press the Y-axis Mode key on the machine operation panel to switch to Y-axis Operation Mode.

3 To select the Y-axis, use the Y-axis Pulse Handle on the machine operation panel, or the Axis Selection switch on the portable pulse handle unit.

4 Select the axis movement amount per pulse handle division (1 pulse) with the pulse handle magnification on the machine panel.

5 Rotate the pulse handle. In the case of CW rotation, the pulse handle rotates in positive direction of the program coordinate system.

[Supplement]

For pulse handle operation, selection of multiple axes for simultaneous operation is not allowed.

Refer to the following table for feed amount per 1 pulse.

Linear feeding axis Rotary feeding axis

Metric unit system degree unit system

1/1 1mm/pulse 0.001°/pulse




3-2-3. MDI Operation

Y-axis Commands

When executing the Y-axis commands in the MDI operation, select the Y-axis control mode. The other command methods are the same with those of a normal machine.

(1) Selecting the Y-axis control mode.

Select the MDI operation mode.

Set the machine to the C-axis control mode.

Execute the Y-axis control mode ON command (G138).

(2) Canceling the Y-axis control mode.

Execute the Y-axis control OFF command (G136).

3-2-4. AUTO

For the automatic operation methods, refer to the OSP automatic operation because they are the same with those of a standard machine. This manual describes only the automatic operations peculiar to the Y-axis controlled lathe.

Sequence Restart

The sequence return operation procedure for the Y-axis machine is basically the same as of the standard machine.When executing sequence restart, however, the following points must be carefully attended to.Execute the sequence return under condition that command status in the program block to execute the sequence return should match with the actual machine status.

Actual matching conditions are as follows.

C-axis joint status

Tool turret indexing

Valid or invalid of the Y-axis control mode

We recommend executing the sequence return with the axis positioned near the coordinate values commanded in the program.

Starting a Program from Desired Sequence

When you restart the program, you can execute operation in the same way as of the standard restart operation, however, take extremely caution for the operation.Without regarding to the Y-axis control mode of the recovered machine, the machine executes commands of the program block to start. Therefore, if the restarting block and the spindle mode actually selected is not identical, the machine operates unexpectedly. If you attempt to restart the program, be sure to match the Y-axis control status of the block to start with the Y-axis control status of the machine.


3-2-5. NC Operation Panel Display

Screen Display

Select the ACTUAL POSITION screen and then MAIN PROGRAM screen. Next, use the PAGE key to display the screen shown below.While the NC is in the Y-axis control mode, the actual position data appears also in the columns for YI and XI axes. If the Y-axis control mode is not selected, asterisks appear on the YI and XI columns.

During Y-axis control mode

Y-axis control mode OFF

LE32163R0300500120001

LE32163R0300500120002


3-2-6. Additional Functions

Interlock against Axis Movement

In the Y-axis control mode, the X-axis commands are given with radius values, while the commands are given with the diameter value in the turning mode.This is because the axis commands in the Y-axis control mode are issued imaging the 3dimension space.The Y-axis control mode is retained even after the NC is reset or the power is turned on or off. In the Y-axis control mode, the NC deals with the given value as a radius value even though it is a diameter value in the program operation. To prevent such a problem, an alarm occurs if G138/G136 (Y-axis control ON/OFF) is not specified before the first axis movement command is given when the program operation is started in the Y-axis control mode.

Interlock against Turret Rotation

The turret can be rotated when the X-axis is equal to or larger than the variable limit.

System Variable

VZOFY.............. YI-axis zero offset

VZSHY.............. YI-axis zero shift

VDTFY []........ YI-axis Tool Offset

VPVLY............... YI-axis positive variable limit

VNVLY............... YI-axis negative variable limit

VINPY................ YI-axis droop value

VPFVY []........ YI-axis pitch error compensation

VPCHY.............. YI-axis pitch amount

VSKPY []........ YI-axis sensor touch position

VSIOY............... Y-axis actual position in program coordinates

VETFY............... Active. Y-axis tool offset amount

VDNRY []....... Y-axis cutter radius compensation


Load Monitor (Optional)

If the lathe is provided with the load monitor function, the load applied to the Y-axis can also be monitored.In this case, the load monitor function monitors the load applied to the existing YS-axis.Axis number to be monitored 128 Y-axis monitor ON<Part number setting example>To monitor the loads applied to X- and Y-axesVLMON [1] = 2 + 128

<Others>Whether the load monitor function is ignored or not during rapid traverse of Y-axis can be determine by specifying M215/M216.For the fundamental usage of the load monitor function, refer to Special Functions Manual No. 2.

LE32163R0300500160001


Y-axis Data Input/Output Function

In the program operation mode, this data transfer function permits transfer of Y-axis related data; that is, zero point data, tool data, and parameter data. This function is also used to store various set data in the memory or a floppy disk.For the operation procedure, refer to OSP Operation Manual.

Set Data Input/Output Format

File name[Character string [max. 256 characters starting with an alphabet] beginning with an alphabetic character].TOPThe default name is “A. TOP”.

For information on data format, refer to the Appendix.

Tow-along Tailstock Control in Y-axis Control Mode

The tow-along tailstock cannot be connected nor moved in Y-axis control mode.If such a command is issued in Y-axis control mode and in MANUAL mode, the NC ignores the command. In AUTO or MDI mode, an alarm is triggered.While the tailstock is connected, the Y-axis control mode cannot be established.If the Y-axis control mode ON command is issued in MANUAL mode with the tailstock connected, the NC ignores the command. If issued in AUTO or MDI mode, the NC generates an alarm.

Y-axis Home Position Command (Optional)

When the control unit is provided with both the Y-axis control function and the home position function, the home position command can be given to the three axes; X, Y, and Z.Program CommandsG20 HP = ? (? = 1 to 8)Before using the Y-axis home position function, set the home positions at the relevant parameters.

<With Y-axis control mode ON>The axes are positioned, at the rapid feedrate, to the machine coordinates of X-, Z-, and YS-axes set at the parameters. Even in axis movements by the home position command, X- and Y-axes are moved by linear interpolation.

<With Y-axis control mode OFF>When the Y-axis control mode is OFF, the YS-axis data set at the parameter is ignored and only X- and Z-axes move to the parameter-set positions.


Home Positioning Over the Variable Limit

The home position function normally carries out axis movements within the variable limit range. However, by designating the M code for canceling the limits, axis movement is possible over the variable limit within the stroke end limit range.M273 Home positioning is possible within the stroke end limit range.M274 Home positioning is possible within the variable limit range.

[Supplement]

Whether M273/M274 is designated or not,M274 becomes effective with the power ON or NC reset.Also,if an axis is positioned outside the variable limit by an M273 command, axis movement using manual interrupt is ignored.


Y-axis Control on 2-spindle Lathe

This section provides supplementary explanation about the Y-axis control function peculiar to facing 2-spindle lathes.

Y-axis Mirror Image Function

The facing 2-spindle lathe uses the program coordinate systems shown in the figure below for R and L spindles. As can be seen from the figure, the Y-axis direction of L spindle is inverse to that of R spindle, which may be confusing to the operator.To solve this problem, use the mirror image function. This function, like the Z-axis mirror image function, inverts the Y-axis direction of the program coordinate system according to the data set at the relevant parameter bit.Basic coordinate system

Mirror image coordinate system

+Y

+X

+Z

+Y

+Z

+X

LE32163R0300500230001

+X

+Y

+Z

+Y

+X

+Z

LE32163R0300500230002


<Parameter >

Selecting the Y-axis mirror image coordinate system for L spindleOPTIONAL PARAMETER (1st-2nd SPINDLE) 1st spindle mirror image select (Y) Not selected: Basic coordinate system is selected select: Mirror image coordinate system is selected.

Selecting the Y-axis mirror image coordinate system for R spindleOPTIONAL PARAMETER (1st-2nd SPINDLE) 2nd spindle mirror image select (Y) do not: Basic coordinate system is selected. select: Mirror image coordinate system is selected.

[Supplement]

Coordinate System Designation

Specify ether basic coordinate system or mirror image coordinate system for each spindle at the beginning of a part program.An alarm occurs if the coordinate system selected by the program does not match the coordinate system selected by the parameter. Selecting basic coordinate system G62 Y0 Selecting mirror image coordinate system G62 Y1G62 makes the NC check the part program with the above mirror image parameter data for safe operation. However, omission of this command will not result in any alarm.

Others

Spindle mode cannot be changed in the Y-axis control mode.

The above optional parameter bit data becomes effective by turning on the power.After changing the parameter data, back up the data, turn off the power, and turn on the power.

LE32163R0300500230003


Y-axis Control Mode Forced Cancel Function

The Y-axis is controlled based on the YS-axis position parameter set as the spindle center.The Y-axis cannot be controlled normally if the spindle center position of YS-axis is changed during the Y-axis control mode. For this reason, an interlock function is provided to inhibit change of YS-axis position parameter during Y-axis control mode. In a mode other than Y-axis control mode, the machine performs cutting with the YS-axis fixed at the spindle center position. Therefore, if the Yaxis control mode cancel command is issued, the YS-axis automatically returns to the spindle center position before the Y-axis control mode is canceled.However, there might be a case where the spindle center position is wrongly set on YS-axis and the Y-axis control mode is selected. In this case if the wrong parameter data is outside the YS-axis travel limit, the YS-axis may not be able to return to the wrongly set spindle center position. To recover the machine from such a state, use the Y-axis control mode forced cancel function.

<Function>When “effect” is selected at the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (Y-AXIS) Y-axis mode forced cancel, the alarm D, “Y-axis mode forced cancel” occurs. When Y-axis mode key is pressed in the manual mode, the NC cancels Y-axis control mode without moving YS-axis to the wrongly set spindle center position

<Recovery procedure>

Procedure :

1 Select “effect” at the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (Y-AXIS) Y-axis mode forced cancel. Alarm D 4258 “Y-axis mode being forced to cancel” will occur.

2 Select Manual mode.

3 Press the Y-axis mode key on the machine operation panel to forcibly cancel Y-axis control mode. When Y-axis mode is canceled, the back-lighted key lamp goes out.

4 Correct the system parameter data for specifying the YS-axis spindle center position.

5 Select “cancel” at the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (Y-AXIS) Y-axis mode forced cancel.

6 Press the Y-axis mode key to select the Y-axis control mode, and again press the Y-axis mode key to cancel the Y-axis control mode. The YS-axis will return to the correctly set position.

<OPTIONAL PARAMETER(Y-AXIS)> Y-axis mode forced cancel Cancel: Forced cancel invalid (default). Effect: Forced cancel valid.


[Supplement]

Resetting YS-axis Overtravel

When the YS-axis travel end limit has been exceeded, reset the state following the procedure below.Turn on the TRAVEL END LIMIT RELEASE switch inside the control box.

Procedure :

1 Press the RESET button.

2 Select the manual operation mode by pressing the MANUAL key.

3 Turn on the PULSE HANDLE Y-AXIS switch.

4 Turn the pulse handle to move the YS-axis off the travel end limit position.

5 Turn off the TRAVEL END LIMIT RELEASE switch.

6 Press the RESET button.

Normally, the pulse handle of YS-axis cannot be selected in any mode other than Y-axis control mode. However, it can be moved independently using the pulse handle if the PULSE HANDLE Y-AXIS switch is turned on with the TRAVEL END LIMIT RELEASE switch ON.

G136 is usable even while the Y-axis control mode is canceled. If G136 is issued while the forced cancel is effective, the YS-axis moves to the spindle center position.

LE32163R0300500260001


Y–axis Barrier Function (Optional)

To prevent interference of the saddle, a barrier zone is set within the axis operating range to disable the entry of the turret into the set barrier zone.

(1) ParametersSet the following parameters to establish the barrier zone.Setting unit, initial setting value and setting range are common to all parameters.Y-axis System Parameters

(2) Barrier areaBarrier setting range and axis movable range are determined as shown below according to the parameter setting.

a. If a positive (+) value is setBarrier range: “Negative stroke end limit” to Less than “Negative stroke end limit + Set value”Movable range: “Negative stroke end limit + Set value” - “Positive stroke end limit”

b. If a negative (-) value is setBarrier range: Larger than “Positive stroke end limit + Set value” to “Positive stroke end limit”Movable range: “Negative stroke end limit” to “Positive stroke end limit + Set value”

c. If “0” is setBarrier range: Negative stroke end limit - Positive stroke end limitMovable range: None

X-axis barrier length (radius) Setting Units: 1 mm

Y-axis barrier length Initial setting value: 0

Z-axis barrier length Setting range: -99999.999 to 99999.999

LE32163R0300500280001


The area where the individual axes are located in the respective barrier range is called the barrier area.This function is invalid if the setting for this parameter is “0” for two or more axes.

(3) InterlocksIn the operation in the automatic or MDI mode, if an axis movement command causing the axis to enter the barrier range is specified or an operation to move an axis into the barrier range is attempted, an alarm occurs and the turret stops moving.Even if manual operation to move an axis into the barrier range is attempted, the turret stops at a point away from the barrier range.If the turret is already positioned in the barrier range, manually move it away from the barrier range. In this manual operation, an axis can only be moved in the direction it moves away from the barrier range.)

Stroke end limit

Barrier area

Barrier zone

Y

X

Z

LE32163R0300500280002


3-3. Programming

3-3-1. Overview

The program is created with 3 dimensional coordinates of X, Y and Z-axes. In this case, the X and Y-axis commands are given with radius values. Therefore, in order to distinguish these axes from those used for turning, they are expressed as Xl, YI and ZI in the Y-axis control mode.

3-3-2. Y-axis Control Commands

Y-axis Control Mode Commands

Use the following G codes to enter or exit Y-axis control mode.

Y-axis Control Mode Enable commandG138

Y-axis Control Mode Disable commandG136

[Supplement]

Precautions for Executing Y-axis Control Mode Commands

(1) If you execute the Y-axis control mode OFF command (G136), the YS axis is positioned at the spindle center and the Y-axis control mode goes OFF regardless of the Y-axis position.

(2) During the Y-axis control mode, you cannot use the coordinate conversion function. Turn off the Y-axis control mode before using the coordinate conversion function.

(3) Before executing the sequence return in the Y-axis control mode, return the Y-axis in the Y-axis control mode beforehand.

(4) The Y-axis control mode remains effective even after NC reset or power ON/OFF. In the Y-axis control mode, the X-axis commands are given with radius values. For these reasons, before attempting axis movement by MDI commands immediately after turning on the power, be sure to check whether the Y-axis control mode is established or not.

During the Y-axis control mode, the Y-axis mode button lamp lights on the option panel.

On receiving the Y-axis control mode OFF command, the NC automatically returns the Y-axis to the turning position.


Axis Travel Command

G codes which can specify axis motion in the Y-axis control mode are as follows.

(1) Usable G codesG00:Positioning at the rapid feedrateG01:Linear interpolationIn both G00 and G01 modes, X, Y, and Z commands can be designated simultaneously.

ln Y-axis control mode, even a rapid traverse command is executed by linear interpolation. Therefore, when X-axis and Y-axis commands are designated in the same block, the rapid feedrate is limited to the rapid feedrates of XI-axis and YI-axis.

Since the spindle is stopped in the Y-axis control mode, designate the cutting feedrate in units of “feed per minute”.

(2) Y-Z, X-Y plane arc commandsArc commands can be designated in the Y-Z plane or the X-Y plane by selecting the Y-Z plane or the X-Y plane in the Y-axis control mode.

Plane designation codeG19: Y-Z plane designationG18: Z-X plane designationG17: X-Y plane designationG19 and G17 can be designated only in the Y-axis control mode. When the NC has been reset, when the Y-axis control mode has been turned off, or when the power has been turned on, G18 (X-Z plane designation) is effective.

Arc designation methodY-Z plane arcG02 Y Z J K(L) F. . ClockwiseG03 Y Z J K(L) F. . CounterclockwiseX-Y plane arcG02 X Y I J(L) F. . ClockwiseG03 X Y I J(L) F. . CounterclockwiseX: X-coordinate of the arc end pointY: Y-coordinate of the arc end pointZ: Z-coordinate of the arc end pointI: Component of arc radius in the X-axis directionJ: Component of arc radius in the Y-axis directionK: Component of arc radius in the Z-axis directionL: Radius designated as the arc radius valueF: Feedrate


[Supplement]

X and Y Commands

In the Y-axis control mode, YI and XI commands are designated in radius in reference to the program zero. Note that YI commands can be designated only in the Y-axis control mode.If they are designated in other than the Y-axis control mode, an alarm occurs.

1) In the Y-Z plane, X-axis commands can not be designated as arc commands. In the same way, Z-axis values cannot be given to the X-Y plane arc command.

2) In the Y-Z plane, the arc rotating direction, OW or COW, should be specified by viewing the plane from the X-axis positive direction to its negative direction. On the X-Y plane, the arc rotating direction should be specified by viewing the plane from the Z-axis positive direction to its negative direction.

3) The plus and minus signs of I, J and K commands are definite viewing the arc center from the arc start point.

4) The arc radius can be designated by using an L command or by using I, J and K commands. When the arc radius is designated using an L command, the arc whose center angle is within 180° is selected.

G03YI

K

ZI

JL

Arc end point

Arc start point

G02YI

K

ZI

JL

Arc end point

Arc start point

G02YI

I

XI

JL

Arc end point

Arc start point

G03YI

I

XI

JL

Arc end point

Arc start point

LE32163R0300500320001


Y-axis Zero Shift

As in the case of X- and Z-axes, the Y-axis zero point can be shifted with the Y-axis control mode ON. However, since the Y-axis control mode is effective, specify the shift amount of X-axis with a radius value.G50 X Y Z C


3-3-3. Y-axis Compound Fixed Cycles

Compound Fixed Cycles Usable in the Y-axis Control Mode

[Supplement]

[Code] Compound Fixed Cycle Name Program Commands

G181Drill cycle

With repeat functionG181, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, Q, E

G182Boring cycle


G183Deep-hole drilling cycle

With repeat functionG183, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, Q, D, E, L

G184Tapping cycle


G189Milling / Boring cycleWith repeat function

G189, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, Q, E

G178Synchronized tapping reverse

tapping cycleWith repeat function

G178, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, D, J, Q

G179Synchronized tapping forward

tapping cycleWith repeat function

G179, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, D, J, Q

G190Keyway cycle

With repeat function

G190, X, Y, Z, C, I(K), D, U(W), E, F, Q,

M211/M212/M213/M214

G191Longtitudinal groove cycle

With repeat functionG191, X, Y, Z, C, R, J, F, Q, I

G180 Cancel of compound fixed cycle G180

The compound fixed cycles usable in Y-axis control mode are limited to side face machining.For end face machining, carry out contour generation as in the conventional way.


Basic Axis Motions

Axes move as illustrated below by designating a block of programs in the G181, G182, G183, G184, G189, G178, or G179 mode.In the Y-axis control mode, use radial values for designating commands.

Basic Axis Motion

Q1 Y-,Z-,and X-axes are positioned at the rapid feedrate.

Q2The X-axis is positioned at the (Q1-shift amount I) point at the rapid

feedrate.

Q3 The tool moves at a cutting feedrate from point Q2 to point X.

Q4The tool returns to the start point of the Q3 cycle at the rapid feedrate or at a

cutting feedrate.

LE32163R0300500360001


Axis Motion Specific to Each Compound Fixed Cycles

(1) Drilling Cycle (G181)

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB= N102 G181 Xb Yb Zb C I F N103 G180

<Details of Motion>

Q1Positioning at (Xa, Yb, Zb) in the G00 mode with the C-axis at its commanded position

→After the completion of positioning, the M-tool rotates in the forward direction.

Q2Positioning at the (Xa - I) point in the G00

mode→

Upon completion of axis travel, the C-axis is clamped.

Q3The tool moves up to point Xb at a cuffing

feedrate in the G01 mode.→

Q4Position to the cutting start point with G00.

→After the completion of positioning, the C-axis is unclamped.

LE32163R0300500370001


(2) Boring Cycle (182)

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB= N102 G182 Xb Yb Zb C I F EN103 G180

<Details of Motion>



Q2Positioning at the (Xa - I) point in the G00 mode

→Upon completion of axis travel, the C-axis is clamped.

Q3The tool moves up to point Xb at a cuffing feedrate in the G01 mode. →

Upon completion of axis travel, perform Dwell for duration “E”. (can be omitted)After the completion of the dwell.

Q4Positioning at the cuffing start point in the G00 mode →

After the completion of positioning at the cutting start point, the C-axis is unclamped. The M-tool rotates in the forward direction.

LE32163R0300500370002


(3) Deep-hole Drilling Cycle (G183)

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB= N102 G183 Xb Yb Zb C I F E D LN103 G180

<Details of Motion>





Q3

The tool moves toward point Xb by “step feed” in the G01 mode.In the “step feed” mode, cutting is performed following the steps below. The tool is fed by “D”. Then it is retracted by “α” at the rapid feedrate. That is repeated until the depth of cut reaches “L”. The tool returns to the cutting start point at the rapid feedrate. Then, the tool is fed by “D” from the previous infeed point. This drilling cycle is repeated until the tool reaches the target point Xb.

→

When target value is reached, perform Dwell for duration “E”. (can be omitted)

Q4Positioning at the cutting start point in the G00 mode

→After the completion of positioning at the cutting start point, the C-axis is unclamped.

LE32163R0300500370003


(4) Tapping Cycle (G184)

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB= N102 G184 Xb Yb Zb C I F EN103 G180

<Details of Motion>





Q3

The tool moves up to point Xb at a cuffing feedrate in the G01 mode.

→

After point Xb has been reached, the cycle is interrupted for dwell duration “E”. (may be omitted) Upon completion of Dwell, stop rotary tool

→

The M-tool once stops and then rotates in the reverse direction.

Q4

After reverse rotation of the rotary tool, jog to cutting start point by G01.

→

After the completion of positioning at the cutting start point, the C-axis is unclamped. The M-tool rotates in the forward direction.

→

The M-tool once stops and then rotates in the forward direction.

LE32163R0300500370004


(5) Reaming/Boring Cycle (G189)

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB= N102 G189 Xb Yb Zb C I F E N103 G180

<Details of Motion>





Q3The tool moves up to point Xb at a cuffing feedrate in the G01 mode. →

After point Xb has been reached, the cycle is interrupted for dwell duration “E”. (can be omitted)

Q4Positioning at the cutting start point in the G01 mode

→After the completion of positioning, the C-axis is unclamped.

LE32163R0300500370005


(6) Synchronized Tapping Cycles (G178, G179)

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB= N102 G178 Xb Yb Zb C I D F N103 G180

<Details of Motion>


→After the completion of positioning, the C-axis is clamped.

Q2

Positioning at the (Xa - I) point in the G00 mode

→

After the completion of positioning, if a D command has been designated, the M-tool spindle is positioned at the D command point. Then the C-axis is clamped.

Q3 With the M-axis in forward rotation, simultaneously feed M-axis and X-axis to position Xb.

Q4The M-tool spindle and the X-axis are fed simultaneously up to the cutting start point while

rotating the M-tool spindle in the reverse direction.

LE32163R0300500370006


(7) Keyway Cutting Cycle (G190) (On side face)This command executes the cycle of cutting keyways which are offset in Y-axis direction or the keyways on the Y-Z plane.

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB= N102 G190 Xb Yb Zb C I D F U E M211 (M212) M213 (M214)N103 G180

<Details of Motion>

[Supplement]

Q1 Position to C command value with G00. X-, Y-, T-axes remain in N100 position.

Q2 Positioning at the (Xa - I) point in G00 mode

Q3Cut to target Xb, Yb, Zb using the designated cutting direction and method and single cut amount of D per cut.

Q4 Rapid traverse to cutting start position.

For designation of cutting direction, cutting method, and others, refer to the description of keyway cutting cycle in the operation and programming manuals for multi-machining function.

Y

Z

X

DU

D

D

Q1

Cutting target point(Xb, Yb, Zb)

Cycle start point(Xa, Ya, Za)

Q2

I

Q3

Q3Q3

Q3

Q4

Q4

LE32163R0300500370007


(8) Keyway Cutting Cycle (G190) (On End Face)This command executes the cycle of cutting keyways which are offset in Y-axis direction or the keyways on the X-Y plane.The keyway cutting cycle on the end face of a workpiece (X-Y plane) is possible using a contour creation machining.

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB=N102 G190 Xb Yb Zb C K D F W E M211 (M212) M213 (M214) N103 G180

<Details of Motion>

[Supplement]

Q1Position to C command value with G00.X-, Y-, T-axes remain in N100 position.

Q2 Positioning at the (Za - K) point in G00 mode

Q3The tool moves to the (Xb, Yb, Zb) point with a cutting depth D in the specified cutting direction and according to the specified cutting method.

Q4 Positioning at the cutting start point in G00 mode

For designation of cutting direction, cutting method, and others, refer to the description of keyway cutting cycle in the operation and programming manuals for multi-machining function.

Y( Xb, Yb, Zb )Cutting target point

Q3

Q3

Q3Q3

DD

D

Q4

Q4

Q2 Q1

W

K

( Xa, Ya, Za )Cycle start point

Z

X

LE32163R0300500370008


(9) Vertical Groove Cycle (G191)This is the cycle for performing cutting feed in Y-axis direction after positioning X-, Z-, and C-axes.

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB= N102 G191 Xb Yb Zb C I J F R N103 G180

<Details of Motion>

Q1 Positioning at the (Xb, Ya, Zb, C) point in G00 mode

Q2 Positioning at the (Ya – J: Y-axis coordinate) point in G00 mode

Q3 The tool moves to the (Xb, Yb, Zb) point at a cutting feedrate.

Q4 The tool runs off in X-axis direction by the amount of I and returns to the Q3 cutting start point.

Y

Z

X

Q1

Cutting target point(Xb, Yb, Zb)

(Xa, Ya, Za)

Q2

I

Q3

Q4

LE32163R0300500370009


3-4. Slant Machining Mode Function

3-4-1. Overview

MACTURN and MULTUS featuring the B-axis 1 degree indexing function can index a tool mounted on a turret in any direction on the X-Z plane.The following figure is an example of indexing the turret diagonally and cutting in the diagonal direction. (Hereafter, this cutting method will be referred to as Slope machining.)The NC needs to calculate a target position when executing axis movements indicated in the figure below. Calculating a target position will be simplified in a converted coordinate system by rotating the coordinate axes.The slant machining mode function simplifies calculation of a target position by using coordinate conversion; thereby facilitating programming for slant machining.

X+

Z+

(Za, Xa)

Zb = Za - L·cosZb = Za - L·cosXb = Xa - L·sinXb = Xa - L·sin

L

(Zb, Xb)Target position Pt

Start position Pf

Turret slant angle

LE32163R0300500380001


3-4-2. Coordinate System for Slant Machining

To simplify the positioning in the slant machining, a converted coordinate system (a slant machining coordinate system) is generated when the slant machining mode is selected. In the slant machining mode, an axis command in the converted coordinate system is converted into a position command in the base coordinate system before axis movement.

(1) Definition of Converted Coordinate System“A coordinate system is defined as the converted coordinate system X’-Y-Z’ when the Z-axis is rotated counterclockwise to align with the Z’-axis with the offset position of the zero point of the X-, Y-, and Z- axes as a center of rotation in a base coordinate system.”

(2) Relation between Base and Converted Coordinate SystemsThe following figure shows the relation between the base coordinate system and the converted coordinate system.

An angle θ between the Z-axis and the Z’-axis is a rotation angle used in coordinate conversion.The rotation center 0 of the coordinate system is the zero offset position of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes.

The coordinate of a point P is defined as [Xa, Ya, Za] in the base coordinate system (X-Y-Z) and as [Xa’, Ya, Za’] in the converted coordinate system (X’-Y-Z’) in the figure above.As a result, the following relations are derived.Xa’ = Xa • cosθ - Za • sinθZa’ = Xa • sinθ + Za • cosθ

LE32163R0300500390001


(3) Two Spindle ModelsFor the two-spindle models such as a machine with a sub spindle or a turning center with facing spindles, the coordinate system for a mirror image of Z-axis may be selected. In this case, the coordinate rotating direction in axis conversion is defined as a clockwise direction assuming that the Z-axis positive direction is 0° as shown in the following figure.

3-4-3. Slant Machining Mode Commands

(1) Slant Machining Mode ON/OFF CommandsThe following G code commands select or cancel the slant machining mode.(The B command specifies a rotation angle of the coordinate system)G127 B*** Slant machining mode ON command(B: -359.999 - 359.999)G126 Slant machining mode OFF command

The slant machining mode is effective during the period between executions of G127 command and G126 command. During this mode, positioning is conducted based on the slant machining coordinate system (X’-Y-Z’).

When the B command is omitted, the rotation angle of the coordinate system is considered to be 0°.

The slant machining mode becomes “OFF” with the NC reset or execution of M02 (end of program).

(2) Restrictions on Slant Machining Mode ON/OFF CommandsIf the slant machining mode ON/OFF command (G127/G126) is issued when the following conditions are not met, an alarm occurs and the command will be revoked.

Slant machining mode ON command (G127)

Y-axis mode is selected.

Nose-R compensation is not in progress.

LAP cycle is not in progress.

Slant machining mode is not selected yet.

LE32163R0300500390002


Coordinate conversion is not in progress (on the machine with the coordinate conversion function).

Compound fixed cycle is not under execution.

Slant machining mode OFF command (G126)

Compound fixed cycle is not under execution.

(3) Manual Axis Feed in Slant DirectionWhen the slant machining mode ON command is issued, the B command value (coordinate rotation angle) issued in the same block is automatically set at the rotation angle on the SLANT FEED DIRECTION SET screen. This enables manual axis feed in slant direction.

3-4-4. Functions Usable in Slant Machining Mode

(1) G Codes and Axis Commands Usable in Slant Machining ModeThe following commands are available in the slant machining mode.

Commands other than those listed above (including fixed cycle commands) will cause an alarm.X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, and C-axis The X-, Y-, and Z-axis positions should be specified in the slant machining coordinate system X’-Y-Z’.Commands to the C-axis can by issued only when the C-axis is connected. (Issue the M110 command.)Helical cutting is possible for the machine equipped with the helical cutting specification.

(2) Rapid Traverse Positioning Command (G00)Rapid traverse speed in slant machining mode is half the speed of that in normal mode for interpolation of X-Y-Z axes. (Because the rapid traverse speed of the slanted axis exceeds the limit value.)The C-axis, however, moves at the rapid traverse rate specified in the relevant parameter, and its movement is not interpolated with other axes.

(3) Circular Interpolation Cutting Command and Cutter Radius Compensation CommandThe circular interpolation cutting commands and the cutter radius compensation commands are executed on the X’-Y plane, Z’-X’ plane, and Y-Z’ plane in the slant machining mode.The G41 and G42 issued in the slant machining mode are treated as cutter radius compensation commands even when the Z’-X’ plane is specified. (Not treated as a nose radius compensation.)<Specifying Compensation Plane>Before issuing the command for circular interpolation cutting or cutter radius compensation, specify a plane where such command will be executed.G17.......Cutter radius compensation on X’-Y planeG18.......Cutter radius compensation on Z’-X’ planeG19.......Cutter radius compensation on Y-Z’ planeG 18 is selected by default when the power is turned on, the NC is reset, or M02 is executed.

Rapid Traverse Positioning command

(G00)

Jog Positioning command (G01)

Circular Interpolation Cutting command

(G02/G03)

Cutter Radius Compensation command

(G41/G42)

Compound Fixed Cycle (G178 to G184, G189 to G191)

Zero Point Shift command (G50)


<Cutting Direction in Circular Interpolation>

X’-Y plane (G17)G02: Clockwise seen from Z’-axis positive direction to negative directionG03: Counterclockwise seen from Z’-axis positive direction to negative direction

Z’-X’ plane (G18)G02: Clockwise seen from Y-axis positive direction to negative directionG03: Counterclockwise seen from Y-axis positive direction to negative direction

Y-Z’ plane (G19)G02: Clockwise seen from X’-axis positive direction to negative directionG03: Counterclockwise seen from X’-axis positive direction to negative direction

<Restrictions on Specifying Compensation Plane and Cutter Radius ON/OFF Command>

Be sure to specify the compensation plane (G17/G18/G19) and the slant machining mode ON command (G127) before the cutter radius compensation commands (G41/G42).

The slant machining mode ON/OFF commands are invalid during cutter radius compensation(an alarm will occur.)

The specified compensation plane remains unchanged after the slant machining mode ON/OFF commands.

[Command example]

(4) Compound Fixed CycleThe compound fixed cycle in the slant machining mode has the same command format as that for the Y-axis fixed cycle in the base coordinate system except that the operation direction is changed to the direction in the slant machining coordinate system X’-Y-Z’.For information on compound fixed cycle, refer to [SECTION 3, 3-3-3. Y-axis Compound fixed cycle].

(5) Zero Point Shift Command (G50)The zero point shift amount can be changed with the G50 command even during the slant machining mode.

:N100 G17 Specifies the compensation plane X–Y.N110 G127 B30 Selects the slant machining mode

with a slant angle of 30 .N120 G41 Activates the cutter radius

compensation to the left.:

N140 G40 Deactivates the cutter radiuscompensation.

N150 G42 Activates the cutter radiuscompensation to the right.

:N180 G40 Deactivates the cutter radius

compensation.N190 G126 Cancels the slant machining mode.N200 G19 Returns the compensation plane to Y–Z.

Compensation plane: X'-Y

LE32163R0300500410001


The following command, when specified in the slant machining mode, changes the zero point shift amount of the base coordinate system so that the specified axes in the slant machining coordinate system are located on the program coordinates.G50 X__ Z__ Y__ C__

(6) STM CommandThe STM commands are not restricted in the slant machining mode.For example, the turret can rotate even in the slant machining mode as far as the axis positions meet the turret rotating conditions in the base coordinate system.

(7) System VariableThe following system variables are only read and written as the values represented in the slant machining coordinate system in the slant machining mode.[Applicable system variables]

VZSHX: X-axis zero point shift amount

VZSHY: Y-axis zero point shift amount

VZSHZ: Z-axis zero point shift amount

VSIOX: X-axis actual position

VSIOY: Y-axis actual position

VSIOZ: Z-axis actual position

(8) Tool offsetEven during the slant machining mode, the specified tool offset values are applied to the X-, Y-, and Z-axes in the base coordinate system. This means that the X-, Y-, and Z-axes data are not used for offsetting the specified tool in the slant machining coordinate system.

(9) Variable LimitThe X-, Y-, and Z-axis travel range in the base coordinate system is also restricted by the variable limits also in the slant machining mode.


(10) InterlocksIn the slant machining mode, the following commands are disabled. An alarm occurs if any command indicated below is specified and the specified command is disregarded.

Y-axis mode ON/OFF command (G138, G136)

LAP commands

Slant machining mode ON command (G127)

Coordinate conversion ON command (G137) (for the coordinate conversion specification)

Spindle mode commands (G140, G141)

3-4-5. Zero Point Shift Macro Command

(1) OverviewIn Y-axis control mode and slant machining mode, programs can be created easily by shifting the program zero as desired according to the machining purpose. To move the program zero during program operation, the zero shift function is used normally. Specify the zero point shift amount by one of the following means. Enter a shift amount in the item “Zero point shift” in the zero setting mode. Specify an amount with a G50 command in the part program.Specify a shift amount with a system variable VZSH? (? = X, Y and Z).Since specifying an zero point shift values with the system variables requires to specify the shift amount of X-, Y-, and Z-axes, it is necessary to change the X-axis data to a diameter value or radius value according to whether the Y-axis mode is selected or not.For the zero point shift macro command, the shift amount can be specified as a system variable VZSH? (?=X, Y, Z) by converting the X-axis diameter/radius. Also, in slant machining mode, the X/Y/Z-axis shift amount in the slant machining coordinate system is enabled.

(2) Command Format

Specify shift amounts of X-, Y-, and Z-axes at SX, SY, and SZ. The specified SX value is treated as a radius in the Y-axis mode and treated as a diameter in a mode other than the Y-axis mode.If G174 is doubly issued after shifting of zero point, the specified shift amount is added to the already set data.When G174 is specified, the NC automatically calculates the values to be set at the system variables VZSHX, VZSHY, and VZSHZ, and internally issues the commands for setting these variables.Issuing G175 command cancels all the zero point shift commands specified by that time.

G174 SX=__ SY=__ SZ=__ :Zero Point Shift Macro Command

G175 :Zero point shift cancel macro command


3-4-6. Actual Position Display

During the slope machining mode, the actual position (X’-Y-Z’) in the converted coordinate system is displayed on the following screen.

The following data are displayed only when the slope machining mode is selected.

XIR X’-axis in the converted coordinate system X’-Y-Z’

YIR Y-axis in the converted coordinate system X’-Y-Z’

ZIR Z’-axis in the converted coordinate system X’-Y-Z’

BA Rotation angle of the converted coordinate system X’-Y-Z’

LE32163R0300500430001


3-5. Data Operation

3-5-1. Data Setting

This item describes the data setting necessary for Y-axis control function.

Zero Setting

Zero offsetThe zero offset value is set in the coordinate system for Y-axis control. This setting should be done in Operation screen mode. Press the Sheet key to display the spindle setup screen. The value set for YS-axis zero point offset is the value from the YS-axis machine zero point to the YS-axis program zero point.

The following relationship exists between YS-axis zero offset value and YI-axis zero offset value.{(YS-axis zero point offset value) - (YS-axis spindle center position)} x sinθ= (YI-axis zero point offset value) - (YS-axis spindle center position)If a zero offset value of either YS-axis or YI-axis is changed, the other offset value is also changed to maintain the above relationship.The offset value can be set at either YS-axis or YI-axis.

LE32163R0300500450001


Tool offset

Dimensional accuracy in machining using the Y-axis control function is controlled by tool offset data.Longitudinal keyway cutting

Transverse keyway cutting

YI

YI-axis programming zero

YI-axis machine zero

YS-axis machine zero

YS-axis spindle center position

a: YS-axis spindle center position

b: YS-axis zero offset

c: YI-axis zero offset

: Angle formed between YS-axis and X-axis (90° for MACTURN)

X

XIYS

bc

a

a

LE32163R0300500450002

Controlled by X-axis tool offset

Controlled by YI-axis tool offset

Controlled by Z-axis tool offset

YI

XI

LE32163R0300500460001


YI

XI

LE32163R0300500460002


Drilling at off-center positions

For tool offset data, three types of offset data are available; X-axis direction, YI-axis direction, and Z-axis direction. Offset for the X-axis and Y-axis direction is given in the same way as before.Information on the YI-axis tool offset is provide below.


YI

XI

LE32163R0300500460003


YI-axis Tool Offset

YI-axis tool offset data is set to compensate the offset of the Y-axis tool center in the YI-axis direction.YI-axis tool offset data is effective in the Y-axis control mode.

(1) How to set YI-axis tool offset data:Select the TOOL DATA SETTING mode by pressing the TOOL DATA key. Press the Sheet key to display the TOOL DATA screen. Select the applicable tool using the cursor key and set the YI-axis offset value.

Setting is possible in an accuracy of 1 μm.

Offset in Y-axis positioning

Actual Y-axispositioning point

Programmed Y-axispositioning point

YI

XI

LE32163R0300500470001

LE32163R0300500470002


(2) Examples of YI-axis Tool OffsetExample 1: Off-center position drilling

When performing drilling at a position 50 mm away from the workpiece center as illustrated above, if the drill is located at the 52 mm position, set -2 mm at OFFSET NO. “02” for YI-axis.Example 2: Longitudinal keyway cutting

YI

XI

Tool offset number 02

Actual position

52(2.05)

50 (1.97)

2(0.08)

Unit : mm (in.)

Command position

LE32163R0300500470003

Unit : mm (in.)



YI

0.01(0.0004)

0.01(0.0004)

16 (0.63)

15.98 (0.6291)

30 (1.18)

XI

LE32163R0300500470004


It is possible to compensate for the dimensional error due to tool wear by setting offset data at different tool offset numbers. To control the keyway width, for example, assign different tool offset numbers for the upper and lower sides of the cutting tool. For longitudinal keyway cutting as illustrated above if Keyway width:30 mm (1.18 in.) Rotary tool diameter 16 mm, Tool wear 0.02 mmthen the finished keyway will be 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.) narrower than the required width. To obtain accurate 30 mm (1.18 in.) width, two tool offset numbers (02 and 12) can be used for a tool (tool number 02). Set 0.01 mm (0.0004 in.) for offset number “02” and -0.01 mm (-0.0004 in.) for offset number “12”.

Tool Nose Radius Compensation

Tool nose radius compensation can be performed in the Y-Z plane or the X-Y plane while the Y-axis control mode is effective.

(1) Plane SelectionDesignate the following G codes to select the plane.G19...Tool nose radius compensation in the Y-Z planeG17...Tool nose radius compensation in the X-Y plane

[Supplement]

(2) Tool Nose Radius Compensation ON/OFF CommandsThe following G codes are used to turn on or off tool nose radius compensation.G40...Tool nose radius compensation OFFG41...Tool nose radius compensation left ON (when the tool moves at the left side of the workpiece viewed from the tool advancing direction.)G42...Tool nose radius compensation right ON (when the tool moves at the right side of the workpiece viewed from the tool advancing direction.)The relation between the tool advancing direction and the workpiece location in the rectangular coordinate system which is composed of X-, Y-, and Z-axes is defined as follows.

The tool advancing direction, or, in other words, whether the tool moves at the right side or left side of the workpiece, is viewed from the positive direction of an axis which is perpendicular to the plane in which tool nose radius compensation is performed.

G19 and G17 are effective only in the M110 (C-axis connected) mode.When the M109 (C-axis disconnected) command is executed, G18 (tool nose radius compensation in the X-Z plane) will be set automatically.When the power is turned on or the NC is reset, G18 (tool nose radius compensation in the X-Z plane) will be selected automatically.

LE32163R0300500480001


[Supplement]

(3) Tool Nose Radius Compensation ValueSpecify with a TD6 digit code.TD= ○○□□□□ ○○: Tool position number (including cutter radius compensation) □□□□: Tool numberUse X-Z-axis nose radius compensation values for compensating cutter radius on Y-Z or X-Y plane as in the case of normal rotary tools.

(4) Procedure for Plane Designation and Turning ON/OFF Tool Nose Radius Compensation

The plane designation command (G19 or G17) must be designated before designating a tool nose radius compensation command (G41 or G42).

Designate G40 before switching the tool nose radius compensation command from G41 to G42 or from G42 to G41.

Designate G40 before designating a G code (G17, G18, G119, or G19) which selects a plane for tool nose radius compensation.

In the above figures, the tool advancing direction is viewed from the X-axis positive direction, that is, from the machine rear.G codes which can be used to move axes in the G19 or G17 mode are G00, G01, G02, and G03.

N500 G19N510 G41

N580 G40N590 G42

N680 G40N690 G18

LE32163R0300500480002


3-6. Parameters

3-6-1. Parameters

The following parameters are added to the lathe equipped with the Y-axis control function.

System Parameters

AXIS DATA

Using the AXIS CHANGE key, select the screen for setting the YS-axis and YI-axis data.

Stroke end limit

Backlash

PR zero offset

Stroke comp.

Torque value

[Supplement]

(1) Stroke end limitUse these parameters to set the stroke limits of each controlled axis. If you set the stroke end limits, the variable limit values are forcibly changed to the set limits.

(2) BacklashUse this parameter to compensate the lost motion of YS axis. According to the set value, the NC compensates each axis movement in positive direction.The NC subtracts the backlash compensation amount from the value read by the encoder for movement in positive direction. The subtraction result is handled as the true detection value.

(3) PR zero offsetUse this parameter to compensate the actual position detected by the encoder (hereafter, called the detection value). The compensated value is regarded as the actual position in the machine coordinate system.

For YI-axis, no data can be set at BACKLASH, PR ZERO OFFSET, and PR CONNECT COMP.For YS-axis stroke end limit and YI-axis stroke end limit, {(YS-axis stroke end limit value) - (YS-axis spindle center position)} × sinθ= (YI-axis stroke end limit value) - (YS-axis spindle center position)to main the above relationship, when one changes, the other changes accordingly.

ItemInitial Value Setting

RangeSetting range: Setting Units

+ stroke end limitDepends on the

machine specifications-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system

- stroke end limitDepends on the

machine specifications-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system

Backlash 0.010 -1.000 to +1.000 Selected unit system

PR zero offset 0 -99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system


(4) Stroke comp.This parameter data is used for compensating the pitch error of simplified ball screw. This parameter will not appear if the function for compensating ball screw pitch error or Inductosyn pitch error is selected.

Y-axis System Parameters

(1) YS.XANGLE DATAThis parameter is used to set the angle formed between YS-axis and X-axis. Since all the Y-axis movements are calculated based on this angle data, if the angle data is change, positioning of Y-axis will not be normally carried out.For MACTURN250/350, the angle formed by YS-axis and X-axis is 120°.

(2) TURNING POSITION (YS-axis Spindle Center Position)

This parameter is used to set the point where the YS-axis returns when the Y-axis control mode is turned off.

In a mode other than the Y-axis control mode, the YS-axis is fixed in the spindle center position.

The machine coordinate value of the YI axis, the virtual coordinate value, is determined assuming that the YI-axis and the YS-axis intersect with each other at the YS-axis spindle center position.

For the sub-spindle specification model equipped with H2 turret, the spindle center position above the sub-spindle exists as the “TURNING POSITION H”.

LE32163R0300500510001


[Supplement]

The YS.X ANGLE DATA and the TURNING POSITION are basic parameters, critical for Y-axis control in slant type machining. Therefore, the Y-axis control mode must be set OFF before changing the data of these parameters.The YS-axis coordinate value and the YI-axis coordinate value must always satiety the expression that includes the YS.X data and the TURNING POSITION data. Therefore, if either the YS.X data or the TURNING POSITION data is changed, the parameter data of the YI-axis coordinate value is automatically calculated on the basis of the YS-axis coordinate value parameter data so that the expression will be satisfied.


User Parameters

YI-axis variable limit

YS-axis variable limit

YS-axis droop data

(1) For YS-axis variable limit and YI-axis variable limit,{(YS-axis variable limit) -(YS-axis spindle center position)} × sinθ= (YI-axis variable limit) -(YS-axis spindle center position)to main the above relationship, when one changes, the other changes accordingly.

(2) Since the YI-axis is a virtual axis, its droop data cannot set.

Y-axis Home Position (Optional)

For the lathes provided with both Y-axis control function and home position function, the home position can be set at the three axes; X, Y, and Z.X-axis and Y-axis settings for the home position is done with machine coordinates.The Y-axis is set with YS-axis machine coordinates.The parameter data can be set using the SET, ADD, and CAL functions. In parameter setting by CAL function, the following formula is used to obtain the data to be set. When the function key [F3] (CAL) and the WRITE key are pressed sequentially, the coordinates where the axes are currently positioned are set at the parameters because the input value is 0.Value to be set by calculation = Current axis position in the machine coordinate system - Input data

Yl-axis

Xl-axis

Yl-axis positivevariable limits

Yl-axis negativevariable limits

LE32163R0300500520001


Y-axis Pitch Error Compensation (Optional)

This parameter is used to set compensation for YS-axis ball screw pitch error. The pitch error compensation increases cutting edge positioning accuracy in Y-axis direction in the Y-axis control mode.

Y-axis Turret Position Compensation

Besides the turret position error compensation of X- and Z-axes, the turret position error can be compensated in Y-axis direction. The compensation in Y-axis direction, which is effective only in Y-axis control mode, is carried out by the first axis movement command issued after the Y-axis control mode is turned on.

Other Parameters

(1) XI-YI axis moving area expansion offsetThis parameter applies only to the LT10MY model.The YI-axis movement in positive direction is restricted by the X-axis positive travel limit. This parameter is used to expand the YI-axis moving range in the positive direction. The X-axis can move beyond its negative travel limit to compensate the YI-axis expansion set with this parameter.

[Supplement]

(2) Automatic erasure of Y-axis graphicIf the tool path created by C-axis movement under the Y-axis control intercepts with the tool contour line, the drawing becomes complicated and difficult to see. To prevent this, this parameter is used to erase the tool path and tool contour line when the Y-axis control mode is established and the C-axis position is changed.effect: Tool contour line is automatically erased.cancel: Tool contour line is not automatically erased.

(3) Y-axis graphic comp plain displayThe NC equipped with the Y-axis control function allows you to select the plan view (Y-Z plane) besides the side view and the front view. This parameter is used to determine whether the plan view is displayed or not.display: Plan view is displayed.do not: No plan view is displayed.

[Supplement]

This parameter becomes effective when the power is turned off and then turned on again. Changing this parameter carelessly may cause the X-axis travel limit switch to operate.

This parameter becomes effective when the power is turned off and then turned on again.


3-7. Appendix

3-7-1. Y-axis Machining Examples (for A-turret Side Only)

Program example of Y-axis control is shown below.

Transverse Keyway Cutting

Transverse Keyway Cutting (1)

Program Example 1-1

LE32163R0300500580001

N100 G13 A-turret selection

N101 G00 X800 Z800 Positioning of A-turret at indexing position

N102 M110 C-axis connection

N103 G94 X100 Z100 T0303 SB=1800 Positioning at point a, turret indexing

N104 G138 Y-axis control mode ON

N105 G00 Y50 C50 Positioning at point b, C-axis angle command

N106 X30 M13 Positioning at point c, M-tool start

N107 G01 Y-50 F100 Y-axis cutting feed

N108 G00 X50 Positioning at point e

N109 Y0 M12 Positioning at point a

N110 G136 Cancel of Y-axis control mode

N111 G00 X800 Z800

N112 M109 Cancel of C-axis connection

N113 M02

LE32163R0300500580002


Transverse Keyway Cutting (2)

Program Example 1-2

LE32163R0300500590001







N107 X30 Positioning at point c

N108 G01 Y-50 M13 Y-axis cutting feed, M-tool start

N109 G00 X50 Positioning at point e

N110 C260 C-axis angle command

N111 X30 Z25 Positioning at point d

N112 G01 Y50 Y-axis cutting feed

N113 G00 X50 M12 Positioning at point b

N114 Y0 Positioning at point a


N116 G00 X800 Z800


N118 M02

LE32163R0300500590002


Longitudinal Keyway Cutting

Program Example 2

LE32163R0300500600001






N105 G00 Y-10 C110 Positioning at point b, C-axis angle command

N106 X30 Positioning at point c

N107 G01 Z40 M13 F100 Y-axis cutting feed, M-tool start

N108 G00 X50 Positioning at point b

N109 Y0 Z110 M12 Positioning at point a, M-tool stop


N111 G00 X800 Z800


N113 M02

LE32163R0300500600002


Drilling at Off-center Positions

Program Example 3

LE32163R0300500610001







N106 G01 X-30 F100 M13 Positioning at point c, M-tool start

N107 G00 X50 Positioning at point b

N108 Y-50 Positioning at point d

N109 G01 X-30 Cutting feed up to point e

N110 G00 X50 Positioning at point d

N111 Y0 M12 Positioning at point a, M-tool stop


N113 G00 X800 Z800


N115 M02

LE32163R0300500610002

5947-E P-189SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

4-1. Overview

4-1-1. Introduction

This Section describes sub-spindle operation and function for MACTURN and MULTUS series.Please use the information in this Section as auxiliary information to the OSP Operation Manual and Programming Manual.

Features of OSP’s Sub Spindle Functions

(1) The workpiece machined in the main spindle can be directly transferred to the sub spindle.

(2) The workpiece can be transferred to the sub spindle at the most appropriate pressured.

(3) The sub spindle operation can be programmed in the same image as programming the operations at the main spindle.

(4) For bar materials, cut-off operation is possible.

4-1-2. Machine Configuration

MACTURN and MULTUS series can rotate its turret (as B-axis) around the Y-axis.When machining a workpiece by the sub-spindle, the tool is oriented toward the sub-spindle by rotating the turret 180° around the Y-axis.

H1 Turret

Spindle No. 2 reference cutting position

Spindle No. 1 reference cutting position

Perpendicular cutting position

X-axisX-axis

LE32163R0300600020001


4-1-3. Coordinate Systems

The sub spindle model with H1 turret uses two program coordinate systems for spindle No. 1 (main spindle), for spindle No. 2 (sub spindle).The turret is commonly used for machining with headstock No. 1 and No. 2. In this case, the spindle commands are effective for the spindle determined by the selected coordinate system.The coordinate system can be selected either by using the mode switch on the option panel in MANUAL mode or issuing the G code in AUTO or MDI mode. On how to make the selection, refer to [SECTION 4, 4-4. MDI/AUTO].

With the sub-spindle specification of the two-saddle machines, selection of only the 1st spindle side coordinate system is allowed for B turret.


4-2. Operation Panel

4-2-1. Basic Configuration of Operation Panels

Panels related to the machine operation are classified as indicated below:

(1) NC operation panelThe NC operation panel is used to operate the NC except for manual operation.This panel can be used to make operations, such as file operation and data setting.

(2) Machine panelThe machine panel has the switches mainly used for manual operation.

(3) Option panelThe option panel is provided with the switches and lamps required for optionally selected functions. The arrangement of the switches or lamps on the panel varies depending on the selected optional functions.

(4) Foot Pedal (Foot Switch)A foot pedal is provided to control the operation of such as chuck open/close and tailstock spindle advance/retract.

Panel of the machine with 2 spindles

LE32163R0300600040001


4-2-2. Option Panel for Sub-spindle Machines

The following panel is provided for the sub-spindle machine of MACTURN and MULTUS series.

LE32163R0300600050001

LE32163R0300600050002

LE32163R0300600050003


4-2-3. Brief Explanation of the Panels

(1) Spindle Selection keyThis button is use to switch the spindle mode in the manual operation mode. With this key, selection of coordinate system can be changed.

(2) SUB SPINDLE OVERRIDEThe sub spindle speed can be set by selecting the percentage of the spindle speed specified by the program. Sub-spindle override (%) is changed by turning the rotary switch.If the spindle speed reaches the allowable speed or the spindle limit set by G50 when it is overridden, the actual spindle speed is fixed at the allowable speed.

(3) W-AXIS OPERATION keys (← and →)These keys are W-axis (Second headstock) JOG feed keys.The W-axis moves only while these keys are pressed.These keys are invalid when the second spindle mode is selected.

(4) Pulse HandleW-axis movement is enabled when the X/Z/Y/W switch is positioned to W. Feed multiple is common with the X/Z/Y/C axis switch.

(5) Spindle Selection lampDisplays the selected spindle mode.The 1st spindle is selected when the left lamp is lit. The 2nd spindle is selected when the right lamp is lit.

LE32163R0300600060001

LE32163R0300600060002

LE32163R0300600060003

LE32163R0300600060004


4-3. Manual Operation

This section deals with the operations specific to the sub spindle.For standard manual operation procedure, refer to the OSP Operation Manual.

4-3-1. Operations Related to the 1st Spindle (Main Spindle)

The explanation below shows the operation procedure for the 1st spindle (main spindle). Note that explanation is given assuming that the main spindle mode is selected. Therefore, press the SUB SPINDLE SELECTION key and ensure that the LED lights (main spindle mode).

Preparing for Main Spindle Rotation

(1) Setting the Allowable Main Spindle Chuck SpeedSet the allowable speed of the sub spindle chuck for the following parameter. MC USER PARAMETER (1 SPINDLE) Allowable chuck rotation speed

(2) Inputting the Speed Limit of the Main SpindleInput the speed limit of the sub spindle in the MDI mode. =IN G50 S____ [WRITE] [CYCLE START]

[Supplement]

(3) Inputting the Main Spindle SpeedIn the MDI mode, input the spindle speed at which the sub spindle should be operated. =IN S____ [WRITE] [CYCLE START]

(4) Inputting the Gear Range for the Main Spindle (For the machine equipped with a transmission)For the machine equipped with a transmission, input the gear range that meets the input sub spindle speed. Select the MDI mode also for this operation.

Starting the Main Spindle CW/CCW

Procedure :

1 Confirm that the main spindle mode is selected by pressing the [MAIN SPINDLE] button.

2 Press the [SPINDLE - CW] or [SPINDLE - CCW] button at the machine operation panel.

[Supplement]

Make sure that the main spindle mode is selected.

1) The setting of the SPINDLE OVERRIDE dial is valid for the specified spindle speed.

2) The [SPINDLE - CW] or [SPINDLE - CCW] button may be released after pressing it once. The spindle keeps rotating even if the button is released.

3) To start the spindle, the chuck must be in the closed state.

4) An alarm occurs if the actual spindle speed exceeds 120% of the allowable speed of the chuck.

5) The door must be closed.


Stopping the Main Spindle

Procedure :


2 Press the [SPINDLE - STOP] button on the machine operation panel.

Jogging the Main Spindle

Procedure :


2 Press the [SPINDLE - JOG] button on the machine operation panel.

[Supplement]

1) The spindle speed for jog is set by the parameter. (Machine User Parameter)

2) The spindle jogs only while the [SPINDLE - JOG] button is held pressed.

3) Spindle Override does not work for Spindle Jog.


4-3-2. Operations Related to the 2nd Spindle (Sub Spindle)

The explanation below shows the operation procedure for the 2nd spindle (sub spindle). Note that explanation is given assuming that the main spindle mode is selected. Therefore, press the SUB SPINDLE SELECTION key and ensure that the LED lights (sub spindle mode).

Preparing for Sub Spindle Rotation

(1) Setting the Allowable Sub Spindle Chuck SpeedSet the allowable speed of the sub spindle chuck for the following parameter.MC USER PARAMETER (2 SPINDLE) Allowable chuck rotation speed

(2) Inputting the Speed Limit of the Sub SpindleInput the speed limit of the sub spindle in the MDI mode.=IN G50 S____ [WRITE] [CYCLE START]

[Supplement]

(3) Inputting the Sub Spindle SpeedIn the MDI mode, input the spindle speed at which the sub spindle should be operated.=IN S____ [WRITE] [CYCLE START]

(4) Inputting the Gear Range for the Sub Spindle (For the machine equipped with a transmission)For the machine equipped with a transmission, input the gear range that meets the input sub spindle speed. Select the MDI mode also for this operation.

Starting the Sub Spindle CW/CCW

Procedure :


2 Confirm that the sub spindle mode is selected by pressing the [SUB-SPINDLE] button.

3 Press the [SPINDLE - CW] or [SPINDLE - CCW] button at the machine operation panel.

[Supplement]

Make sure that the spindle mode is the sub spindle mode.

1) The setting of the SPINDLE OVERRIDE dial is valid for the specified spindle speed.For the sub spindle, use the OVERRIDE dial on the option panel.

2) The [SPINDLE - CW] or [SPINDLE - CCW] button may be released after pressing it once. The spindle keeps rotating even if the button is released.

3) To start the spindle, the chuck must be in the closed state.

4) An alarm occurs if the actual spindle speed exceeds 120% of the allowable speed of the chuck.

5) The door must be closed.


Stopping the Sub Spindle

Procedure :


2 Press the [SPINDLE - STOP] button on the machine operation panel.

Jogging the Sub Spindle

Procedure :


2 Press the [SPINDLE - JOG] button on the machine operation panel.

[Supplement]

1) The spindle speed for jog is set by the parameter. (Machine User Parameter)

2) The spindle jogs only while the [SPINDLE - JOG] button is held pressed.

3) The setting of the SPINDLE OVERRIDE dial is not valid for spindle jog operation.


4-3-3. Axis Feed Operation (X-, Z-, C-, and W-axis)

An axis (X-, Z-, C-, or W-axis) can be moved in either of the following methods.

(1) Using SLIDE JOG buttons.

(2) Using the pulse handle

Jog Feed Operation (for X- and Z-axis)

Procedure :

1 Press the [SLIDE JOG] button corresponding to the required axis feed direction.Note that the arrow symbol in a button indicates the direction of saddle movement and it is not related to the positive and negative directions in the program coordinate system.

[Supplement]

Jog Feed Operation (for C-axis)

Procedure :


2 Select the spindle mode to be operated.

3 Select the C-axis Connect key on the machine panel.

4 For the C-axis, jog feed keys do not show an arrow symbol but they show the positive and negative directions in the C-axis programming coordinate system.

Jog Feed (for W-axis)

Procedure :

1 Select the main spindle mode.

2 Press the [W-AXIS CONTROL ←] or [W-AXIS CONTROL →] button at the option panel.

[Supplement]

The saddle movable range is set by the parameter-set variable limits. For the sub spindle model, the variable limits can be set for the main spindle mode and the sub spindle mode independently.

1) The W-axis moves only while a jog button is held pressed.

2) Feedrate override setting made at the machine operation panel is valid for W-axis feed operation.


Pulse Handle Feed (for X-, Z-axis)

Procedure :

1 Select the axis to move by pressing the [PULSE HANDLE - X] or [PULSE HANDLE - Z] key.

2 Select the distance to move an axis per pulse by selecting the [PULSE HANDLE - 1/1], [PULSE HANDLE - 10/1] or [PULSE HANDLE - 50/1].

3 Rotate the pulse handle. The axis moves in the positive direction in the program coordinate system if the pulse handle is turned clockwise. It moves in the negative direction if the pulse handle is turned counterclockwise.

[Supplement]

Pulse Handle Feed (for C-axis)

Procedure :


2 Select the spindle mode to be operated.

3 Select the C-axis Connect key on the machine panel.

4 Select the C-axis to be moved.

5 Select the distance to move an axis per pulse by selecting the [PULSE - 1/1], [PULSE - 10/1], or [PULSE - 50/1] key on the machine operation panel.


The saddle movable range is set by the parameter-set variable limits. For the sub spindle model, the variable limits can be set for the main spindle mode and the sub spindle mode independently.


Pulse Handle Feed (for W-axis)

Procedure :

1 Select the main spindle mode.

2 Select the W-axis to be moved.

3 Select the distance to move an axis per pulse by selecting the [PULSE - 1/1], [PULSE - 10/1], or [PULSE - 50/1] key on the machine operation panel.


[Supplement]

1) For pulse handle operation, selection of multiple axes for simultaneous operation is not allowed.

2) For axis feed amount per pulse, refer to the table below.

Linear feeding axis Rotary feeding axis

Metric unit system inch unit system Angle [°] unit system

1/1 1 mm/pulse 0.0025 mm/pulse 0.001°/pulse




4-3-4. M-tool Spindle Operation

Preparation before M-tool spindle Rotation

The following preparations are required before rotating the M-tool spindle.

(1) Connecting the C-axisSelect the C-axis Connect key in Manual operation.

[Supplement]

(2) Setting the spindle speed for the M-tool spindleThe actual M-tool spindle speed can be set with the MDI operation.SB=_[WRITE] [START]

(3) Setting the variable speed (only if variable speed is provided)The speed of the M-tool spindle can be changed by using the machine.The speed change command compliant with the spindle speed is issued with MDI operation.M24_[WRITE] [START]

M-tool Spindle Regular/Reverse Rotation/Stop

The procedure to operate the M-tool spindle regular rotation and reverse rotation is as follows.

Procedure :

1 Check C-axis connection on the C-axis Connect LED on the machine operation panel.The lamp on the upper left turns ON.

2 Press the M-axis CW key or M-axis CCW key on the machine operation panel.The M-tool spindle rotates accordingly.

3 Press the M-axis Stop key on the machine operation panel.

[Supplement]

The spindle mode cannot be changed after connecting the C-axis.

1) The M-tool spindle keeps rotating even if the key is not pressed continuously.

2) This operation must be executed while the door is closed.

3) This operation must be executed while the spindle chuck is closed.

4) An error occurs when an L-tool is used.


M-tool Spindle Jog

The procedure to execute the M-tool spindle jog is as follows.

Procedure :

1 Press the M-axis Jog key on the machine operation panel.Jog for the M-tool spindle is executed.

[Supplement]

1) The spindle speed for jog is set by the parameter.

2) The jog operation is executed while the key is pressed.

3) The override for the M-tool spindle jog is not enabled.

4) The jog operation is available even if the C-axis is not connected.


4-3-5. Other Manual Operations

Air Blow

(1) Main Spindle Air BlowPress the [AIR BLOW] switch on the machine operation panel.

(2) Sub Spindle Air BlowPress the [AIR BLOW] switch on the option panel.

[Supplement]

Chuck Open/Close Operation

(1) Main Spindle ChuckTo open/close the main spindle chuck, use the main spindle chuck open/close footpedal.

(2) Sub Spindle ChuckTo open/close the sub spindle chuck, use the sub spindle chuck open/close footpedal.

1) It is possible to jog the spindle while air blow is supplied according to the setting of a parameter (machine user parameter).

2) It is possible to change the air blow output pattern according to the setting of a parameter (machine user parameter). For details, refer to [SECTION 4, 4-8-5. Machine User Parameters (Airblow/Coolant)].


4-4. MDI/Automatic Operation

For the sub-spindle specification, it is necessary to determine the coordinate system before beginning automatic/MDI operation.Determine the coordinate system by selecting the spindle used for machining.

4-4-1. Coordinate System Selection

A G code is used to select a coordinate system.With the sub-spindle specification, two coordinate systems are used - one for the spindle 1 side and the other for the spindle 2 side.

With the two-saddle machines, only the 1st spindle coordinate system can be selected for the B turret.For the B turret, it is not necessary to specify a coordinate system selection command.

[Supplement]

At the beginning of a program, either of the spindle selection G codes must be specified.

LE32163R0300600310001


4-4-2. MDI

Procedure :

1 Select the MDI mode by pressing the [MDI] key on the NC operation panel.

2 Prompt “=IN” appears in the MDI data input line, indicating that the NC is ready for data input. Input the coordinate system selection G code. = IN G140 = IN G141

3 Press the [WRITE] key.

4 Press the [CYCLE START] button.

4-4-3. AUTO

Since the automatic operation procedure is basically the same as operating the standard machine automatically, refer to the OSP Operation Manual. In this section, only the operation procedure specific to the sub spindle model is described.

(1) Sequence RestartBasic operation for sequence restart of the sub spindle model is the same as the sequence restart for the standard machines.When executing sequence restart, however, the following points must be carefully attended to.Before starting the sequence restart operation, match the actual machine status to the status of the active commands in the program block where sequence restart is executed.The status that must be the same as the active programmed status is: Spindle mode selection C-axis joint status Turret indexingWhen executing the sequence restart, the axes should be positioned near the position specified by the program.

(2) Starting a Program from Desired SequenceStarting a program from the desired sequence can be performed in the same manner as with the standard machines. However, this operation requires your special attention.When a program is restarted from the desire sequence, the commands are executed in the coordinate system of the presently selected spindle mode disregarding the spindle mode of the restarting block. Therefore, if the spindle mode in which the program is restarted differs from the spindle mode that was valid at the program restarting block, the machine will operate unexpectedly.When starting a program from a desired sequence, make sure to select the spindle mode that matches the spindle mode to be used for the restarting block.


4-5. Additional Functions

4-5-1. Workpiece Transfer Function from the Main Spindle to the Sub Spindle

In the sub spindle model, it is possible to directly transfer a workpiece from the main spindle to the sub spindle.When transferring a workpiece to the sub spindle, the torque limit and the torque skip functions are used since the workpiece must be pushed against the sub spindle chuck at an appropriate torque.For details regarding torque limit and torque skip functions, refer to the OSP Programming Manual. This subsection provides a simple program example for transferring workpiece.

:

:

G29 PW = 30 .... Limits the maximum torque of the W–axis motor (30%).

G94 G22 W50 D5 L10 F1000 PW = 25 .... Pushes the sub–spindle chuck to the workpiece in the torque skip state.

G29 PW = 5 .... Lowers the W–axis motor torque (5%).

M248 .... Closes the sub–spindle chuck.

M84 .... Opens the sub–spindle chuck.

G28 .... Cancels the W–axis torque limit function.

G90 G00 W300 .... Returns the second headstock to the retract position at a rapid feed

F(feedrate)

rate.

:

:

LE32163R0300600340001


4-5-2. Z-axis Mirror Image

With the sub spindle models designed for multi-process machining, the mirror image function can be used on both the main and sub spindle sides independently for longitudinal direction axis movements.

Coordinate Systems

(1) Basic Coordinate System

(2) Mirror Image Coordinate System

Z + LMT (P) Z: Axis name

+: Positive

-: Negative

P: Program Coordinates

M: Machine coordinates

LMT: VARIABLE LIMIT

LE32163R0300600360001

LE32163R0300600360002


Parameter Settings

To select the mirror image coordinate system, set the necessary parameter data for each of the main and sub spindles independently.

(1) Mirror image coordinate on the main spindle sideDisplay the Optional Parameter (1st-2nd Spindle) screen. Set the item “1st spindle mirror image select (Z)”to “Select”.

(2) Mirror image coordinate on the sub spindle sideDisplay the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (1ST-2ND SPINDLE) screen. Set the item “2nd spindle mirror image select (Z)” to “Select”.

[Supplement]

(3) Variable Limits Set by User ParametersTo switch between the basic coordinate system and the mirror image coordinate system, the plus and minus designation of the Z-coordinate are changed only in the program coordinate system. Therefore, variable limit values in the machine coordinate system are not changed even when the mirror image coordinate system is selected.Examples:

The setting of the parameter above becomes valid when the power is turned on.Reboot power when parameters are changed.The initial status is “basic coordinate system” for both the main spindle and the sub-spindle.

Z-axis Variable Limit Main Spindle Side Sub Spindle Side

Z+ variable limit (P) 250 300

Z- variable limit (P) -30 -50

Z+ variable limit (M) 6016.000 6678.000

Z- variable limit (M) 5736.000 6328.000

LE32163R0300600370001


If the coordinate system for the main spindle is switched to the mirror image coordinate system and that for the sub spindle to the basic coordinate system with the above parameter settings, the coordinate values will change as shown below.

Coordinate System Designation

Designate the coordinate system to be selected, fundamental or mirror image, in the starting block of the program. When the coordinate system designated in the part program and the coordinate system set by the parameter do not agree, an alarm occurs. Selecting the fundamental coordinate system: G62 Z0 Selecting the mirror image coordinate system: G62 Z1When G62 is designated, the coordinate system designated in the part program and the coordinate system set by the parameter are verified for safety. An alarm does not occur, however, even when G62 is not designated.

Others

When Z-axis is moved at the rapid traverse with G00 positioning command on either main or sub spindle side, designation of a command that brings the saddle and the chuck closer to each other exceeding the variable limit will cause an alarm. This alarm is indifferent to the direction in the program coordinate system switched between fundamental coordinate and mirror image coordinate.

For the Y-axis mirror image on the sub spindle side, see C. Y-AXIS CONTROL/SLOPE MACHINING FUNCTION.

Z-axis Variable Limit Main Spindle Side Sub Spindle Side

Z+ variable limit (P) 30 50

Z- variable limit (P) -250 -300

Z+ variable limit (M) 6016.000 6678.000

Z- variable limit (M) 5736.000 6328.000

LE32163R0300600370002


4-5-3. Interlock (for Two-saddle Models Only)

Collision Preventive Function with ZB- and W-axis

Since the W-axis and the ZB-axis are mounted on the same bed, there is a possibility that they collide each other. To avoid this, the collision preventive function is provided so that the B-turret and the sub spindle base will not collide each other.

(1) FunctionThe actual distance between the B-turret and the sub spindle is constantly monitored. When the distance becomes smaller than the value set at the optional parameter during axis feed, an alarm will occur or commands will be disregarded, corresponding to the operation mode selected; in the manual mode, the commands will be disregarded and in the automatic and MDI modes, an alarm will occur.Even if an alarm occurs, axis motion in the direction that increases the distance between the B-turret and sub spindle is possible.

a. Automatic or MDI modeAn alarm will occur if “actual distance < parameter-set distance” during axis feed.

b. Manual modeCommands will be disregarded if “actual distance < parameter-set distance” during axis feed. Note however the manual axis feed in the direction to increase the distance (ZB-axis feed in the negative direction and W-axis feed in the positive direction) is possible.

(2) Parameter settingFollow the procedure below to set a value at the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (1ST-2ND SPINDLE) Interference-free distance ZB-W (sub spindle).

a. In the manual mode, approximate the B-saddle and sub spindle base to a point where there is no interference between them.

b. In this condition, select the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (1ST-2ND SPINDLE) screen in the parameter setting mode.

c. Move the cursor to Interference-free distance ZB-W (SUB SPINDLE).

d. Press the [F1] (SET) key to input the distance between the B-turret and sub spindle base.If data other than the initial value has already been input, it is also possible to change the set value by using the [F2] (ADD) function.Setting unit: 1 μmSetting range: 40000 to 9999999Initial value:9999999

[Supplement]

If the software is re-installed, set this parameter again.

B turret

Z B-axis W-axis

Sub spindle base

LE32163R0300600400001


4-5-4. W-axis Cutting Function (Optional)

(1) Outline of the FunctionThe W-axis cutting function allows simultaneous cutting of a workpiece clamped in the main spindle chuck using a tool set in the sub spindle and a tool in the turret. In this case, the sub spindle base is regarded as a turret, and its motion is independently controlled as “W-axis”.

(2) ProgrammingWhen this function is selected, the coordinate system established by the main spindle and the sub spindle base is created in addition to the coordinate system by the main spindle and the turret. Therefore, G codes to switch the coordinate system become necessary.G code designating the turret coordinate system: G13G code designating the sub spindle base coordinate system: G14

The program for the G13 side can be created in the same manner as the program for normal one-saddle models. However “G13” must be designated in the starting block of the program.

[Supplement]

a. W-axis Commands

b. Synchronizing P commandA P command is used for synchronizing the execution of the commands designated in the G13 side.

c. S and M commands for the main spindleThese commands must match with those designated in the G13 side.

d. Sub spindle chuck open/close commandsM248: Sub spindle chuck closeM249: Sub spindle chuck open

Coordinate System to be Selected Commanded Code

TurretMain spindle side

G13G140

Sub-spindle G141

W-axis cutting using the sub spindle base G14

Commands for the G14 side can be designated only when the G13 side is in the G140 mode.W-axis commands cannot be designated when the G13 side is in the G141 mode.At the G14 side, only the following commands can be designated.

Rapid feed : G00

Cutting feed : G01 G94 (feed per minute)

G95 (feed per revolution)

LE32163R0300600410001


(3) Sub Spindle Rotation Commands from the G14 SideWhen a drill is mounted to the sub spindle and a workpiece clamped by the main spindle chuck is drilled using the W-axis cutting function, the sub spindle in the G14 mode can be regarded as the M-tool in multi-machining models. Therefore, the commands for the sub spindle in the G14 mode with the W-axis cutting function active should be as follows.

a. Sub spindle rotation commandsM12: Sub spindle stopM13: Sub spindle (M-tool) forward rotationM14: Sub spindle (M-tool) reverse rotation

b. Sub spindle speed commandSB=○○○

c. Sub spindle motor winding change-over commandsM241: Sub spindle motor low-speed winding (only for sub spindle VAC motor models)M242: Sub spindle high-speed winding (only for sub spindle VAC motor models)


4-6. Programming

4-6-1. Coordinate Systems

Coordinate Systems and Coordinate Values

To move a cutting tool to a target position, the coordinate system must first be established and then the target position specified by the coordinate values in the established coordinate system. There are three kinds of coordinate systems as shown below and in a program, target points are all specified by the coordinate values in the program coordinate system.

Sensor coordinate system

Machine coordinate system

Program coordinate system

In the case of a sub spindle model, the spindle to be used for machining is selected meeting the desired operation. Whichever spindle is selected, positioning is always executed by the movements of the X- and Z-axis of the turret. Actual axes that exist are 1 each for the X- and Y-axes, so there is only 1 detector coordinates, but machine coordinates and program coordinates can be set independently for each spindle.Program coordinate selection switches together with the switching of spindle mode.

Program Coordinates

A program coordinate system is used as the reference coordinate system for programming.For a sub spindle model, each of the spindle has its own program coordinate system and zero offset can be set independently. Note that the Z-axis direction of the program coordinate system established for the sub spindle is opposite to that of the machine coordinate system.

The axis direction in the program coordinate for sub spindle can be selected as required using the mirror image function. The B-axis rotating direction used for B-axis positioning command generally depends on the Y-axis direction. For MACTURN and MULTUS series, its direction is uniformly determined as described below. On the main spindle side, CCW rotation facing the turret is regarded as the B-axis positive direction. On the sub spindle side, CW rotation facing the turret is regarded as the B-axis positive direction.

Coordinate System Selection

(1) One-saddle ModelsG codes are used to select the coordinate system.Coordinate system selection should be specified independently at the start of the program.

[Supplement]

Coordinate System to be Selected G Code

Spindle 1 coordinate system G140

Spindle 2 coordinate system G141

At the beginning of a program, either of the spindle selection G codes must be specified.


(2) Two-saddle ModelsCoordinate system selection is done by G codes, just like a 1 saddle machine.Perform coordinate system selection in the block immediately following the saddle designation G code (G13/G14).For B-turret, only the main spindle can be selected.At the G14 (B-turret) side, it is not necessary to specify a spindle selection G code since the spindle mode at the G14 side is fixed at the G140 (main spindle) mode.

Cautions on Switching the Spindle Modes

It is not allowed to switch the spindle mode in the following states.

Incremental programming mode

Nose-R compensation mode

LAP (automatic programming) mode

Constant surface speed control mode

Buffering arbitrary-angle chamfering sequences


4-6-2. Program Commands

Only a difference between programming for standard models and sub spindle models is whether or not a spindle mode selection G code that calls the corresponding coordinate system is specified at the beginning of a program.Concerning the programming in the coordinate system called by the spindle mode selection G code, there are no differences from the programming for standard models.For two-saddle models, if the same spindle mode is selected for both of the turrets, programming can be made in the same manner as for standard two-saddle models. If different spindle modes are selected, programming can be made in the same manner as programming for one-saddle models.

Commands

Basic codes and commands used for programming such as G codes, M codes, S commands, and T fixed cycle commands are the same as those used for standard models.In addition to these codes and commands, the functions specific to the sub spindle models can be used.

Functions Specific to the Sub Spindle Models

The sub spindle models have the unique feature in workpiece transfer between the two spindles so that integrated multiple-processes operation can be performed in one machine. The functions indicated below are provided to implement this feature effectively.

(1) W-axis CommandsThe relative position of the sub spindle to the main spindle can be controlled using W-axis commands.For W-axis movement control, either the G00 (positioning) or the G01 (linear interpolation; cutting feed) can be used.

<G code>G00.....PositioningG01.....Linear interpolation

<Format>G00 W__G01 W__ F__

[Supplement]

In the linear interpolation (G01) mode, designation of both G94 (feed per minute) and G95 (feed per revolution) are possible.In the feed per minute mode, however, W-axis feedrate is controlled based on the main spindle speed.

For one-saddle model, the main spindle mode must always be selected. For two-saddle model, selection of the spindle mode is possible at both of the G13 and G14 sides. However, both of G13 and G14 sides must select the main spindle (G140).

For two-saddle model, it is necessary to specify which of the W-axis commands (commands at the G13 side or G14 side) is valid to avoid problems caused by W-axis commands specified at both sides by mistake. G122...W-axis commands may be specified only at the G13 side. G123...W-axis commands may be specified only at the G14 side.Designation of G122 and G123 must be synchronized in the G13 and G14 side programs.At power on, the G122 mode is valid.


(2) Main/Sub Spindle Synchronized Rotation CommandUsing the synchronized rotation command, it is possible to match the sub spindle state (speed, rotation direction, phase) with the main spindle state.In the synchronized control mode, it is not necessary to specify the spindle speed and rotation commands for the sub spindle.<M code>M150...Synchronized rotation mode cancelM151...Synchronized rotation mode ON

[Supplement]

[Supplement]

(3) Opposing Spindle Chuck Open/Close CommandThis command is used to open/close the chuck of the spindle opposite to the presently selected spindle mode.<M code>M248...Opposing spindle chuck close commandM249...Opposing spindle chuck open command

(4) Opposing Spindle Chuck Open/Close Interlock Release CommandBy releasing the opposing spindle chuck operation interlock, it is possible to open/close the chuck of the opposite spindle mode.<M code>M246...Opposing spindle chuck open/close interlock release OFFM247...Opposing spindle chuck open/close interlock release ON

(5) Opposing Spindle Air Blow CommandThis command is used to turn ON/OFF the spindle air blow for the spindle mode opposite to the presently selected spindle mode.<M code>M288...Opposing spindle air blow OFFM289...Opposing spindle air blow ON

System Variable

System variables are used in common to all coordinate systems. Therefore, if system variables which have the coordinate system dependent data are used, a program must be written ensuring that the objective coordinate system is selected when entering such system variables in a program.For data input/output operation using system variables, the data of the selected coordinate system is input/output.

The synchronized rotation command can be issued even if the spindle to be synchronized is rotating.In this case the spindle rotates in the same way before the synchronization rotation command was issued when the synchronized rotation command is canceled.

If a synchronized rotation command is specified without workpiece, the sub spindle may cause “DIFF over alarm”. This is because the NC judges that a workpiece is gripped when the sub-spindle side chuck is closed during synchronized rotation and limits the torque on the sub-spindle side.This alarm does not occur when both main and sub spindles grip the same workpiece and are physically connected.


4-7. Data Operation

4-7-1. Zero Setting

For the sub spindle models, a programming zero can be set for each of the coordinate systems which are defined by the combination of G13, G14, G140, and G141.For one-saddle machines, it is not necessary to specify G13/G14.Zero offset and zero shift of the W-axis can be set for the A-turret and B-turret side independently.

Zero offset

(1) ICoordinate System at 1st SpindleSet the program zero of the coordinate system established for the 1st spindle.Set also the zero point of the W-axis which is used for W-axis operation.Setup is performed in the same way as a standard machine, but make sure that 1st spindle setup is selected on the sheet on the Operation screen.Note that the W-axis zero offset defines the program coordinate system of the sub spindle in reference to the main spindle and, therefore, it is not influenced by the turret position at all.

(2) Coordinate System at 2nd SpindleSet the programming zero of the coordinate system established by the turret and the 2nd spindle.In the 2nd spindle mode, set the Z-axis direction offset value of the tool nose position in reference to the sub spindle for the Z-axis zero offset data. Since the sub spindle can move in the Z-axis direction, if the sub spindle is moved after the Z-axis zero offset is set, the Z-axis zero offset value is automatically corrected by the moved distance.The data necessary for automatic offset data correction is automatically set for the W-axis machine coordinate system zero offset when the Z-axis zero offset is set.

(3) Two-saddle ModelsFor the two-saddle models, set the program zero of the coordinate system established by the B-turret and the 1st spindle in addition to the program setting explained in items (1), (2) and (3).

LE32163R0300600500001


The W-axis zero point should also be set here for executing a W-axis command from the G14 side.The W-axis zero point offset defines the program coordinates of the sub-spindle relative to the main spindle, just like on the A turret side. Therefore, it has no impact on the B turret position.

Setting the Offset Data

Procedure :

1 Select the manual mode.

2 Select the coordinate system for which the zero point is set.Turret selection key [A/B for 2-saddle model)1st Spindle Selection key, 2nd Spindle Selection key (optional panel)

3 Move the axes to the desired position using the SLIDE JOG buttons or the pulse handle.


5 Select the axis for which zero point offset is set using the Sheet key and the Cursor key.

6 Set the data using the function keys [F1] (SET), [F2] (ADD), or [F3] (CALC).

7 Set the zero offset data in the other coordinate systems by repeating the above procedure.


Setting the Zero Offset Data/Zero Shift Data for X-/Z-axis in the Sub Spindle Mode

Procedure :

1 Select the Operation screen.

2 Select 2nd Spindle Setup using the Sheet key.

3 Select the sub-spindle using the Sub-Spindle Selection key on the machine operation panel.

4 For the X-axis zero point offset, set the distance from the machine zero point to the program zero point. For the Z-axis zero point offset, distance (4) from the machine zero point to the program zero point is set.As shown in the figure, the X-axis machine zero point and the X-axis program zero point are identical, so the setting value is 0.For X-axis machine zero point offset, distance (1) from the detector zero point to the machine zero point is set. Also, for Z-axis machine zero point offset, distance (2) from the detector zero point to the machine zero point is set, but the set value changes depending on the W-axis current value (3).

Fig.4-1 When the program zero point is set to the left edge of the workpiece

As shown in Fig. 4-1, to set the program zero point to the left edge of the workpiece, first press the [F3] key (CAL), then perform [Write/Execute].

X+

W+

Z+

Turret

Sub-spindle

Program zero

W-axis machine zero

Turret machine zero

Fig.7-1 When Program Zero is Set at Left End Face of Workpiece

(1)

(2)

(3)

LE32163R0300600530001


Also, as shown in Fig. 4-2, to set the program zero point to the right edge of the workpiece, the workpiece length (5) must be taken into consideration, so press the [F3] key (CAL), enter the value for (5), then perform [Write/Execute].

Fig.4-2 When the program zero point is set to the right edge of the workpiece

For this, the value (4) is set for the Z-axis zero point offset.

X+

W+

Z+

Turret

Sub-spindleProgram zero

W-axis machine zero

Turret machine zero

Fig.7-2 Setting Program Zero at Right End Face of Workpiece

(1)

(2) (4)

(3)

LE32163R0300600530002


4-8. Description of Parameters

Since the basic data setting method in the parameter setting mode is the same as used for setting the data of standard machines, refer to the PART IV. “PARAMETERS” in OSP Operation Manual for the procedure for setting the parameters.When the coordinate values are set using the calculation function, however, the data valid in the selected operation mode is used.Therefore, if data is calculated based on the coordinate values of the Z- and W-axis in the machine coordinate system in the state the spindle selected in the active operation mode and the spindle mode selected in the data setting mode differ, the data will not be calculated correctly. To set the data using the calculation function, be sure to select the manual operation mode and select the coordinate system where data will be set before proceeding with the data setting steps using the CAL key.An error occurs if the spindle selected in the data setting mode and the spindle mode selected in the operation mode differ from each other. Concerning the setting and addition operation, it is not necessary to pay attention to the operation mode.

4-8-1. System Parameters

The system parameters that are added for this specification are indicated below.For the parameters not explained below, refer to OSP Operation Manual.

+STROKE END LIMIT (W)

-STROKE END LIMIT (W)

BACKLASH (W)

PR ZERO OFFSET (W)

MC ZERO OFFSET (W)

TORQUE VALUE (W)

LE32163R0300600550001


4-8-2. User Parameters

User parameters can be set for each of the three coordinate systems. The desired coordinate system should be selected using the turret selection key ([A], [B]) and the spindle selection key (SUB SPINDLE MODE).The initial settings and setting ranges for each of the entries on this screen are as follows.

VARIABLE LIMITThe variable soft-limits determine the stroke range of the X (Z) axis in accordance with the workpiece.They can be used to set the turret indexing position, prevent inappropriate positioning due to programming errors, and protect the chuck and tailstock.Variable soft-limits are set for both the positive and negative axis directions. They cannot be set outside the stroke end limits.

[Supplement]

DroopThe servo follow-up function of the feed axes has a fundamental lag (DIFF) with respect to function generation.Due to this lag, particularly during high-speed cutting, droop is generated at corners. This droop can be reduced by program commands and parameter settings.

Initial Value Setting Range Setting range: Setting Units

Depends on the machine specifications

-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system

1) When using a machine with the two-saddle specification, select the parameter screens for each saddle control axis with the turret selection keys. When using a machine with the multiple machining specification, some setting fields relating to the C-axis are displayed but since the C-axis is a rotary axis it requires no variable soft-limit settings.

2) Variable soft-limit settings can be made either in reference to the program zero (P) or the machine zero (M).

Initial Value Setting Range Setting range: Setting Units

Linear axis 10 (μm)C-axis 0.07 (deg)

0 to 1.000 Selected unit system


4-8-3. Chuck Parameters

Settings for the chuck on the 1st spindle is set in 1st Spindle Setup chuck parameter.Setup for the 2nd spindle chuck is done in the 2nd Spindle Setup screen below.

The settings made on the parameter screen are explained below.

CHUCK HOLD CHANGESelect OD or ID chucking.

CHUCK BARRIERThe chuck barrier function allows an area into which the tool cannot enter to be set in accordance with the shape of the chuck.Chuck on/off with the chuck barrier is performed with program commands using M codes.Therefore, it can be checked only when necessary while cutting.

Initial Value Setting Range OD-GRIP

Code Description

L1 Chuck jaw length

D1 Chuck jaw size

L2 Chuck jaw gripping length

D2 Chuck jaw gripping face width

CX Chuck gripping diameter

LE32163R0300600570001


[Supplement]

[Supplement]

1) The chuck barrier is set in the program coordinate system. Therefore, the shifting of the Z-axis program zero when the workpiece changes causes the barrier area to shift accordingly.

2) If the chuck barrier is set outside the variable soft-limit area, the variable soft-limit defines the chuck barrier at that location.

3) When the NC control software is installed, the initial settings are set for all the chuck barrier data.

4) The only barrier data for which [F3] [CAL] in the function menu can be used are jaw positions CX and CZ. For all other data, use [F1] (SET) or [F2] (ADD).

Even when a two-saddle specification machine is being used, only one set of CX/CZ jaw position data can be set. This makes it impossible to perform a chuck barrier check if the program zeros at saddle A and saddle B are at different physical positions.


4-8-4. Machine System Parameter (Airblow/Coolant)

For one set of M codes which control air blow and coolant outputs, the OSP provides two outputs. These outputs can be changed over according to the coordinate system in which control commands are specified.The settings made on the parameter screen are explained below.

Airblow A (M89/M88) output selectionSelect the type of output for airblow A (M89/M88).0: 1st airblow A output fixed1: 2nd airblow A output fixed2: Same as turret selection (G13/G14) G13 side: 1st Airblow A output G14 side: 2nd Airblow A output3: Same as spindle selection (G140/G141) G140 side: 1st Airblow A output G141 side: 2nd Airblow A output

Airblow B (M51/M50) output selectionSelect the type of output for airblow B (M51/M50).0: 1st airblow B output fixed1: 2nd airblow B output fixed2: Same as turret selection (G13/G14) G13 side: 1st Airblow B output G14 side: 2nd Airblow B output3: Same as spindle selection (G140/G141) G140 side: 1st Airblow B output G141 side: 2nd Airblow B output

Airblow C (M155/M154) output selectionSelect the type of output for airblow C (M155/M154).0: 1st airblow C output fixed1: 2nd airblow C output fixed2: Same as turret selection (G13/G14) G13 side: 1st Airblow C output G14 side: 2nd Airblow C output3: Same as spindle selection (G140/G141) G140 side: 1st Airblow C output G141 side: 2nd Airblow C output

Airblow D (M127/M126) output selectionSelect the type of output for airblow D (M127/M126).0: 1st airblow D output fixed1: 2nd airblow D output fixed2: Same as turret selection (G13/G14) G13 side: 1st Airblow D output G14 side: 2nd Airblow D output3: Same as spindle selection (G140/G141) G140 side: 1st Airblow D output G141 side: 2nd Airblow D output

Initial Value Setting Range Setting range:

0 0 to 3


0 0 to 3


0 0 to 3


0 0 to 3


Airblow E (M219/M218) output selectionSelect the type of output for airblow E (M218/M219).0: 1st airblow E output fixed1: 2nd airblow E output fixed2: Same as turret selection (G13/G14) G13 side: 1st Airblow E output G14 side: 2nd Airblow E output3: Same as spindle selection (G140/G141) G140 side: 1st Airblow E output G141 side: 2nd Airblow E output

Coolant 1 (M09/M08) output selectionSelect the type of output for coolant 1 (M09/M08).0: 1st coolant 1 output fixed1: 2nd coolant 1 output fixed2: Same as turret selection (G13/G14) G13 side: 1st Coolant 1 output G14 side: 2nd Coolant 1 output3: Same as spindle selection (G140/G141) G140 side: 1st Coolant 1 output G141 side: 2nd Coolant 1 output



Coolant 4 (M440/M439) output selectionSelects as the output condition of Coolant 4 (M440/M439).0: 1st coolant 4 output fixed1: 2nd coolant 4 output fixed2: Same as turret selection (G13/G14) G13 side: 1st Coolant 4 output G14 side: 2nd Coolant 4 output3: Same as turret selection (G140/G141) G140 side: 1st Coolant 4 output G141 side: 2nd Coolant 4 output


0 0 to 3


0 0 to 3


0 0 to 3


0 0 to 3


High-pressure coolant output selection (Coolant 1 to 4)Determines whether the high-pressure coolant is used or not for each of the coolants 1 to 4.

Through-spindle coolant clogged filter detection ineffectiveDisables detection of clogged filter in the through-spindle coolant system.

Turret index delay for high press. coolantSet the waiting time after high-pressure coolant is stopped until the turret indexing is started.

Initial Value Setting Range No check mark


Initial Value Setting Range

Input range Setting Unit

200 1 to 990 0.01 s


4-8-5. Machine User Parameter (Airblow/Coolant)

By the setting of a parameter, it is possible to jog the spindle while the air blow command is executed. If the parameter setting is so made that air blow 1 is always output disregarding the active coordinate system, the main spindle jogs. If air blow 2 is always output due to the setting of the parameter, the sub spindle jogs.The settings made on the parameter screen are explained below.

Spindle inching with 1st/2nd airblow ASet the check mark to jog the spindle when an M89 command is given.

Spindle inching with 1st/2nd airblow BSet the check mark to jog the spindle when an M51 command is given.

Spindle inching with 1st/2nd airblow CSet the check mark to jog the spindle when an M155 command is given.

Spindle inching with 1st/2nd airblow DSet the check mark to jog the spindle when an M127 command is given.

Spindle inching with 1st/2nd airblow ESet the spindle to jog the spindle when an M219 command is given.







4-8-6. Machine User Parameter (Chuck)


1st spindle/2nd spindle chuck clamp answer timerSet the time lapse after the chuck clamp confirmation input signal comes ON before the clamping operation is considered completed when a chuck clamp command is given.

1st spindle/2nd spindle chuck unclamp answer timerSet the time lapse after the chuck unclamp confirmation input signal comes ON before the unclamping operation is considered completed when a chuck unclamp command is given.

1st spindle/2nd spindle chucking miss detect start timerOn machines featuring the chucking error detection specification, set the time lapse after the chucking error detection air output coming ON that the chucking error pressure input is confirmed.

1st spindle/2nd spindle air chuck clamp answer timerSet the time lapse after the chuck clamp confirmation input signal comes ON before the clamp operation is considered completed when an air chuck clamp command is given.

1st spindle/2nd spindle air chuck unclamp answer timerSet the time lapse after the chuck unclamp confirmation input signal comes ON before the unclamp operation is considered completed when an air chuck unclamp command is given.

Opposite M command effective in chuck movingSet the check mark to specify the following: if, before completion of the operation specified by an M83 or M84 command given together with an M64 command, an M code command specifying an opposite operation is given, this opposite operation will be performed without waiting for completion of the current operation.

Chuck interlock effectiveSet effective/ineffective of alarm check for “1st spindle chuck interlock/” signal when the chuck clamp/unclamp command is executed (when chuck is operating). Alarm check is effective when check mark is entered.


0 0 to 1000


0 0 to 1000


0 0 to 60000


0 0 to 1000


0 0 to 1000




4-8-7. Machine User Parameter (Spindle)

For the spindle related parameters, separate screens are provided for the main and the sub spindle. Therefore, when setting parameters, make sure that the displayed screen is for the desired spindle.The settings made on the parameter screen are explained below.

(1) Page 1/2 (1ST SPINDLE), Page 2/2 (2ND SPINDLE)

Allowable chuck rotation speedSet the maximum chuck rotation speed for the chuck used.

Inching speedSet the spindle speed when a spindle jog command is given.

No Spindle stop with M00/M01/M02/M30Set the check mark to prevent the spindle being stopped by M00/M01/M02/M30 commands.

Orientation direction CWSet the check mark to make the direction of rotation of the spindle when it is oriented from the stopped state “clockwise.”

Orientation direction CCWSet the check mark to make the direction of rotation spindle when it is oriented from the stopped state “counterclockwise.”

Orientation answer timerSet the time lapse after reaching the target angle range before a spindle orientation operation is considered to be completed.

Orientation electric type select (pin/brake)Set the check mark when not using the pin input/output signals or brake input/output signals with the pin type or brake type orientation function.

No orientation cancel with M02/M30 (electric)Set the check mark to maintain the spindle oriented state after execution of M02/M30 when using the electrically controlled orientation function.

No orientation cancel with operation mode change (electric)


0 0 to Maximum chuck rotation speed


40 1500





20 0 to 9999




Set the check mark to maintain the spindle oriented state after the operation mode is changed (between automatic/MDI and manual) when using the electrically controlled orientation function.

No orientation cancel with NC reset (electric)Set the check mark to maintain the spindle oriented state after NC reset is made when using the electrically controlled orientation function.

4-8-8. Machine System Parameter (Spindle)


1st spindle/2nd spindle oscillation speedSet the oscillation speed when the spindle gear speed range is changed. (Spindle override is ineffective.)

1st spindle/2nd spindle torque limit valueSet the limit value for motor torque when the spindle is accelerating or decelerating. By reducing this value it is possible to restrict the current flow to the spindle motor during acceleration and deceleration.

1st spindle/2nd spindle S command cancel by M02/M30When an M02/M30 command is executed, the S command value effective up to that point is cancelled.




40 1 to 500


100 40 to 100



4-8-9. Machine System Parameter (Door Interlock)


Allowable 1st spindle/2nd spindle maximum speedEven when the door interlock is ON, spindle speeds generated by spindle jog, oscillation, or orientation commands do not cause an alarm if they are within the setting for this parameter.

Feed axis maximum speedSet the maximum feedrate when the door is open, which will apply even under conditions other than the following: [DOOR INTERLOCK] switch OFF and automatic operation mode and single block mode not selected.

Allowable Milling spindle maximum speed A-side/B-sideSet the maximum spindle speed generated by M-tool spindle jog, oscillation, or orientation commands that will not cause an alarm even when the door interlock is ON.

Door lock release timerFor a machine equipped with the mechanical lock type manual door opening/closing mechanism, set the time lapse after pressing the mechanical lock switch lock release button before the lock of the mechanical lock switch is released.


50 0 to 50


2000000 0 to 2000000


50 0 to 50


0 0 to 9999


4-8-10.Machine System Parameter (Milling Spindle)


(1) Page 1/2 (A-SIDE) and page 2/2 (B-SIDE)

Oscillation speedSet the M-axis oscillation speed when the M-axis gear speed range is changed.

Torque limit valueSet the limit value for motor torque when the M-axis is accelerating or decelerating. By reducing this value it is possible to restrict the current flow to the M-tool spindle motor during acceleration and deceleration.

SB command cancel by M02/M30When an M02/M30 command is executed, the SB command value effective up to that point is cancelled.

Number of oscillation (for clutch connection)If using a machine equipped with the M-axis one-point clutch mechanism, set the number of M-axis oscillations for engaging the clutch for this parameter.

Oscillation speed (for clutch connection)If using a machine equipped with the M-axis one-point clutch mechanism, set the M-axis oscillation speed when engaging the clutch.

Oscillation timer (for clutch connection)If using a machine equipped with the M-axis one-point clutch mechanism, set the M-axis oscillation time when engaging the clutch.


40 30 to 500


100 40 to 100

Initial Value Setting Range Check mark set


1 0 to 50


50 0 to 1000


1 0 to 10

5947-E P-234SECTION 5 MULTI-EDGE TOOL FUNCTION FOR 8-/12-ANGLE INDEXING

SECTION 5 MULTI-EDGE TOOL FUNCTION FOR 8-/12-ANGLE INDEXING

5-1. Overview

MACTURN250/350/550, MULTUS B750:For machining using a tool having 8 edges in one holder, it is necessary to index each edge by orient-stopping the M-tool spindle at 45° pitch and clamp the M-tool spindle.

MULTUS B200/B300/B400:For machining using a tool having 12 edges in one holder, it is necessary to index each edge by orient-stopping the M-tool spindle at 30° pitch and clamp the M-tool spindle.

Since the max number of edges of one toolholder varies, the specifiable edge number differs fromthe tool group number.

By use of the multi-edge tool function for 8-/12-angle indexing, it is possible to index each edge by orient-stopping the M-tool spindle at 45° or 30° pitch with the turret rotation command and the edge indexing command M602/M603 before clamping the M-tool spindle.

Multi-edge tool function

Max number of edges

MACTURN250/350/550, MULTUS B750

8-angle indexing 8

MULTUS B200/B300/400 12-angle indexing 12

LE32163R0300700010001


5-2. Function

5-2-1. Tool Management

Tools are managed by Tool No. and Edge No..

(1) Tool No.Unique numbers assigned to each tool is called a Tool No.. This number does not relate to the number of tool tips on a single tool.Tool numbers range from 1 to 9999.

(2) Edge No.Edge Numbers range from 1 to 4, 1 to 8, or 1 to 12. A tool is different if the Tool number is different, even if it has the same Edge number.

Diagram showing tool tip number registration

(3) Tool Designation Method for Each Function

ATC command, ATC operationIn an ATC command, a tool is called by specifying the Tool number. When registering a tool mounted on a magazine, register it by the Tool number.

Turret rotation, edge indexingWhen machining with one of the 4, 8, or 12 tool tips, the Edge number and Tool number are designated in the turret rotation command, and the designated tool tip is indexed by the tool position number before machining begins.

Graphic display of toolsA Tool Create (Edit) screen is available for each Tool number and Edge number. Enter the necessary tool data at the Tool Create screen for each corresponding Edge number.

Edge number: 1, 4, 7, 10 Edge number: 1, 5, 9

4 tools for one toolholder 3 tools for one toolholder

LE32163R0300700020001


Tool Life ManagementA Data Setting screen with data items to set is available for each Tool number and Edge number. Enter the necessary tool data for the data items and Data Setting screen with the applicable Edge number.

5-2-2. Turret Rotation

(1) TD commandIn the turret rotation command, specify the Tool number and Edge number. When the TD command is issued, Tool number indexing and Edge number indexing is performed.

TD= ■■□□●●●● M423/M323

(2) Manual Turret RotationThe manual turret rotation command, specified in the cutting position index mode, indexes the turret, but does not index the edge. The edge index status before the action is maintained.In ATC position index mode, the manual turret rotation does not index the edge. It performs M-tool spindle fixed position stop action to the ATC position.

(3) Tool Group Command Specified as the Turret Rotation Command (Tool Life Management Function)To rotate the turret by designation of a tool group command, specify the Edge number, Position number, and Tool group number.Tool group numbers range from 1 to 9999.

TDG = ■■□□○○○○ M423/M323

When a TDG command is issued, the specified tool group is indexed, then the tool is indexed to the specified position number, then the specified Edge number is indexed.

■■ : Edge number (1 to 4, 8 or 12; If omitted, Edge number = 1.)

□□ : Position number (1 to 20; If omitted Edge number = Standard position.)

●●●● : Tool No.

■■ : Edge number (1 to 4, 8 or 12; If omitted, Edge number = 1.)

□□ : Position number (1 to 20; If omitted Edge number = Standard position.)

○○○○ : Tool group number (1 to 9999)


5-2-3. Edge Index Command

There are two methods to index the edge of a multi-edge tool.

(1) MDI mode: Using the TD commandIt is possible to index the specified edge by executing the TD command in the MDI mode.

Command sample)Index the tool of tool number 1 with position number 5 and edge number 1 to enable the tool offset.

TD=01050001 M423

(2) Manual mode: Using the ATC FUCNTION windowIt is possible to index an edge by manual operation in the manual mode with the door closed.By this, indexing the turret and the tool can be executed, however, the tool offset is not enabled.

Procedure :

1 Press the tool data setting mode key.

2 Select the tool data sheet.

3 Press [F6] (MANUAL TOOL CHG).The ATC FUNCTION pop-up window appears.

4 Select the line of tool number, edge number and position number with which index is executed by touching it from the tool list.

5 Tool index operation is performed by pressing the [F2] (TOOL INDEX) key.If a position different from the one of turret position currently indexed, turret index operation is also performed at the same time as too indexing.

LE32163R0300700040001


5-2-4. Interlocks

When an L-tool or a measurement sensor is mounted on the turret, the Jog command G01/G02/G03 is not executed unless the tool tip specified in the T/TD/TDG command is indexed.

Alarm A 1730 Turret clamp position check is off

Code 4 : The command of cutting-feed was performed by the state that was not “M-tool spindle edge angle” when L-tool or sensor is registered with present-tool.


5-3. Tool Data Setting Screen

5-3-1. Tool Registration Screen

In Tool Data Setting mode, the Tool Data Setting screen has functions for Tool Registration and for Multi-edge Tool Registration.

Tool Registration screenFor each tool, select a holder and tool, then set tool shape data.

Multi-edge Tool Registration screenSelect a holder and multiple tools, then set tool shape data for each tool tip.By pressing the page key, the Edge number changes from 1 to 4, 8, or 12, and data for the next Edge number is displayed.

Fig.5-1 Multi-edge Tool Registration screen

LE32163R0300700060001


5-3-2. TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT Screen (for the Machine with Tool Life Management Function)

For machines with tool life management function, this screen is used for setting the tool group number and life conditions (machining count, cutting time, and wear) for each Edge number.

Tool Life screenDisplays the tools that are available for each Tool Group number.For multi-edge tools, tools available by Tool number and Edge number are displayed.

Fig.5-2 Tool life management Machining count

LE32163R0300700070001


Fig.5-3 Tool life management Cutting time

Fig.5-4 Tool life management Wear

LE32163R0300700070002

LE32163R0300700070003


5-4. System Variable

5-4-1. System Variable for Specifying Tool Number

For the system variables listed below, Edge and Tool numbers are specified by subscript.

a. Tool Life Management

5-4-2. System Variable for Tool Group

The following system variables specify the tool group number.

a. Tool Life Management

5-4-3. System Variable for Turret Number

The following system variable specifies the turret number.

5-4-4. System Variables with No Subscript

With the system variables, the current toolholder number and the edge number can be read.

Variable Name Contents

VTLGN Group number of the tool

VTLSN Number set for tool life count

VTLCN Machining count for tool life count

VTLST Time set for tool life

VTLCT Cutting time set for tool life

VTLSA Wear set for tool life

VTLCA Actual wear set for tool life

VTLUS Indicates that it was used in program

VTLNG Indicates that the measurement was invalid

VTLLF Indicates that the tool has come to the end of its life


VGRSL Tool number selected in the group

VGRTP Edge number selected for the group

VGRLF Tool Life flag of the group

VGRID Tool index occurrence flag of the group


VTTLN Tool number currently mounted


VETLN Tool number currently used

VETLP Currently used edge number

5947-E P-243SECTION 6 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS B200/B300/B400)

SECTION 6 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS B200/B300/B400)

The NC tailstock function is used to automatically position the tailstock by providing the feed axis for the tailstock.The machine supports the workpiece by driving the motor of the tailstock.The tailstock supports the workpiece with the built-in spring thrust after moving to the work position and braking.The tailstock is equipped with W-axis programming zero and variable limit since the tailstock is controlled as the W-axis.

- Negative variable limit

Sizing position

+ Positive variable limit

Approach Retract Retraction end

W-axis zero

1 (Rapid traverse)2 (Rapid traverse)3 (Approach feed)

4 (Rapid traverse) 5 (Rapid traverse)

Sizing position Approach Retract Retraction end

Spring

LE32163R0300800010001


6-1. Operation

The tailstock can be operated by either of the two methods.

6-1-1. Setup Operation

The operator must set the sizing position of each workpiece even in setup operation.When cutting workpieces having different lengths, set the sizing position according to the workpiece length. The sizing position is used for reference so that the tailstock can properly contact with the workpiece.In this case, the work position must be set with manual operation in the teaching mode.(In teaching mode, the Teaching Mode button lights and the buzzer sounds repeatedly.For information on setting Sizing Position, refer to [SECTION 6, 6-5-1. Setting the Sizing Position].

Operation range with the teaching mode ON: Negative variable limit to Positive limit

6-1-2. Ordinary Operation

In the ordinary operation, the workpiece is changed and re-supported.In this case, turn off the teaching mode and advance the tailstock in inching mode by the M-code command or manual operation so that the workpiece is supported with an appropriate thrust.

Operation range with the teaching mode OFF: Sizing position to Positive variable limit (retraction end)


6-2. Tailstock Movement

6-2-1. Manual Tailstock Movement

The tailstock can be moved manually by [W-] or [W+] on the machine operation panel shown below, or by operating the foot pedal.

The procedure to execute the work position command by using the foot pedal is as follows.

Procedure :

1 Move the X-axis to the positive limit to prevent interference.

2 Stop the spindle.

3 Turn off teaching mode by pressing the “Teaching Mode” button on the optional panel.(The teaching mode is turned off when the “Teaching” button lamp turns off and the beep stops sounding.)

4 Moves the tailstock to the sizing position by using the second step for foot pedal advance at the position located at the retraction side viewed from the approach position.

5 When the tailstock finishes moving to the sizing position, the “Sizing position” lamp turns ON and the beep sounds.

6-2-2. Automatic Tailstock Movement

The tailstock is moved with the M-code command.The M code command is executed when the teaching mode is turned off.

M56 …… Tailstock Sizing position Command

M55 …… Tailstock Retract Position Command

M847 …… Tailstock Retraction End Position Command

LE32163R0300800050001


6-3. Switching between High/Low Pressure

6-3-1. Switching between High/Low Pressure Command

The high/low pressure is switched with the M code command.

6-3-2. Operation

(1) Operation when executing the high/low switching command while positioning the workpiece.The workpiece is supported with the shrunken internal spring while the tailstock is in sizing position mode.

When the low pressure command is issued, the thrust is reduced by retracting the tailstock and expanding the internal spring.

When the high pressure command is issued, the thrust is increased by advancing the tailstock and shrinking the internal spring.

(2) Operation when executing the high/low pressure switching command while the machine is not in sizing position mode.The tailstock does not operate with the high/low pressure switching command. It operates with the commanded thrust when the sizing position command is issued or the second step for the foot pedal advance is pedaled.

M98 …… Low pressure command

M99 …… High pressure command

LE32163R0300800080001

LE32163R0300800080002

LE32163R0300800080003


6-4. Multiple Sizing Position Command

A maximum of 10 positions can be set when the position or thrust is changed due to the workpiece length and blank, etc.(Refer to [6-6. Parameter].The multiple IN positions can be selected on the program.

6-4-1. Multiple Sizing Position Command

The multiple sizing position command is executed with the G code command.

6-4-2. Operation

The tailstock moves to the position of the multiple sizing position number commanded when the multiple IN position command and tailstock operation command are executed.

6-4-3. Restart Sequence (Operation Starting from the Halfway of the Program)

When the multiple sizing position numbers and the tailstock positions used before and after restart sequence are not matched, restart sequence is disabled.

G195 SP=@@ @@= Multiple Sizing position No.

<Program Example>N001 G00 X1000N002 G195 SP=1N003 M56N004 M3 S1000:N100 M5N101 M55

Moves the X-axis to the + limit.Multiple Sizing position command (No.1 command)Sizing position command (moving to the No.1 sizing position)

Retract position command (moving to the No.1 retract position)

LE32163R0300800100001


6-5. Preparatory Operation

6-5-1. Setting the Sizing Position

Since the tailstock moves to the “sizing position”, an appropriate thrust cannot be obtained if the “Sizing Position” is not set correctly.The “Sizing Position” must be changed if the workpiece length changes.The procedure to set the “Sizing position” is as follows.

Procedure :


2 Stop the spindle.

3 Turn the teaching mode ON by manually pressing the Teaching Mode button on the additional panel.

4 On the Operation screen Tailstock Setup sheet, page feed until NC Tailstock Parameter is displayed. (Refer to [SECTION 6. Parameter].)

5 Set the position on which the workpiece does not contact to APPROACH.

6 Set the thrust to LOW or HIGH.

7 Moves the tailstock to the sizing position by using the second step for foot pedal advance at the position located at the retraction side viewed from the approach position.

8 Moves the cursor to the “SIZING POSITION” and press the function key (CAL) when the tailstock is moved to the sizing position and the SIZING POSITION lamp is turned on.When the [CAL] button is pressed, the position where the tailstock touches a workpiece is entered as Work Position. (The position just before the internal spring begins to slack, which is the edge position of the workpiece, is set.)

9 Set “-OK” and “+OK” for both side of the sizing position to judge the availability of the sizing position.

[Supplement]

The NC tailstock function detects the motor torque and supports the workpiece with appropriate thrust.Therefore, the “APPROACH” must be set to at least 2 mm from the “+ OK” in the retraction side (+ side) in order to prevent false detection of the acceleration torque for the motor.


6-5-2. No-load Torque Measurement

The NC tailstock generates appropriate thrust by controlling the motor torque.Since the torque is lost to other than thrust due to slide resistance, the torque must be measured in advance and the load must be monitored after subtracting the measured load from the motor torque.The procedure to measure the no-load torque is as follows.

Procedure :


2 Stop the spindle.

3 On the Operation screen Tailstock Setup sheet, page feed until NC Tailstock Parameter is displayed. (Refer to [SECTION 6. Parameter].)

4 Set the position on which the workpiece does not contact to APPROACH.

5 Select “1. Tailstock slideway resistance teaching ON” on the second page.

6 Press the TAILSTOCK W- button on the additional panel for manual operation at the retraction side viewed from the approach position to move the tailstock for 5 mm with the sizing position speed. In this case, the tailstock returns to the previous position.Once the tailstock slideway resistance is taught, the “1. Tailstock slideway resistance teaching ON” is automatically turned off.


6-6. Parameter

6-6-1. NC Tailstock User Parameter

Display the following Tailstock Setup sheet on the Operation screen.

(1) Tailstock Current Position DisplayThe program coordinate current position of the tailstock axis (W-axis) is displayed.

(2) Sizing position Number DisplayThe currently selected number for the multiple sizing position command (G195 SP= 1 to 10) is displayed.This display appears when the multiple sizing position command and the tailstock movement command are executed.

(3) Diagnosis DisplayWhen the tailstock enters sizing position status with the sizing position command, the message “The tailstock reaches the sizing position and thrust.” appears.

(4) Thrust DisplayThe currently commanded thrust appears.If the same value is set for “HIGH” and “LOW”, only “low” appears.

(5) Command Position Display

a. Sizing positionEnter the sizing position for the tailstock in program coordinates.When [CAL] is performed, the position where the tailstock touches a workpiece is entered.

b. -OKEnter the tailstock sizing position negative side range.

(2) Sizing position Number Display(4) Thrust Display(3) Diagnosis Display

(5) Command Position Display (1) Tailstock Current Position Display

LE32163R0300800150001


The amount of displacement from the sizing position is set.

c. +OKEnter the tailstock sizing position positive side range.The amount of displacement from the sizing position is set.

d. ApproachEnter the approach position for the tailstock in program coordinates.

e. RetractEnter the retreat position for the tailstock in program coordinates.

f. Low-pressureDirectly enter the tailstock thrust for the low-pressure side.

g. High-pressureDirectly enter the tailstock thrust for the high-pressure side.

Press Extension on this screen, then press Related Parameter to display the following screen.

(1) Tailstock slideway resistance teaching ONSet this parameter when measuring no load motor torque.With this parameter set, either step on level 1 advance of the foot pedal from the retreat side of the approach position, or press the [W-] button on the machine operation panel to move it by 5 mm to its original position at sizing speed.Once the tailstock slideway resistance is taught, the “1. Tailstock slideway resistance teaching ON” is automatically turned off.

(2) Advance hold operation distanceStep on level 2 of the foot pedal once to set the distance by which the tailstock moves.

(3) Approach position automatically set distanceBy performing Sizing and CAL under Sizing status in Teaching mode, the position where the tailstock touches the workpiece is entered as the Work Position, and at the same time, the

LE32163R0300800150002


relative distance from the Work Position to the Approach is automatically set. Sets the relative distance from Work Position.

(4) Retreat position automatically set distanceIn the same way as above, the relative distance from Work Position is set.


The following page is displayed by pressing the page key.

(1) Speed 1Set the movement speed from the retraction end to the retract position.

(2) Speed 2Set the movement speed from the retraction end to the approach position.

(3) Speed 3Set the sizing position speed.

(4) Speed 4Set the movement speed from the sizing position to the retract position.

(5) Speed 5Set the movement speed from the retract position to the retraction end.

<Initial value and upper limit value override For 100%> m/min

*1: Specific to machine

Mode M code Pedal/JOG Pedal JOG

OverrideDoor Open Close Open Close

Door interlock ON OFFON/OFF

ON OFF ON/OFF

Operation No.

1 1.2 1.2 *1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.4Valid

2 1.2 1.2 *1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.4

3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Invalid

4 1.2 1.2 *1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.4Valid

5 1.2 1.2 *1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.4

LE32163R0300800150003


6-6-2. NC Tailstock System Parameter

(1) Tailstock Quill Expand/Shrink TimeSets the time it takes for the spring inside the tailstock to slack. (Set at factory shipment.)

(2) Tailstock Spring ForceSets the constant for the spring inside the tailstock. (Set at factory shipment.)

(3) Initial Quill Spring Shrink AmountSets the initial slack of the spring inside the tailstock. (Set at factory shipment.)

(4) No Load TorqueSet the torque value when no load is applied to the tailstock (set at shipment).Following the procedures in 6-5-2. No-load Torque Measurement automatically sets the value.

(5) Ball Screw LeadSets the lead of the ball screw that drives the tailstock. (Set at factory shipment.)

(6) Ball Screw EfficiencySets the efficiency of ball screw that drives the tailstock. (Set at factory shipment.)


0.02 0.00 to 10.00 [s]


Specific to machine 1 to 10000 [N/mm]


Specific to machine 0 to 10.0 [mm]


Specific to machine 0 to 99.9 [%]


Specific to machine 1 to 100 [mm]

LE32163R0300800160001


(7) Motor Rated TorqueSets the rated torque of the motor that drives the tailstock. (Set at factory shipment.)

(8) Torque Skip Position Read Delay TimeSets the motor torque servo system delay time. (Set at factory shipment.)

(9) Work Touch Detect TorqueSets the torque threshold for detecting contact with the workpiece. (Set at factory shipment.)

(10) Ball Screw InertiaSets Ball screw inertia + Coupling inertia. (Set at factory shipment.)

(11) Low Thrust SpeedSets the positioning speed when the specified thrust is Low Thrust or less. (Set at factory shipment.)

(12) Low ThrustPosition speed is set to Low Thrust Speed when the specified thrust is the value set here or less.(Set at factory shipment.)

(13) Low Speed Range for Tailstock RetractionSets the range in which the tailstock is retracted at low speed when it is in a more advanced position than the approach position.(Set at factory shipment.)

(14) Low Retraction SpeedSets the speed for retracting the tailstock within the low speed retraction range from a position more advanced than the approach position.(Set at factory shipment.)


Specific to machine 0.01 to 1.00


Specific to machine 1 to 10000 [Ncm]


120 0 to 10000 [0.1msec]


Specific to machine 0 to 99.9 [%]


Specific to machine 0 to 99999.999 [kg mm sec2]


Specific to machine 0 to 99.9 [m/min]


Specific to machine 0 to 99.9 [kN]


Specific to machine 0 to 99.9 [mm]


Specific to machine 0 to 99.9 [m/min]


6-7. Interlocks

(1) The alarm occurs when the operation command issued while operation conditions for the NC tailstock are not met.

1749 Alarm A Tailstock quill condition

[Code]

1: The spindle is not stopped.2: The center workpiece is not selected.3: The M-tool spindle is not stopped.4: The C-axis is not stopped.5: The touch setter is not positioned at the retract position.6: The X-axis is not positioned at + limit.7: The tailstock is in tailstock teaching mode.

Conditions for “Stopping the Spindle”, “Stopping the M-tool spindle” and “Stopping the C-axis” are reset with M codes used for releasing the interlock.M167: Tailstock Interlock release ONM168: Tailstock Interlock release OFF

2371 Alarm B TOW-ALONG TAILSTOCK MOVEMENT condition

[Code]

8: The setting value of the set selected with the multiple sizing position command is unmatched.9: The sizing position command is executed while the brake is not released in the sizing position area.10: The multiple sizing positions before sequence restart is not matched with the sizing position after sequence restart.11: There is an error in the multiple sizing position command.The NC tailstock no load torque teaching cycle command is issued at the - side viewed from the approach position.

2489 Alarm B NC Tailstock Parameter error.

[Code]

1: The currently effective multi-sizing number is other than 1 to 10.2: The [retract position] is set on a position retracted exceeding the W-axis positive variable limit.3: The [approach position] is set on a position further backward than the [retract position].4: The position determined by [sizing position] + [range 2] is set on a position further backward than the [approach position].5: The position determined by [sizing position] - [range 1] is set on a position further forward than the W-axis negative variable limit.6: The set thrust is “0” kV.7: In the teaching mode, the [approach position] is set on a position further backward than the W-axis positive variable limit.

(2) The alarm activates when the high/low pressure switching command is executed while the high/low pressure switching command for the NC tailstock is issued.

8584 Alarm A Tailstock thrust condition is insufficient.

[Code]

1: The spindle is rotating.2: The M-tool spindle is rotating.


3: The C-axis is rotating.

(3) The alarm activates when the tailstock does not enter sizing position mode after the sizing position command was issued.

1367 Alarm A NC tailstock advance error

[Code]

1: When the command position (CON) does not reach the command torque before entering the sizing position area 1, the command torque is generated within the tailstock quill expand/shrink Time.2: The torque higher than the set thrust is generated when the current position (APA) is moved to the + side viewed from the sizing position area 2.3: The torque exceeding the threshold is generated when the tailstock moves for the time constant (T1 + T2) × 1.25 + 48 msec from the approach position or movement start position.4: The current position is not within the sizing position area while the tailstock is in sizing position status.5: The torque has once exceeded the threshold value and dropped.6: The excess of thrust caused by the motor inertia is larger than the commanded thrust.

2659 Alarm B NC tailstock advance error

[Code]

1: The current position (APA) is positioned at - side viewed from the sizing position area 1.Or the torque exceeding the threshold is generated when the current position (APA) is located at + side viewed from the sizing position area 2 with manual operation.

(4) The multiple sizing position command (G195) is issued when the NC tailstock type is not used.

2662 Alarm B NC tailstock no spec

[Code]

None

(5) If the tailstock work holding confirmation input (iNCTSWH) goes off although the tailstock is in the sizing position, the following alarm occurs:

1748 Alarm A Tailstock quill advance over

[Code]

3: On the machine with an NC tailstock, the tailstock quill has advanced excessively and the NC tailstock work holding confirmation signal went off.

2705 Alarm B Tailstock quill over advance

[Code]

3: On the machine with an NC tailstock, the tailstock quill has advanced excessively and the NC tailstock work holding confirmation signal went off.

(6) The tailstock work holding confirmation input (iNCSWH) is ON although the tailstock is in retract state. If the tailstock advance command is issued in this state, the following alarm occurs:

1749 Alarm A Tailstock quill condition

[Code]

46: The tailstock work holding confirmation input (iNCSWH) is ON although the tailstock is not holding a workpiece. M56 was issued in this state.

5947-E P-258SECTION 7 B-AXIS CONTROL OVERVIEW

SECTION 7 B-AXIS CONTROL OVERVIEW

7-1. Introduction

This is an instruction manual of a lathe equipped with B-axis interpolation control function for feeding the tool nose in B-axis direction, and a lathe capable of general multifunction machining.With an interpolation feed of 5 axes (X, Y, Z, B, and C) under the B-axis interpolation control, the machine can perform contour machining of the parts such as an impeller or turbine blade.

7-2. Machine Operation

7-2-1. Machine Operation

Operation Panel

The B-axis control lathe is equipped with the optional panel shown below.

Fig.7-1

LE32163R0300900030001


Switch overview

(1) B-axis modeEach time this button is pressed in the manual operation mode, the B-axis mode toggles between ON and OFF.

Fig.7-2

(2) Clamp/UnclampWhen this button is pressed in the manual operation or manual interruption mode of B-axis, the turret clamps the tool (with a high pressure brake) and unclamps the tool alternately.

Fig.7-3

(3) B-axis movement commandSelect the B-axis mode in the manual operation or manual interruption mode. When the turret is in the unclamped state, B-axis can be fed using the following buttons.

Fig.7-4

(4) B-axis pulse handleSelect the B-axis mode in the manual operation or manual interruption mode. The B-axis pulse handle mode is selected using the following dial.Then, feed the B-axis with the pulse handle.

Fig.7-5

+B: B-axis jog feed in positive direction

-B: B-axis jog feed in negative direction

LE32163R0300900040001

LE32163R0300900040002

LE32163R0300900040003

YZX

CW

B

LE32163R0300900040005


7-2-2. Manual Operations

Axis Travel (B-axis)

B-axis can be fed in either of the following methods.

(1) Jog Feed Key

(2) Pulse Handle

Jog Feed Key

Procedure :


2 Press the B-axis mode switch on the optional panel to establish B-axis control mode.

3 Operate the B-axis using the B axis [B-] and [B+] keys on the optional panel.

Pulse Handle

Procedure :


2 Press the B-axis mode switch on the optional panel to establish B-axis control mode.

3 Select the B-axis as a pulse handle axis.

4 Select the axis movement amount per pulse handle division (1 pulse) with the pulse handle magnification on the machine panel.

5 Rotate the pulse handle. In the case of CW rotation, the pulse handle rotates in positive direction of the program coordinate system.

To select the B-axis mode, specify the B-axis mode ON command with the axis indexed to the station No. 1.Index the B-axis to the station No.1 even when the 2nd spindle is being selected.

To cancel the B-axis mode, specify the B-axis mode OFF command with the B-axis located at 0° position.Specify the OFF command with the B-axis set at 0° position even when the second spindle is being selected.

B-axis ON/OFF command is not received during the manual interruption mode.


Manual Operation

In the manual feed or the pulse handle feed of B-axis, the B-axis rotates around the B-axis center of rotation.Since the X, Z, and Y-axes do not move at this time, only the tool nose position moves.

Fig.7-6

LE32163R0300900080001


Clamp/Unclamp Operation

This operation changes between clamp (with a high pressure brake and a curvic clamp) and unclamp of the B-axis or the turret.

Clamp/Unclamp

Procedure :


2 Change between clamped state and unclamped state using the clamp and unclamp buttons on the optional panel.

[Supplement]

7-2-3. MDI Operation

B-axis Command

When performing B-axis operation in MDI operation mode, the B-axis mode must be ON. The other command methods are the same with those of a normal machine.

(1) B-axis mode ON procedure


Specify the B-axis mode ON command (G149).

(2) B-axis mode OFF procedure

Specify the B-axis mode OFF command (G148).

Clamp/Unclamp Command

When specifying a clamp/unclamp command in MDI operation mode, the command is not affected by the ON/OFF status in B-axis control mode.

(1) Curvic clamp command procedure


Specify the curvic clamp command (M404).

(2) High pressure brake command procedure

Specify the high pressure brake command (M403).

(3) Unclamp command procedure

Specify the unclamp command (M625).

The clamp/unclamp states are not related with the B-axis mode.


7-2-4. Automatic Operation

For the automatic operation methods, refer to the OSP automatic operation because they are the same with those of a standard machine.This manual explains about the operation related with the automatic operation mode peculiar to the B-axis control.

Sequence Restart

Even a lathe equipped with the B-axis control function uses the same sequence restart procedure as that of a standard machine.Match the machine conditions before sequence restart with the machine conditions after sequence restart. In this state, perform sequence restart.

Actual matching conditions are as follows.

B-axis mode ON/OFF conditions

B-axis position before sequence restart and the position after sequence restart.

When the B-axis or a turret is positioned at an angle other than a curvic pitch angle multiplied with an integer number. In such a case, the B-axis clamp (M404) command is prohibited.


7-2-5. NC Operation Panel Display

Screen Display

Select the Current Position sheet on the operation screen to display the following screen.

Fig.7-7

LE32163R0300900150001


7-3. Programming

7-3-1. B-axis Command

B-axis Mode Command

Use the following G codes to select or cancel the B-axis mode.

B-axis mode ON commandG149

B-axis mode OFF commandG148

Simple Mode Switching Command

This G code macro command simply switches the machining state between lathe turning and multifunction machining.

Multifunction machining commandG151

Lathe turning commandG150

To select the B-axis mode, index the B-axis to the station No. 1 (T1) and then specify the B-axis mode ON command.Specify the B-axis mode ON command with the B-axis indexed to the station No. 1 (T1) even when the second spindle is being selected.

To cancel the B-axis mode, specify the B-axis mode OFF command with the B-axis located at 0° position.Specify the OFF command with the B-axis set at 0° position even when the second spindle is being selected.

Contents of macro processing:

C-axis connection command (M110)

Y-axis mode ON command (G138)

B-axis control mode ON command (G149)

B-axis unclamp command (M625)

Contents of macro processing:

B-axis brake command (M404)

B-axis control mode OFF command (G148)

Y-axis mode OFF command (G136)

C-axis disconnection command (M109)


Axis Travel Command

The G code of axis travel command below can be specified while the B-axis is unclamped.

Rapid traverse commandG00 X_ Y_ Z_ B_ C_

[Supplement]

Linear interpolation feed commandG01 X_ Y_ Z_ B_ C_ F_

The feed speed in each axis direction are as follows:

The feedrate unit of the rotary axis is regarded as follows.1 mm/min = 1 deg/min

[Supplement]

During Y-axis control mode, linear interpolation is performed for X-axis and Y-axis on reception of rapid traverse. So if X-axis and Y-axis are specified in the same block, the rapid traverse for XI-axis and YI-axis is limited to the traverse allowing linear interpolation.No linear interpolation is performed for Z-axis, B-axis, and C-axis.

For G01 Xx Yy Zz Bb Cc Ff

Feedrate in X-axis direction FX = x / L × f

Feedrate in Y-axis direction FY = y / L × f

Feedrate in Z-axis direction FZ = z / L × f

Feedrate in B-axis direction FB = b / L × f

Feedrate in C-axis direction FC = c / L × f

When the B-axis mode is selected or cancelled, the NC calculates the C-axis feedrate based on the following equations.B-axis mode ON: 1° = 1 mmB-axis mode OFF: 360° = 500 mm

However, L = x2 + y2 + z2 + b2 + c2

LE32163R0300900180001


7-3-2. Offset

This function compensates the travel amount of tool nose position caused by B-axis travel.The offset becomes effective with the following commands.

See the figure below. If no offset is set when the turret is located in B90 position, the tool nose position shifts from A to B.

Fig.7-8

Tool Nose Offset Command

This command compensates the tool nose travel amount caused by B-axis travel.Use this command to specify the tool nose position.This command converts the turret center offset, reference offset, and tool offset based on the travel angle from the B-axis 0° position and uses this as the edge position offset amount.

(1) Command methodG158

(2) Operation overviewThe broken line with an arrow becomes the offset amount.

C: Turret center offsetL: Tool offset

C

L

C

L

A

B

LE32163R0300900190001


Fig.7-9

C

L

C

L

C: Turret center offsetL: Tool offset

LE32163R0300900200001


(3) Program example

Reference Position Offset

This command compensates the reference position travel caused by the B-axis travel.(The offset state is the same as the power ON state or NC reset.With this command, the turret center offset is converted based on the travel angle from the B0° position. The angle is used as a reference position offset amount. The tool offset specified at this time does not include the B-axis travel angle.



Fig.7-10

G00 X100 Z100

G149 ... B-axis control mode ON

G158 TD=020002 ... Offset enable (Uses the tool offset for Position number 2.)

* The tool offset number can be specified with system variables.

T=VETON (Active tool offset No.)

G00 X0 Y100 Z0 B100

G01 X10 Y10 Z10 B50 F500 G94

G00 X0 Y100 Z10 B100 T03

G160 ... Cancels offset

G148 ... B-axis control mode OFF

TD=130002

C: Turret center offset

C

C

LE32163R0300900210001


Rotary Axis Offset Cancel Command

This command is used to make fine adjustment of the tool length when programming the B-axis rotation center position.This command converts the reference offset, and tool offset based on the travel angle from the B-axis 0° position and uses this as the edge position offset amount.The turret center offset amount is not added to this command value.



Fig.7-11

[Supplement]

Specify this command when regarding the rotation center position as the command point and when no turret center offset amount is set like the case of CAM.

With this command, the command position changes from the tool nose to the turret rotation center.So, if you specify this command and then the same command later, the command position shifts by the turret center offset amount.

L: Tool offset

L

L

LE32163R0300900220001


7-4. Data Operation

7-4-1. Data Operation

This item explains about the data setting operation for the B-axis control function.

Zero Setting

Set the zero point offset in the coordinate system used for B-axis control. Setting is performed in Operation screen mode. Press the Sheet key to display the spindle setup screen.

Fig.7-12

Set the programming zero on assumption that the first spindle reference position is the “0” position of the machine coordinate system.If, for example, “15” is set as the zero offset, the program coordinates are as shown in the lower right figure.

LE32163R0300900240001

Machine coordinates Program coordinates

0

90

1800

90

180

0

90

180

LE32163R0300900240002


7-5. Parameters

7-5-1. Parameters

The following parameters are added to the lathes equipped with a B-axis control function.

System Parameters

Select the B-axis data setting screen using the axis change key.

Torque value

Fig.7-13

[Supplement]

The positive travel end and negative travel end of B-axis cannot be set because they are determined by the machine construction.

LE32163R0300900260001


User Parameters

Select the B-axis data setting screen using the axis change key.

VARIABLE LIMIT

Droop data

Fig.7-14

7-6. Alarms

This item describes the alarms related with B-axis control.When an alarm occurs, refer to these alarms described here in conjunction with ALARM & ERROR LIST.

(Alarm A)

1730 Turret clamp or position

Turret clamp confirmation is turned off or tool numbers disagree for one second or longer during B-axis travel.6->When the turret state is monitored, B-axis travel became disabled during the B-axis travel.

1732 Turret rotation

Turret rotation was attempted when the turret rotation was impossible.23->Turret rotation command was specified with the B-axis mode ON.

1755 Robot at inside machine

Lathe door close command, axis movement command, or spindle rotation command was attempted when the robot is inside the machine.2->B-axis stop condition was cancelled while the robot was not located in the retract position.

1756 Loader at inside machine

Axis movement was attempted when the loader was not in the loader retract position.4->B-axis stop state was canceled while the loader was not in the loader retract position.

1759 Loader/robot escape position

LE32163R0300900270001


Axis movement was attempted when the retract position symbol was OFF at the robot/loader interface.4->B-axis stop state was cancelled when the retract position symbol was OFF at the robot/loader interface.

8511 B-axis clamp/unclamp condition

In the MACTURN series, B-axis clamp was specified when the B-axis is other than “0,” “90,” “180,” “270” or a multiple of curvic pitch.1->B-axis clamp was specified when the B-axis is in a position other than “0,” “90,” “180,” “270” or a position other than a multiple of curvic pitch.

8555 B-axis movement

B-axis command was specified although the axis movement was prohibited.2->B-axis command is specified when the turret is joined with the tailstock of the lathe having a simple tow-along tailstock or an auto tow-along tailstock.

(Alarm B)

2616 B-axis mode

The specified command is prohibited during B-axis mode.1-> While the B-axis is in the unclamped state, any of the following commands were specified: axis feed command other than G00/G01; slope machining mode ON/OFF command; cutter radius compensation ON/OFF command; compound fixed cycle command.2->B-axis unclamp command was issued with the slope machining mode ON and cutter radius compensation ON.3->B-axis travel command was issued with the B-axis in clamped state.4->Turret index command was issued in B-axis mode, or B-axis travel command was issued when not in B-axis mode.5->Sequence restart command was issued from within B-axis mode to outside of B-axis mode. Sequence restart was specified from outside of B-axis mode to the B-axis mode. Sequence restart was specified to the position where the restart position does not coincide with the actual position.6->B-axis mode ON/OFF command was issued at the following position. B-axis mode ON was specified at the turret index position T1 and not within the T-axis in-position. B-axis mode OFF was specified at B=0 (T1 index angle) command and a position not within the T-axis in-position.

2623 B-axis no spec

B-axis command was specified without any specification for B-axis.

5947-E P-275SECTION 8 LOWER TURRET CONTROL

SECTION 8 LOWER TURRET CONTROL

8-1. Overview of Lower Turret Control

The MACTURN-series machines are equipped with a lower turret.How to set the tools for the lower turret and how to set operate the lower turret are described below.

8-2. Operation Panel

The MACTURN-series machines having a lower turret are equipped with the optional panel shown below.

(1) Turret selector keyPress "A" to select the H1 turret and "B" to select the lower turret.

(2) Lower turret rotation key (CW)(CCW)

+ (CW) keyPressing this key rotates the lower turret in the CW direction.The turret keeps rotating in the CW direction while the key is hold.

- (CCW) keyPressing this key rotates the lower turret in the CCW direction.The turret keeps rotating in the CCW direction while the key is hold.

LE32163R0301000020004

LE32163R0301000020001

63R0301000020002

63R0301000020003


(3) A/B-turret individual operation keyThese keys are enabled only on the machine with 2-saddle.The machine having 2-saddle can perform simultaneous 4-axis machining. The following four patterns of operation modes are available by combining the two turret individual operation keys.

a. A-turret individual operation modeOnly the A-turret operates in either automatic operation or MDI operation.

b. B-turret individual operation modeOnly the B-turret operates in either automatic operation or MDI operation.

c. A/B-turret individual operation modeThe A-turret and the B-turret operate alternately according to the synchronization commands given in the program in either automatic operation or MDI operation.

d. Regular operation modeSimultaneous 4-axis machining is performed according to the part program.

[Supplement]

A-turret individual operation key ..... Enabled (The lamp at the upper left is lit.)

B- turret individual operation key ..... Disabled (The lamp at the upper left is unlit.)

A-turret individual operation key ..... Disabled (The lamp at the upper left is unlit.)

B- turret individual operation key ..... Enabled (The lamp at the upper left is lit.)

A-turret individual operation key ..... Enabled (The lamp at the upper left is lit.)

B- turret individual operation key ..... Enabled (The lamp at the upper left is lit.)

A-turret individual operation key ..... Disabled (The lamp at the upper left is unlit.)

B- turret individual operation key ..... Disabled (The lamp at the upper left is unlit.)

To enable and disable turret individual operation, press the interlock release key.

LE32163R0301000020005


8-3. Tool Registration

8-3-1. Tool registration screen

[TOOL DATA (ALL) sheet]

Item Meaning Remarks

TNo. Tool number Numbers from 1 to 9999 can be specified.A maximum of 1000 tool numbers can be registered.

ENo. Tool edge number The tool edge numbers used when two or more tools are mounted in one toolholder.Numbers from 1 to 8 can be specified.

PNo. Position number No. 1: 1st spindleNo.7: 2nd spindleNumbers from 13 to 20 can be set as desired.

T-COMMENT / P-KIND

Process kind is displayed when no tool comment is set.

CUT POS. Displays the cutting position. 1: 1st spindle2: 2nd spindle

LE32163R0301000030001


MG/T Displays tool mounting status in the magazine and in the turret.

Left side: A/B-turret Right side: Magazine and turret number

Example 1)[A A]→A: Tool for the H1 turret A: Actual tool

[A 1]→A: Tool for the H1 turret 1: Magazine pot no. 1

[B 1]→B : Tool for the lower turret 1: Station no. 1

[B 12]→B : Tool for the lower turret 12: Station no. 12

USE Displays whether the tool is used or not in the program selected in the automatic operation mode.

When the tool is used in the program currently selected, "○" appears in the column.



[TURRET INFO. sheet]When the A-turret is selected with the turret selector key, the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet appears.When the B-turret is selected with the turret selector key, the TURRET INFO. sheet appears.


MOUNTED SPOT Turret station number

TNo. Tool number

TOOL COMMENT The comment entered during the registration of tool data is displayed.

When no comment is set, the column appears as blank.

KIND Lathe tool (L tool): LMilling tool (M tool): MSensor tool: SDummy tool: DT

USE Displays whether the tool is used or not in the program selected in the automatic operation mode,

When the tool is used in the program currently selected, "○" appears in the column.

LE32163R0301000030002


8-3-2. B-turret Tool Registration Procedure

The procedure to create the tool data for the B-turret which are to be set to the turret is described below.

[When a lathe tool is mounted in a standard tool toolholder]

Procedure :

1 Select the TOOL DATA sheet.

2 Press the [F1] (TOOL REGIST) key.

3 Press the [F3] (TURR-TL REGIST) key.

Note

4 The tool data input screen is displayed.

Enter the data for tool number, tool comment, tool kind, tool edge number, basic position and offset.[TOOL NUMBER]Numbers from 1 to 9999 can be used.A total of 1000 tools can be registered as the number of tool edges.

[KIND]Select the tool kind from lathe, milling, sensor and dummy.

When the [F1] (TOOL REGIST) key is pressed, the tool registration screen for the H1 turret is displayed.

LE32163R03010000400001


[EDGE NO.]Set "1" when only one tool is mounted on one toolholder.A maximum of 8 pieces can be set.

[BASIC POSITION]Select the tool whether it is for the 1st spindle or the 2nd spindle.When the 1st spindle is selected, the position number is set to "1".When the 2nd spindle is selected, the position number is set to "7".

[TOOL OFFSET]When the touch setter is provided, set the tool offset.This item can be set even after the tool and toolholder model have been set.

5 Press the [F6] (HOLDER / TOOL SEL) key.

Press [F1] to select the toolholder model.Press [F2] to select the tool model.After the model data are selected, the graphic pane displays the image in which the tool is mounted in the toolholder as shown in the screen above.

LE32163R0301000040002


6 Press the [F3] (CHANGE SETTING) key.

[TOOL MOUNTING]Set either IN ORDER or IN REVERSE direction.

[TIP DISTANCE] / [PROJECTION AMOUNT]Set the offset amount from the tool reference point.When the correct tool offset amount has been set, the value is automatically calculated by pressing the [F4] (AUTO SET) key.

[OFFSET REF. PNT. X] / [OFFSET REF. PNT. Z]Set the tool reference point of toolholder.This is usually not required as the data are included in the toolholder model information.

[TOOL EDGE POS. SYNC.] (DO / DO NOT)When DO is selected:Based on the tool offset setting value, the tool projection amount and the tip distance for the Collision Avoidance System are automatically calculated to be set.When the tool offset value is changed after tool registration, the tool projection amount and the tip distance of the tool model are automatically updated being linked with the offset value.When DO NOT is selected:The tool projection amount and the tip distance of the tool model are not automatically updated even when the tool offset value is changed.

LE32163R0301000040003


Press the OK key after all the settings are complete.

7 After the screen returns to the TOOL EDIT sheet, set the process kind.

When the Advanced IGF is provided, the tool is automatically selected according to the process kind information set here.

[TOOL OFFSET UPDATE] (DO / DO NOT)When DO is selected:Based on the tip distance and the projection amount changed on the tool model setting screen, the tool offset setting value is changed after the tool offset is automatically calculated. When DO NOT is selected:Tool offset is not changed even when the tip distance and the projection amount are changed on the tool model setting screen.

When the correct tool offset value has been set after obtained using the touch setter, select DO NOT.Before changing the tool offset, the following message appears.

[MACHINING AXIS]Select the tool whether it is for the 1st spindle or the 2nd spindle.

LE32163R0301000040004

LE32163R0301000040005


8 Press the extension key and the [F4] (DETAIL SETTING) key.

Set the detailed tool information for each tool as necessary.

TOOL UNIT

M-AXIS DIRECTION

Set the direction for the 1st spindle and the 2nd spindle respectively.

REVOLVING DIRECTION: CW/CCW

ORIENTATING DIRECTION: CW/CCW/SHORT PATH

FLAT TURNING DIRECTION: CW/CCW

HOB DIRECTION: CW/CCW

HIGH PRESSURE COOLANT

VALID/INVALID

LE32163R0301000040001


9 Press the [F7] (REGIST) key to complete the tool data registration.

When the tool that is set as VALID is mounted in the turret, the tool can be referred to in "High pressure coolant control by tool number B-side" on the MACHINE USER PARAMETER (AIRBLOW / COOLANT) screen.

TOOL UNIT

B-AXIS ANGLE B-axis angle with tool mounting direction in the Easy Modeling Function

C-AXIS ANGLE C-axis angle with tool mounting direction in the Easy Modeling Function

ORIENTATION ANGLE

TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT

Parameter setting regarding tool life management

GROUP NUMBER

SET NUMBER

NUMBER OF PROCESSING

OG1/OG2/OG3

LIFE

GAUGE

TOOL INDEX UNIT

MONITORED AXIS

Set the monitored axis for load monitoring.The load monitoring command is automatically inserted in the part program created with IGF.

LE32163R0301000040007


10 Select the TURRET INFO. sheet and then press the [F1] (TURRET ATTACH) key.

11 When the Collision Avoidance System is provided, the tool and toolholder model can be checked on the monitor screen.

LE32163R0301000040008

LE32163R0301000040009


[When a tool is mounted in a toolholder that can store two or more tools]

Procedure :

1 Select the TOOL DATA sheet.

2 Press the [F1] (TOOL REGIST) key.

3 Press the [F3] (TURR-TL REGIST) key.

Note

4 The tool data input screen appears.Enter the data for tool number, tool comment, tool kind, tool edge number, basic position and offset.

[EDGE NO.] [BASIC POSITION]When two or more tools are mounted in one toolholder, set the basic position and the tool offset for each tool edge number.

When the [F1] (TOOL REGIST) key is pressed, the screen for registering tools for the H1 turret is displayed.Separate tools between the tools for H1 turret and for the lower turret before registering.

EDGE NO. 1BASIC POSITION 1st spindle (position no.1)

EDGE NO. 2BASIC POSITION 2nd spindle (position no.7)

LE32163R0301000040010

LE32163R0301000040011


5 Press the [F6] (HOLDER / TOOL SEL) key.

6 Press the [F1] (SELECT HOLDER) key.Example) Toolholder model: OUT1

7 Press the extension key to change the menu.

8 Press the [F8] (CHANGE EX. TOOL NO.) key.

LE32163R0301000040012

LE32163R0301000040013


9 Select the extended tool number.

Example) With the OUT1 toolholder, extended tool no. 1 and extended tool no. 2 are set on right side and the left side respectively.Caution should be exercised as right and left is reversed depending on the tool toolholder model.

Extended tool no.2 Extended tool no.1

LE32163R0301000040014


10 Tool model setting with extended tool no.1

The tool model shown in red is the tool currently being edited.The extended tool number is displayed at the upper left of the screen.In the example above, set "2" for EDGE NO. and "SPINDLE 2" for MACHINING AXIS.

LE32163R0301000040015


11 Tool model setting with extended tool no.2

The tool model shown in red is the tool currently being edited.The extended tool number is displayed at the upper left of the screen.In the example above, set "1" for EDGE NO. and "SPINDLE 1" for MACHINING AXIS.

12 Press the [F7] (REGIST) key to complete the tool data registration.

13 Press the extension key and then the [F4] (DETAIL SETTING) key to set the required data.

14 Select the TURRET INFO. sheet to press the [F1] (TURRET ATTACH) key.Set a turret number and press the OK key. Then the tool is mounted in the turret.

[TOOL EDGE POS. SYNC.] (DO / DO NOT)When DO is selected:Based on the tool offset setting value, the tool projection amount and the tip distance for the Collision Avoidance System are automatically calculated to be set.When the tool offset value is changed after tool registration, the tool projection amount and the tip distance of the tool model are automatically updated being linked with the offset value.When DO NOT is selected:The tool projection amount and the tip distance of the tool model are not automatically updated even when the tool offset value is changed.

[TOOL OFFSET UPDATE] (DO / DO NOT)When DO is selected:Based on the tip distance and the projection amount changed on the tool model setting screen, the tool offset setting value is changed after the tool offset is automatically calculated.When DO NOT is selected:Tool offset is not changed even when the tip distance and the projection amount are changed on the tool model setting screen.

LE32163R0301000040016


15 When the Collision Avoidance System is provided, the tool and toolholder model can be checked on the monitor screen.

8-4. Operations

8-4-1. Turret index command: T command

[Command format]

Command example)

T100 → Indexes the turret to station no. 1.



LE32163R0301000040017

Turret station numbers 1 to 12 (with a V 12 turret)The number of tools to be mounted in the turret varies depending on the turret specification.

LE32163R0301000050001


8-4-2. TD command

Use the TD command to enable lower turret rotation and the tool offset.[Command format]

Command example)

The turret station with which the tool with tool no.1 is mounted is indexed.Only tool offset is enabled.Since the position number and the tool edge number are not specified, the position offset and the tool wear amount are not enabled.

The turret station with which the tool with tool no.1 is mounted is indexed.The tool offset, position offset, and tool wear offset are enabled.

The turret station with which the tool with tool no.1 is mounted is indexed.Tool edge no.2 is valid for tool offset.The position offset and tool wear offset are enabled.

TD=1 M323

TD = 010001 M323 or TD = 10001 M323

TD = 02070001 M323 or TD = 2070001 M323

Tool edge number (1 to 8)This argument can be omitted with a toolholder for a single tool.

Position number When used with the 1st spindle: 01 When used with the 2nd spindle: 02

Tool number Numbers from 0001 to 9999 can be applied.

can be set in the parameter below.Optional parameter (Others)M code macro command type selection Enabled/disabledEnabled = M323 / disabled = M423

LE32163R0301000060001


Note

1) With the upper turret (H1 turret), spindle stop (M05) is executed by internal processing with the TD command. However, M05 command (spindle stop command) is not executed with the lower turret.Pay attention in creating a program.

2) With a groove tool, set the groove width (W) when setting the tool data.Tool offset is shifted by the amount of groove width (W) by executing the OS command.Put the OS command in the same block as the TD command.

Command example)TD = 010001 M323 OS = 2

5947-E P-295SECTION 9 STEADYREST ZB-AXIS CONTROL

SECTION 9 STEADYREST ZB-AXIS CONTROL

9-1. Overview

The steadyrest is attached to the lower cross-slide on the machines of MULTUS series. Since the steadyrest moves only along the Z-axis direction, the steadyrest is controlled as the B-turret of 2-saddle mechanism.Furthermore, the B-turret is controlled as having the ZB-axis only.The following diagram shows the axis configuration.

ZA-axis

ZB-axis

XA-axisTurret

Spindle

Steadyrest

LE32163R0301100010001


9-2. Operations

The H1 turret and the steadyrest are operated with the A-turret and the B-turret, respectively.Operations are carried out in the manner of the 2-saddle operation system; just the B-turret accepts only commands for the ZB-axis.

9-2-1. Manual operations

Select the turret to be used with the A and B turret selection buttons on the machine operation panel.

The NC steadyrest can be traveled by using JOG feed/pulse handle feed for the ZB-axis.Note that the steadyrest cannot be travelled along the XB-axis since the XB-axis does not exist.

9-2-2. Operations in MDI mode

Select the turret to be specified with commands with the A and B turret selection buttons on the NC operation panel. Specify the command for each block in the MDI mode.

A-turret side: Operates the H1 turret.

B-turret side: Operates the NC steadyrest.

63R0301100030001

63R0301100030002


9-2-3. Operations in AUTO mode

Part programs in AUTO mode can be created in the same manner as the 2-saddle specification.Note that there are some restrictions on commands to the NC steadyrest (B-turret).

(1) Turret selection G codeThe operation commands for the H1 turret (A-turret) and the NC steadyrest (B-turret) can be programmed in the same manner as the 2-saddle specification.

A-turret selection G code: G13 (H1 turret)B-turret selection G code: G14 (NC steadyrest)

Give the turret selection G code above at the top of the program. The commands to be followed are enabled for the turret specified by the G code at the top of the program.

(2) Synchronization command Synchronization command by the P code and the waiting for synchronization command by M100 can be used.

(3) Commands for the NC steadyrest (B-turret)Pay attention to the restrictions below when specifying the commands for the NC steadyrest (B-turret).

The address characters X and I are ignored.Since the XB-axis does not exist, the address characters X and I that specifies the event for the X-axis are ignored.

G13

G14

M02

Commands for the H1 turret (A-turret)

Commands for the NC steadyrest (B-turret)

LE32163R0301100050001


G codes that cannot be usedEven if the command is given by ignoring the X command, the function for the X-axis may be accompanied in some particular G codes without the X command.These G codes are banned to be used and an alarm will be triggered if given in the program.

If any of the G codes above is specified, the following alarms will occur."2218 ALARM-B UNUSABLE G-code"[Code]XX-> Hex number of the specified G code

The system variables for the X-axis are banned to be used.The system variables for the X-axis are banned to be used both in reading and in writing, and the following alarms will occur if specified in the program.

"2488 ALARM-B UNUSABLE X-axis command"

[Code]1-> A system variable for the X-axis is specified.

The system variables for the X-axis that are banned to be used are as follows.

9-2-4. Animation simulation screen

The animation simulation screen in the operation mode does not display the data for the steadyrest.

- G02, G03 Circular interpolation

- G31, G32, G33 Fixed thread cutting cycle

- G41, G42 Tool radius compensation/nose R compensation

- G80 to G88 LAP

- G112, G113 Circular tread

- Zero offset (VZOFX)

- Zero shift (VZSHX)

- Tool offset (VTOFX)

- Nose R compensation amount (VNSRX)

- Variable limit in positive/negative direction (VPVLX,VNVLX)

- Droop (VINPX)

- Reference ring position (VRNGX)

- Sensor position (VSNX)

- In-process measurement data (VIMDX)

- Pitch offset amount / pitch amount (VPFVX,VPCHX)

- Command target position(VSIOX)

- Current position (VAPAX)

- Sensor touch position (VSKPX)

- Current offset amount in total (VETFX)

- DIFF(VDIFX)


9-2-5. Check motion for interference with the NC tailstock

(1) Parameter settingAllowable distance for interference can be set on the OPTIONAL PARA: (STEADY REST) screen.

(2) Operations in AUTO/ MDI modeThe command values for the NC tailstock and the NC steadyrest are constantly monitored to calculate the distance in AUTO / MDI mode. When the distance exceeds the allowable distance for interference set in the parameter, the following alarm will occur.

"1440 ALARM-A Steady rest-Tailstock interlock 5"[Code]5-> The axis is attempted to be moved to an interference position of the steadyrest base and the tailstock.

(3) Operations in MANUAL mode (pulse handle/JOG feed)When moving the steadyrest base and the tailstock by manual operation with the pulse handle/JOG feed, the axis stops when it comes to a position of the distance set in the allowable distance for interference parameter. The axis cannot move in the direction to exceed the allowable distance for interference and such commands are ignored.Moreover, the command values are constantly monitored in the same manner as operations in AUTO/ MDI mode.

(4) Operations with the "sizing position" button and the "foot pedal" of the NC tailstockIn operations using the "sizing position" button or the "foot pedal", the command values are constantly monitored in the same manner as operations in AUTO/ MDI mode. However, the axis does not stop at the position of the distance set in the allowable distance for interference parameter as is done with the operation with the pulse handle/JOG feed.

9-2-6. Check motion for interference with the sub spindle base

(1) Parameter settingThe parameters can be set in both the conventional parameter and the parameters added on the OPTIONAL PARA: (STEADY REST) screen on the machine with the sub spindle.

(2) Operations in AUTO/ MDI modeThe command values for the sub spindle base and the NC tailstock are constantly monitored to calculate the distance in AUTO / MDI mode. When the distance exceeds the allowable distance for interference set in the parameter, the following alarm will occur.

"1299 ALARM-A Axis moved to sub-spindle interference distance 1"

(3) Operations in MANUAL mode (pulse handle/JOG feed)When moving the steadyrest base and the sub spindle base by manual operation with the pulse handle/JOG feed, the axis stops when it comes to a position of the distance set in the allowable distance for interference parameter. The axis cannot move in the direction to exceed the allowable distance for interference and such commands are ignored.Moreover, the command values are constantly monitored in the same manner as operations in AUTO/ MDI mode.

OPTIONAL PARA: (STEADY REST)

1. Steady rest/Tailstock allowable max. distance

2. Steady rest/Tailstock allowable min. distance

3. Steady rest/Tailstock interference distance

4. Interference free distance ZB-W (NC STEADY REST)


9-3. Parameter

The parameters used in the interference check function for the NC steadyrest and NC tailstock or the NC steadyrest and sub spindle base are described as follows.

(1) OPTIONAL PARA: (STEADY REST) screen"4. Interference free distance ZB-W (NC STEADY REST)"Initial value: 0Setting range: 0 to 99999.999 (0.1μm specification: 0 to 9999.9999)Setting unit: 1 mmAllocation: optional parameter long word No.50

(2) OPTIONAL PARA: (1st-2nd SPINDLE) screen (displayed only on the machine with the sub spindle)"9. Interference free distance ZB-W (SUB_SPINDLE)"Initial value: 0Setting range: 0 to 99999.999(0.1μm specification: 0 to 9999.9999)Setting unit: 1 mmAllocation: optional parameter long word No.50

(3) OPTIONAL PARA: (LONG WORD, WORD, BIT) screenSet to "ZB-axis-W-axis interference allowable distance for sub spindle".Initial value: 0Setting range: 0 to 99999999Setting unit: 1 μm (or 0.1μm with 0.1μm specification)

How to set the parameters

Procedure :

1 Move the NC steadyrest and the tailstock (or the sub spindle base) closer each other to a position to be set in the parameter.

2 The distance between the NC steadyrest and the tailstock (or the sub spindle base) is measured to be set by the SET key.

The distance can be adjusted by using the ADD key after the data have been set.


9-4. Alarm and error

1299 ALARM-A Axis moved to sub-spindle interference distance

A command that specifies a distance that may make the sub spindle base (W-axis) and the B-turret (ZB-axis) approach each other exceeding interference distance which has been set in the parameter.

[Code]

1


1) Program error 2) Wrong parameter setting value

1440 ALARM-A Steady rest-Tailstock interlock

A command that exceeds the allowable movable range is specified in the AUTO /MDI operation mode.

[Code]

5-> The axis is to be moved to an interference position between the steadyrest base and the tailstock.

2488 ALARM-B UNUSABLE X-axis command

A command related to the X-axis is given though the X-axis does not exist.

[Object]

System

[Code]

1-> A system variable for the X-axis is specified.


1) Program error

2575 ALARM-B Mistake in 'TD','TDG','OS' commands

[Code]

18-> When the B-turret side is selected on the machine having the steadyrest with the ZB-axis, any of the following commands is specified: TD, TDG, OS, TS, TSG, M323/M423, and TDS.

5947-E P-302SECTION 10 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER FUNCTIONS

SECTION 10 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER FUNCTIONS

10-1. Description of Other Functions

10-1-1.Override for Internal Arc Cutting

In the cutter radius compensation mode, feedrate is controlled so that the feedrate along the tool center path will be the feedrate specified in a program.As the result, the tool moves along the programmed path at a feedrate different from the specified feedrate.This function overrides the feedrate so that the feedrate along the programmed path will be equal to the programmed feedrate only for internal arc cutting operation.(Cutting feedrate along the programmed path) = (Programmed feedrate)

(1) ConditionsThe conditions to turn on the override function for internal arc cutting are indicated below.

In the cutter radius compensation mode

Internal arc cutting operation

(2) Actual Feedrate (Feedrate on Cutter Center Path)For internal arc cutting as shown in the figure above, actual feedrate on the cutter center path is calculated as shown below.(Actual feedrate) = (Programmed feedrate) × rc/rp

(3) Target planesThis function is valid in the following four kinds of interpolation planes.If this function is specified while a plane other than those indicated below is selected, the function is invalid.

G17 X-Y plane (coordinate conversion function is used)

G119 C-X-Z plane

G138 & G17 X-Y plane (Y-axis function is used)

G138 & G19 Y-Z plane (Y-axis function is used)

r c

r p

Feedratespecified in aprogram

Tool path(Center of the tool)

Programmed path

Cutting feedrate along theprogrammed path

rc: Arc radius calculated by cutterdiameter compensationrp: Programmed arc radius

LE32163R0301200010001


(4) Lower Limit of OverrideEven in internal arc cutting operation, there will be cases that do not require feedrate deceleration or operations in which cutting time should not be elongated unnecessarily.For these cases, set an appropriate value for the following parameter.OPTIONAL PARAMETER MULTIPLE MACHINING No. 9 Lower limit of override for inside arc Setting range: 1 to 100 [%] Initial value: 100 [%]This sets the minimum value of the override to be applied to the programmed feedrate.If “rc/rp ×100 < Parameter setting” in the figure on the previous page, then:Actual feedrate = Programmed feedrate × Parameter setting

10-1-2.Helical Cutting Function (Optional)

This function allows the machine to perform helical cutting on the planes selected with G17/G18/G19.

(1) FormatThe command format for executing helical cutting in the G18 plane is explained below.For helical cutting in the G17/G19 plane, refer to the Programming Manual.

In helical cutting in the G18 plane, linear interpolation of the Y-axis is synchronized with circular interpolation in the Z-X plane.Command Format

G18: Z-X plane selection commandG02/G03: CW/CCW circular interpolation command

X: XI-axis arc end pointZ: ZI-axis arc end pointI: Relative coordinate from arc start point to arc center of XI-axisK: Relative coordinate from arc start point to arc center of ZI-axisL: Radius of circle (generates an arc with center angle of 180° or less.)Y: Movement stroke along the Y-axis while moving from start to end point of arc.F: Feedrate for circular interpolation. Feedrate of an infeed axis (Y-axis in this case) can be calculated using the following formula. [Infeed axis feedrate] = [Infeed axis movement distance] / [Arc length] × [F command value]

LE32163R0301200020001


(2) Cautions on programming helical cutting

The helical cutting function can be specified in the Y-axis mode (G138).

If the end point lies at the same point as the start point of the circle in the same plane, a full circle is generated.Note that a full circle cannot be defined using an L command.

If a full circle command is executed continuously using the helical cutting commands, sequence joining processing is executed unconditionally. (Setting for optional parameter bit No. 69, bit 0 is disregarded.

Helical cutting is also possible in the slant face coordinate system as in the standard coordinate system.


10-1-3.Tool Offset Change Function

The tool offset change function allows the display and setting of tool adjustment amount by extracting it from the currently selected machining program or interactive data.Machining programs contain branching steps such as IF and GOTO which can alter the execution sequence of a program depending on various surrounding circumstances at the time. This function lists steps of the selected program from the beginning (including sub-programs that are called) in the actual order in which they are executed.

Tool offset change list

Tool offset change list can be produced by one of the following methods.

By machining program selection

By interactive data selection


Tool offset change list display

When the Tool Offset Change list is produced by program selection, press the [F5] (Tool Offset Change) function key in the operation screen to display the Tool Offset Change pop-up screen.This screen allow the change of Tool Adjustment, Nose Radius Compensation, and Tool Wear Offset. Functions such as Set, Add, Calculate are the same as in the Tool Data sheet on the Tool Data Setting screen.

Tool Offset sheet on the Tool Offset Change function screen

The following screen is displayed for the Tool Offset sheet on the Tool Offset Change function screen.

Fig.10-1 Tool Offset sheet on the Tool Offset Change screen

Item Contents

TNo. Tool No.

ENo. Edge number (This field is displayed only for multi-edged tools.)

PNo. Tool position number

Cut type Cut type (The cut type registered in Tool Data is displayed.)

Cutting position Spindle mode icon (The icon is displayed only for sub-spindle configuration)Standard/Orthogonal

BA Turret Index Angle

G52 Turret rotation offset command enable/disable

LE32163R0301200060001


Tool Wear Offset sheet on the Tool Offset Change function screen

Press the Sheet key while the Tool Offset sheet is displayed to switch to the following Tool Wear Offset sheet.

ATC macro command M-code number

This function reads the selected program and extracts tool related commands, but tool related commands do not support formulas. If a formula is used in any of the commands, the error message “Some Tool Data used are not supported” is displayed when the Tool Offset Change screen is displayed. (For details, refer to Errors on the following page.)

Errors

If there is an error in Tool Indexing commands, rows with a command are left blank and the error is displayed on the bottom right.

LE32163R0301200070001


Error list

Error description Display on list Display in error field

An unregistered tool was found

Nothing is displayed in the row that is an error.

The applicable tool is not registered.

An unmounted tool was found The applicable tool is not mounted.

The Tool number is out of range


The Tool number is out of range.

An unregistered Tool Position was found


The position for the applicable tool is not registered.

The tool command had a negative value


The specified value is negative.

The Tool position number is out of range


The Tool position number is out of range.

An unregistered tool was found


The tool for the applicable tool group number is not registered.

An unmounted tool was found The tool for the applicable tool group number is not mounted.

An unregistered Tool Position was found


The position for tool in the applicable tool group number is not registered.

The Tool Group number is out of range


The Tool Group number is out of range

A tool is not selected in the tool group.


A tool is not selected for the applicable tool group number.

There are 1000 or more tool commands in a single program.

Tool Offset Change data count has exceeded the 1000 maximum.

An unexecutable command exists in the program


An unexecutable command was found.

An error was found with other tools

Part of the Tool Data used is out of range


10-1-4.TL Command Mode

Overview

There are two types of tool preparation commands: TL command mode and TD command mode.The TL command mode is a tool preparation command that is used with OSP-P200L or OSP. To run a part program which is created using TL commands with OSP-P300S, the mode needs to be changed to the TL command mode.

Parameter

OPTIONAL PARAMETER EASY OP.

No1 Command mode TL command

OPTIONAL PARAMETER BIT NO. 54 BIT7

Default : Ineffect

Setting range : Ineffect (TD command mode)

Effect (TL command mode)

No2 Number of tool offsets for TL(T) command prog.

OPTIONAL PARAMETER WORD NO.135

Set the number of tool offset groups with TL command when “TL command mode” is enabled.

Default : 0 (32 groups)

Setting range : 0...32 groups, 1...64 groups, 2...96 groups, 3...200 groups, 4...500 groups, 5...800 groups, 6...999 groups

LE32163R0301200120001


The active mode is indicated on the machine status display bar.

In TD command mode

In TL command mode

[Supplement]

1) The command mode cannot be changed under the following conditions.

a) During tool data registration and editing

b) During program operation

2) The tool indexing commands (M602, M603) are banned in the TD command mode.

3) In the TL command mode, tool numbers cannot be newly registered except those provided in the program tool list.

LE32163R0301200120002

LE32163R0301200120003


Screen Display for Each Mode

The TD command mode and TL command mode display the screens as follows.

Content TD command mode

TL command mode

TOOL DATA SETTING screen Displayed Displayed

TOOL OFFSET /NOSE-R COMPENSATION screen Not displayed Displayed

TOOL WEAR OFFSET screen Not displayed Displayed

RUN Display - actual position enlargement pop-up windowEdge position sheet

Displayed Not displayed

RUN Display - tool offset change pop-up window Displayed *1

RUN Display - spindle setup screenSoft jaw processing function

Displayed Not displayed

RUN Display - tool offset change pop-up windowTool change Manual operation function

Displayed *2

T code display on RUN Display TD display TL display

*1 The screen compliant with conventional command format.(Position number → tool offset number)

*2 Only tool change, tool return and next tool return are enabled and tool indexing operation is not performed.Indexing operation cannot be operation since tool position number data are not provided.


TD command mode TL command mode

Offset data are not displayed.They are displayed on the separate screen shown below.

LE32163R0301200130001 LE32163R0301200130002

LE32163R0301200130003

LE32163R0301200130004


Tool checking display

After the program has been selected, a prompt message “Please confirm registration of used tools in machining program” appears as shown below in order to prompt the user to perform the tool confirmation in the TOOL DATA SETTING screen.

When [F6] (CHECK) is selected, the screen moves to the TOOL DATA SETTING screen.When [F7] (CHECKED) is selected, the pop-up window closes to allow turning to be started.

LE32163R0301200140001


Tool registration support function in TL command mode

When a part program has been selected when the TL command mode is selected, the [F5] (PROGRAM TL-LIST) function key appears on the TOOL DATA sheet on the TOOL DATA SETTING screen.

When this function key is pressed, a program list is created by loading the part program being selected.

(1) The following data are extracted from the selected part program.

Tool group number

Tool number

Tool nose number (with multi-edge tool function)

Tool offset group number

Tool offset number

Spindle mode (with sub-spindle function)

Indexing (with B-axis control function)

BA angle (with B-axis control function)

(2) Sort functionUsed to avoid same position with same tool offset number or eliminate duplication of tool group numbers.

LE32163R0301200150001


(3) By using the extracted data described above, the following data are created after converting the data into position numbers.

Tool group number

Tool number

Tool nose number (with multi-edge tool function)

Tool offset group number

Tool offset number

Tool position number

Tool registration data availability

Tool nose registration availability (with multi-edge tool function)

Position registration availability

(4) Initial value settingTool numbers and tool offset numbers cannot be identified by using only part program that is created to support the tool life management function,Therefore, set the initial value to cover the following two points.Set the same number as the tool group number as the initial value at the tool number column.Set the same number as the tool group number as the initial value at the tool offset column.


Tool list display function

By searching the TL command from the program selected in the automatic operation mode, the tool list is automatically created.

The following data are displayed with the program tool list.

GNoTool group number (with tool life management function only)

TNoTool number

ENoTool edge number (with multi-edge tool function only)

PNoTool position number

OGTool offset group number (with tool life management function only)

ONoTool offset number

TOOL REG.Tool registration “○” is displayed when the tool has already been registered.When not, it is shown blank.

EDGE REG. (with multi-edge tool function only)Tool edge registration “○” is displayed when the tool nose has already been registered.When not, it is shown blank.

LE32163R0301200160001


POS. REG.position registration “○” is displayed when the position has already been registered.When not, it is shown blank.

The following functions can be used on this screen.

Function Name Description

F1TOOL

REG&ATT.

Supplies the tool to the turret after registering the tool.The key appears only when tool registration is required.Registering arbitrary tool numbers is not allowed.

F2MCHP-TL REG&ATT.

Supplies the tool to the turret after registering the multi-edge tool.The key appears only when multi-edge tool registration is required.

F3 EDGE ADDTool is registered by adding the tool edge position.The key appears only when tool nose registration is required with a multi-edge tool.

F4POSITION

ADDTool is registered by adding the tool position.The key appears only when additional tool position is required.

F5DETAIL

DISPLAYSwitches the right side of the screen to the detail display screen.

F6MANUAL

TOOL CHGDisplays the MANUAL OPERATION screen for tool change manual operation.

F7CONFIRM ON/OFF

Displays the pop-up window for tool confirmation.

F8DISPLAY CHANGE

Displays the pop-up window for screen selection.

Extension F1TOOL

REGIST

Performs tool registration.The key appears only when tool registration is required.Registering arbitrary tool numbers is not allowed.

Extension F2MCHP-TL REGIST

Performs multi-edge tool registration.The key appears only when multi-edge tool registration is required.

Extension F3ALL

TRANSFER

Transfers the TD command tool offset to the TL command tool offset in a batch.(Note)By adding the setting values of TD command tool offset and tool position offset, the data are transferred to the TL command tool offset.

Extension F4 TRANSFER

Transfers the TD command tool offset to the TL command tool offset.(Note)By adding the setting values of TD command tool offset and tool position offset, the data are transferred to the TL command tool offset.

Extension F5TOOL

DETACHRemoves the tool from the turret.

Extension F6 REFRESH Displays the latest status.

Extension F7ACT POS ON/

OFFDisplays the pop-up window for current position.

Extension F8DISPLAY CHANGE

Displays the pop-up window for screen selection.


[Supplement]

Tool registration

Tools can be registered newly when the tool is used in the part program that is created with the TL mode and has not been registeredWhen [F1] (TOOL REG & ATT.) or [Extension F1] (TOOL REGIST) is pressed on the program tool list pop-up window, the tool creation screen is displayed.At this time, the TOOL NUMBER and BASIC POSITION are automatically set.

The program tool list is a function that supports the tool registration state. The part program can be started even when no “○” mark is displayed with tool registration and tool position on the list.However, it is required to check if the offset is set properly in advance on the tool offset screen and the nose R compensation screen.

LE32163R0301200170001


Tool registration is enabled by setting TOOL NUMBER, KIND, size, and BASIC POSITION in the blue frame. When registering the tool, the following alarm message appears.

* When minimal data are input, tool drawing by animation and in the collision avoidance system and tool selection in Advanced One-Touch IGF are disabled.

LE32163R0301200170002


Touch setter function

When the touch setter is in advanced state, the screen automatically switches to the screen below, and then the touch setter screen for manual operation extension is displayed.

The cursor moves to the same tool offset number as the tool number currently mounted in the turret.

Tool change manual operation function

When the tool change manual operation function key is pressed, the following ATC manual operation screen appears.

LE32163R0301200180001

LE32163R0301200190001


Tool offset transfer function

When M02 is executed during operation in the TL command mode, the tool offset set in the TL command mode is transferred to the tool offset in the TD mode.At this time, the tool position offset in the TD command mode is initialized and then the value is set as the tool offset value.

Program

The following table shows command permission related to tool indexing command in the TD and TL command modes.

Command format

CommandTD

command mode

TL command

modeRemarks

TD=eepptttt M423

Tool change index command

Enabled Alarm Bee: tool edge number (0 to 12)

pp: tool position number (0 to 20)

tttt: tool number (1 to 9999)

TDG=ppgggg M423

Tool change index command(tool group specification)

Enabled Alarm B pp: tool position number (0 to

20)

gggg: tool group number (1 to 9999)

TL=rrttooTL=eetttooo

Tool indexing command

Alarm B*1)

Conditional, Enabled

*1) TL command mode allows a tool number up to 3 digits. Therefore, a command with 4-digit triggers an alarm B.

ee: tool edge number (0 to 12)

rr: nose R compensation number (0 to 96))

tt: tool number (0 to 999)

oo: tool offset number (0 to 999)

TG=ggTG=ggg

Tool indexing command(tool group specification)

Alarm B*1)

Conditional,Enabled

*1) TL command mode allows a tool number up to 3 digits. Therefore, a command with 4-digit triggers an alarm B.

gg: tool group number (1 to 999)

BT=0/1(simultaneous

with TL command)

Cutting position index command

Alarm B Enabled0: reference position

1: orthogonal position

BA=[angle](simultaneous

with TL command)

B-axis positioning commandAlarm B Enabled[angle]: index angle

BA=[angle](independently)

B-axis positioning commandEnabled Enabled

[angle]: index angle

G52Turret rotation position offset function

Enabled Enabled


The following table shows command permission related to tool change command in the TD and TL command modes.

OG=1/2/3

Tool offset group specification

Alarm B Enabled1: tool offset group 1

2: tool offset group 2

3: tool offset group 3

OS=1/2

Groove width selection command

Enabled Alarm B1: basic offset

2: basic offset + groove width W

TrrttooTtttooo

Turret index command

*2) Conditional,

EnabledEnabled

*2) Only turret number specification is permitted.If a nose R compensation number or tool offset number command is issued, an alarm B occurs.

rr: nose R compensation number

tt: turret number

oo: tool offset number

TP=0/1

Cutting position index command

Alarm B Enabled0: reference position

1: orthogonal position

TC=1 Turret ATC position Enabled Enabled

OF=ooOF=ooo

Tool offset selection command

Alarm B Enabledoo: tool offset number(=nose R compensation number)

M602/M603

M602: M-axis indexed at 0-deg.Alarm B EnabledM603: M-axis indexed at 180-

deg.

Command format

CommandTD

command mode

TL command

modeRemarks

MT=tttt01

Next tool preparation command

Enabled*1)

Conditional,Enabled

*1) Conventional command mode allows a tool number up to 3 digits. Therefore, a command with 4-digit triggers an alarm B.

tttt: tool number

TDG=gggg MT=1Next tool preparation command

Enabled Alarm Bgggg: tool group number

TG=gggg MT=1Next tool preparation command

Alarm B Enabledgggg: tool group number

M323/423 Tool change index macro command Enabled Alarm B

Command format

CommandTD

command mode

TL command

modeRemarks


UGC command

The following table shows command permission related to UGC command in the TD and TL command modes.

M321/421 Tool change macro command Enabled Enabled

M06 Tool change command Enabled Enabled

M228 Next tool return Enabled Enabled

MG=mmMagazine index command

Enabled Enabledmm: magazine pot number

G21 HP=○ATC home position command

Enabled Enabled○: ATC home position number

M204/M205

M204: shutter closeEnabled Enabled

M205: shutter open

M227Waiting for ATC sequence completion command

Enabled Enabled

G171 ATP=1G171 AHP=○

Tool change position shift command Enabled Enabled

Command format

CommandTD

command mode

TL command

modeRemarks

CLEAR Delete a blank. Enabled Disabled

DRAW Draw a blank. Enabled Disabled

DEF WORK:

ENDDefine a blank shape. Alarm B Disabled

Command format

CommandTD

command mode

TL command

modeRemarks


TOOL DATA DETAIL SETTING pop-up window

In the TL command mode, data columns to store the tool offset number for each tool offset group number are displayed on the TOOL DATA DETAIL SETTING screen.

TOOL OFFSET/NOSE R COMPENSATION screen

In the TL command mode, the TOOL OFFSET /NOSE R COMPENSATION screen is displayed.The screen can be set in the same way as OSP-P200L.

LE32163R0301200230001

LE32163R0301200240001


TOOL WEAR OFFSET screen

In the TL command mode, the TOOL WEAR OFFSET screen is displayed.The screen can be set in the same way as OSP-P200L.

Operation flow for running a part program created in the TL command mode

Procedure :

1 Select TL command mode on the PARAMETER screen.

2 Select a conventional part program on the RUN screen.

Note

3 After the program selection is complete, a prompt message “Please comfirm registration of used tools in machining program” appears.Delete this prompt message by pressing either the Enter key or CHECKED function key.

4 The part program in the operation buffer is analyzed by pressing the “program tool list” function key on the TOOL DATA SETTING screen and the program tool list is created.

Note

With the DNC-DT function, since the part program is loaded after the startup the tool list cannot be used as it is not created before the startup.

When a schedule program is selected, the schedule program is analyzed and then multiple main programs are analyzed to create the program tool list that is to be used with all main programs.

LE32163R0301200250001


5 Since the pop-up window appears by pressing the function key from the registered tool in the program tool list, check if the tool shape and tool offset value are correct by using the tooling list.When the tool does not agree, change the tool number in the part program and perform the operation from step “2” again.When the tool offset does not agree, write the tool offset of the registered tool in the area of tool offset number used in the program by pressing the function key.

6 Register the tool not registered yet.

7 Mount the tool to the turret.

8 Set the tool offset.

When measuring the tool offset by using the touch setterThe screen automatically moves to the TOOL OFFSET/NOSE R COMPENSATION screen to display the touch setter screen for manual operation extension.Operate the touch setter on this screen and set the tool offset.Close the touch setter operation screen and set the nose R compensation.

When setting the tool offset by SET/ADD/CAL keys.Display the TOOL OFFSET/NOSE R COMPENSATION screen by pressing the screen change key, and set the tool offset/nose R compensation.

9 Return the tool to the magazine.

10 Perform “6”, “7”, “8”, “9” for all the unregistered tools.

11 Press the NC START key to start the part program.The tool offset data are fed back to the tool data base by M02 (program end).


10-1-5.Soft Jaw Process Function

Overview

The soft jaw process function allows soft jaws to be processed by only setting the parameters without creating the program.

Procedure :

1 Select the RUN screen.

2 Select the SP. SETUP tab.

3 Select the ID/OD-GRIP CHG. (OD GRIP/ID GRIP)

4 Press [F4] (SOFTJAWS PROCESS).

On the soft jaw process function parameter screen, spindles are prepared separately and independently for 1st and 2nd. Set the both spindles separately.

LE32163R0301200270001


Before parameter setting

Set the following two items before inputting a soft jaw shape.

(1) Setting the tool movement position Because the position in the Z-axis direction that allows the turret to be rotated safely varies depending on the type of workpiece to be machined, value “0” is set as default. Set the positive limit of the X-axis.Set the position after checking that it is safe with turret rotation. If “0” is set here, soft jaw cannot be processed.

How to set the tool movement position

1. Press the extension key.

2. Press the [F5] (PARAMETER).

3. The pop-up window for setting the tool position movement is displayed.

LE32163R0301200280001


(2) Setting the chuck model dataThe zero offset Z value that is set in the zero setting column on the RUN screen is not used with the soft jaw process function.The soft jaw process function performs operation by using the chuck model end face as zero point.When no chuck model has been registered, the reference zero point is used as zero point. In that case, care must be taken as collision may be expected.

How to register the chuck model data

It is necessary to set a right value at CHUCK LEN. L in the CHUCK PARAMETER setting area.By using the distance from the reference zero to CHUCK LEN. L as the zero point, the soft jaw process program is automatically created.

1. Select the RUN screen.

2. Select the spindle setup tab.

3. Press the [F6] (EDIT (PARA.))

4. Press the [F4] (CHUCK PARA. SET).

LE32163R0301200280002


Selecting a soft jaw process tool

When the soft jaw process mode is selected, screen the SOFTJAW PROCESS PARAMETER and the SOFTJAW GUIDE PICTURE are displayed on the left bottom and on the right bottom respectively.

Press [F3] (SOFTJAW TOOL-SET) with the cursor selecting [1 ROUGH]. If the tool number is known already, it is possible to input the tool number directly.

LE32163R0301200290001

LE32163R0301200290002


The tool selection window appears.

Select a tool to be used with roughing in soft jaw process and press [F7] (OK).

Select a tool for finishing in the same manner.

F1 A list is displayed after extracting only the registered OD tools.

F2 A list is displayed after extracting only the registered ID tools.

F3 A list is displayed after extracting all turning tools.

F6 All registered tools are displayed.

LE32163R0301200290003


Inputting the soft jaw shape

Input the shape to be processed by following the guide drawing.The guide drawing changes depending on the setting condition of ID grip and OD grip.

Input the soft jaw shape according to the guide drawing.

LE32163R0301200300001

LE32163R0301200300002

LE32163R0301200300003


Operation preparation

After the soft jaw shape has been input, press [F1] (PREPARE START). A blank model is created after message “DATA-MODEL is being creating...” is displayed.

Note

Program zero created in the soft jaw process functionThe ZERO OFFSET Z value set on the RUN screen is not used with the soft jaw process function. The program is automatically created while referring to CHUCK LEN. L of the model data and by using the position L [mm] away from the reference zero point as the zero point.

LE32163R0301200310001

Reference zero Z Program zero at soft jaw process

LE32163R0301200310002


When operation preparation has been completed normally, a part program that is automatically created appears at the right bottom of the screen.This program is automatically created for each time and cannot be saved or edited.

LE32163R0301200310003


Executing the soft jaw process

Select the automatic operation mode and press the start button. Then the soft jaw process is started.Same as regular cutting operation, make sure to turn the machine lock to ON, activate the single block mode and check if the program is run correctly before executing the soft jaw process.

By pressing [F7] (SOFTJAW QUIT) after actual processing is completed, soft jaw shape model after processed is automatically created and the screen returns to the RUN screen.

LE32163R0301200320001


The jaw shape data in the spindle setup tab on the RUN screen is automatically updated based on the value set with the SOFTJAW PROCESS PARAMETER.The soft jaw model data are also automatically created.

LE32163R0301200320002


10-1-6.Edge position display function

In the manual operation mode, it is possible to display the actual position to which tool offset of the tool mounted in the turret is added.The edge position for this is displayed in the dedicated screen.

Procedure :

1 Press the RUN screen.

2 Activate the actual position screen on the top left.The blue frame appears.

3 Press the function key [F2] (ACTUAL POSITION ENLARGEMENT).

4 Select the EDGE POS. tab.

Note

EDGE POS. display in the manual mode

1) In the AUTO/MDI operation mode, the EDGE POS. is not displayed but “*.***” appears instead.

2) While the EDGE POS. is displayed, peripheral speed V is displayed also with the edge position added.

3) When the position at the indexed turret agrees with the one registered, the edge position is displayed with position offset and tool wear added as well as tool offset.

4) When the two or more same tool positions have been registered, the position number can be selected from the tool position number list

LE32163R0301200340001


EDGE POS. display in the manual mode and Y-axis mode

EDGE POS. display in the AUTO/MDI mode

LE32163R0301200350001

LE32163R0301200360001


Position number selection menu display

LE32163R0301200370001


10-1-7.Message Function

Overview

The message function allows the characters input in the machining program beforehand to be displayed on the pop-up window during program running.

The pop-up window can be displayed by pressing the function key.

Procedure :

1 Select automatic operation mode. Display the RUN screen.

2 Activate the ACT POS. on the top right.

3 Press the extension key, and then press [F7] (PROGRAM MESSAGE).

Program format

MSG (message sentence) ... message display start (screen change)

NMSG ... message display end (to the original screen)

G code

G215 (message sentence) ... message display start (screen change)

G216 ... message display end (to the original screen)

LE32163R0301200380001


[Supplement]

The message appears with the double size characters on the screen

On the machine with 1-saddle, up to 128 characters can be displayed for a message; the part exceeding 128 characters will not be displayed.

On the machine with 2-saddle, the message for “A:” and “B:” saddles is displayed in the same pop-up window.To distinguish A saddle from B saddle, “A:” or “B:” appear at the top of message.Therefore, the number of the characters to be displayed as message is limited to 126, and the part exceeding 126 characters will not be displayed.

If a message sentence uses multiple lines, only the last line will be displayed.When the continuation symbol “$” comes at the line top, however, the sentence is displayed as 1 block including the previous block.

When no message sentence exists after MSG, the last comment sentence in the existing block is displayed.The comment sentence indicates the character-string enclosed in ( ) in the part program.

When program is not stopped due to M00 or other similar code, the message to be displayed is updated to the comment sentence which is interpreted next as the block interpretation proceeds to the next.

5947-E P-342SECTION 11 APPENDIX

SECTION 11 APPENDIX

11-1. ATC Logic Tables

Input Logic Table

Output Logic Table

Manual Interlock Table

Cam Shaft Input Logic Table

Cam Shaft Output Logic Table


MULTUS B200

LE32163R0301300010001


LE32163R0301300010002


LE32163R0301300010003


LE32163R0301300010004


LE32163R0301300010005


LE32163R0301300010006


MULTUS B300/B400

LE32163R0301300010007


LE32163R0301300010008


LE32163R0301300010009


LE32163R0301300010010


LE32163R0301300010011


LE32163R0301300010012


MULTUS B750

LE32163R0301300010013


LE32163R0301300010014


LE32163R0301300010015


LE32163R0301300010016


LE32163R0301300010017


LE32163R0301300010018


LE32163R0301300010019


LE32163R0301300010020


LE32163R0301300010021


LE32163R0301300010022


MACTURN550

LE32163R0301300010023


LE32163R0301300010024


LE32163R0301300010025


LE32163R0301300010026


LE32163R0301300010027


LE32163R0301300010028


MACTURN550ATC logic table

2 2 6 680 40 02 01

150↓2↓↓

54↓↓

57↓↓

8786

↓↓

122↓↓

147↓↓

222↓↓

242↓↓

282↓↓

303

301

↓

↓

↓358↓

Retracted state

Tool inserted

state

Tool gripping operation

Retraction

Retracted state

Tool gripped

stateTool

extracting operation

180° rotation

Tool extracted

state

Tool inserting operation

Tool gripped

state

Tool inserted

state ON

ON

OFF OFF

ON

Waiting for

signal ON

OFF ON

OFF

OFF

ON ON

OFF OFF

OFF

ONON

Waiting for

signal ON

360

CamAngle

Ope

ratio

n se

quen

ce N

o.

CAM AXIS INPUT LOGIC

EA

rot

atio

n

EA

inse

rt/e

xtra

ct

EA

tool

unl

ock

EA

tool

lock

T to

ol u

ncla

mp

T to

ol c

lam

p

Waiting for

signal ON

Waiting for

signal ON

LE32163R0301300010029


5 7 B B 7 7 701 02 02 01 10 08 04

15CamAngle

0↓2↓↓ ON

54↓↓

57↓↓

87↓↓

122↓↓

147↓↓

222↓↓

242↓↓

282↓↓

303↓↓

358↓

OFF

OFF OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

360

MACTURN550ATC logic table

Ope

ratio

n se

quen

ce N

o.

CAM AXIS OUTPUT LOGIC

EA

rot

atio

n

EA

inse

rt/e

xtra

ct

EA

tool

unl

ock

T to

ol u

ncla

mp

T to

ol u

ncla

mp

with

low

pre

ssur

e

T T

ool C

lam

p

RS

air

Blo

w

AT

C a

ir B

low

1

AT

C a

ir B

low

2 (

End

Fac

e)

Retracted state

Tool inserted

state

Tool gripping operation

Tool gripped

stateTool

extracting operation

180° rotation

Tool extracted

state

Retraction

Retracted state

Tool inserting operation

Tool gripped

state

Tool inserted

state

LE32163R0301300010030


MACTURN250/350

MA

CT

UR

N25

0/35

0 1

2 3

4 5

6A

TC

Log

ic T

able

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

Operation Sequence No.

INP

UT

LO

GIC

(1/2

)

MG Manual intervention OFFMG Tool existingMG Tool not existing

EA Return position

Shutter 2 open confirmationShutter 2 close confirmationRS Rotation tool change positionRS Rotation MG positionRS Tool insertRS Tool extractRS Tool existingRS Tool not existing

T Tool change position 1T Tool change position 2T ATC Position index complete

Shutter openShutter close

EA rotation completeT Tool existingT Tool not existingT Tool unclampT Tool clamp


1W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(MT

)

12

Mag

azin

e in

dexi

ng

2

3R

S T

ool i

nser

tion

34

RS

Too

l cha

nge

posi

tion

45

RS

Too

l ext

ract

ion

S

hutte

r 2

clos

e

5

6W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(M06

)

6

7M

G S

tart

inde

xing

too

l ret

urn

pot

(tur

ret)

78

Shu

tter

open

8

9T

ool c

hang

e

9

10S

hutte

r cl

ose

1011

MG

Inde

xing

ret

urn

pot (

RS

)

1112

RS

Too

l ins

ertio

n

S

hutte

r 2

open

12

13R

S M

agaz

ine

posi

tion

1314

RS

Too

l ext

ract

ion

14

B-t

est

data

Aut

o-br

anch

dat

a6

Wai

ting

for

mac

hini

ng c

ompl

etio

n (N

ext

tool

ret

urn

cycl

e)

14R

S T

ool e

xtra

ctio

n

LE32163R0301300010031


MA

CT

UR

N25

0/35

0 7

8 9

A B

CA

TC

Log

ic T

able

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201


INP

UT

LO

GIC

(2/2

)

Tool attribute agreeM06 Tool change

Tool change (Large-dai. Tool)

M-tool spindle at orientation positionM228 Next tool cancel

Magazine index position agree

Step reverse interlockStep advance interlock


1W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(MT

)1

2M

agaz

ine

inde

xing

23

RS

Too

l ins

ertio

n

34

RS

Too

l cha

nge

posi

tion

45

RS

Too

l ext

ract

ion

S

hutte

r 2

clos

e5

6W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(M06

)6

7M

G S

tart

inde

xing

too

l ret

urn

pot

(tur

ret)

78

Shu

tter

open

8

9T

ool c

hang

e

9

10S

hutte

r cl

ose

1011

MG

Inde

xing

ret

urn

pot (

RS

)

11

12R

S T

ool i

nser

tion

Shu

tter

2 op

en

12

13R

S M

agaz

ine

posi

tion

13

14R

S T

ool e

xtra

ctio

n

14

B-t

est

data

Aut

o-br

anch

dat

a6

Wai

ting

for

mac

hini

ng c

ompl

etio

n (N

ext

tool

ret

urn

cycl

e)

14R

S e

xtra

ctio

n

LE32163R0301300010032


MA

CT

UR

N25

0/35

0 1

2 3

4 5

6A

TC

Log

ic T

able

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201


OU

TP

UT

LO

GIC

(1/2

)

Shutter 2 openShutter 2 closeRS Rotation tool change positionRS Rotation MG positionRS Tool insertRS Tool extract

Return cycle disabled

EA Speed adjustment


1W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(MT

)

12

Mag

azin

e in

dexi

ng

2

3R

S T

ool i

nser

tion

34

RS

Too

l cha

nge

posi

tion

45

RS

Too

l ext

ract

ion

S

hutte

r 2

clos

e

5

6W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(M06

)

6

7M

G S

tart

inde

xing

tool

ret

urn

pot (

turr

et)

78

Shu

tter

open

89

Too

l cha

nge

9

10S

hutte

r cl

ose

10

11M

G In

dexi

ng r

etur

n po

t (R

S)

11

12R

S T

ool i

nser

tion

S

hutte

r 2

open

12

13R

S M

agaz

ine

posi

tion

13

14R

S T

ool e

xtra

ctio

n

14

LE32163R0301300010033


MA

CT

UR

N25

0/35

0 7

8 9

A B

CA

TC

Log

ic T

able

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201


OU

TP

UT

LO

GIC

(2/2

)

M-tool spindle rotation disabledMagazine manual intervention enabled

MG Air blowRS Air blowATC Air blow 1ATC Air blow 2 FaceT Tool unclampManual Tool changeNext tool cancelMG Tool returnMG Tool extractionMG Index eneabledStored tool indexStored tool index (Turret side)Next tool writeNext tool index

EA rotation command

Step reverse disabledNC answer backAuto-branchStep timer BStep timer AATC Start positionM Pot stop at fixed positionShutter closeShutter open

Z-axis movement disabledY-axis movement disabledX-axis movement disabledM06 commande receive enabledSame MT command valid


1W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(MT

)1

2M

agaz

ine

inde

xing

23

RS

Too

l ins

ertio

n3

4R

S T

ool c

hang

e po

sitio

n4

5R

S T

ool e

xtra

ctio

n

Shu

tter

2 cl

ose

56

Wai

ting

for

com

man

d (M

06)

67

MG

Sta

rt in

dexi

ng to

ol r

etur

n po

t (tu

rret

)7

8S

hutte

r op

en8

9T

ool c

hang

e

910

Shu

tter

clos

e

1011

MG

Inde

xing

ret

urn

pot (

RS

)

1112

RS

Too

l ins

ertio

n

Shu

tter

2 op

en

1213

RS

Mag

azin

e po

sitio

n13

14R

S T

ool e

xtra

ctio

n14

LE32163R0301300010034


MA

CT

UR

N25

0/35

0

1

2 3

4 5

6A

TC

Log

ic T

able

80

40

20

10

08

04

02

01

80

40

20

10

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201


MA

NU

AL

INT

ER

LOC

K(1

/2)

Step Return

Return Cycle

MG Manual intervention OFFMG Tool existingMG Tool not existing

EA Return position

Shutter 2 open confirmationShutter 2 close confirmationRS Rotation tool change positionRS Rotation MG positionRS Tool insertRS Tool extractRS Tool existingRS Tool not existing

T Tool change position 1T Tool change position 2T ATC Position index complete

Shutter openShutter close

EA rotation completeT Tool existingT Tool not existingT Tool unclampT Tool clamp


1W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(MT

)

12

Mag

azin

e in

dexi

ng

2

3R

S T

ool i

nser

tion

34

RS

Too

l cha

nge

posi

tion

45

RS

Too

l ext

ract

ion

S

hutte

r 2

clos

e

5

6W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(M06

)

6

7M

G S

tart

inde

xing

tool

ret

urn

pot (

turr

et)

7

8S

hutte

r op

en

89

Too

l cha

nge

910

Shu

tter

clos

e

10

11M

G In

dexi

ng r

etur

n po

t (R

S)

11

12R

S T

ool i

nser

tion

Shu

tter

2 op

en

1213

RS

Mag

azin

e po

sitio

n

1314

RS

Too

l ext

ract

ion

14

Man

ual s

tep

bran

ch9

Too

l cha

nge

14R

S T

ool e

xtra

ctio

n

Man

ual s

tep

back

2M

agaz

ine

inde

xing

9T

ool c

hang

e

LE32163R0301300010035


MA

CT

UR

N25

0/35

0 7

8 9

A B

CA

TC

Log

ic T

able

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201


MA

NU

AL

INT

ER

LOC

K(2

/2)

Step Return

Return Cycle

Tool attribute agreeM06 Tool change

Tool change (Large-dai. Tool)

M-tool spindle at orientation position

M228 Next tool cancel

Magazine index position agree

Step reverse interlockStep advance interlock


1W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(MT

)1

2M

agaz

ine

inde

xing

23

RS

Too

l ins

ertio

n

34

RS

Too

l cha

nge

posi

tion

45

RS

Too

l ext

ract

ion

S

hutte

r 2

clos

e5

6W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(M06

)6

7M

G S

tart

inde

xing

tool

ret

urn

pot (

turr

et)

78

Shu

tter

open

8

9T

ool c

hang

e

9

10S

hutte

r cl

ose

1011

MG

Inde

xing

ret

urn

pot (

RS

)

11

12R

S T

ool i

nser

tion

Shu

tter

2 op

en

12

13R

S M

agaz

ine

posi

tion

13

14R

S T

ool e

xtra

ctio

n

14

Man

ual s

tep

bran

ch9

Too

l cha

nge

14R

S T

ool e

xtra

ctio

n

Man

ual s

tep

back

2M

agaz

ine

inde

xing

9T

ool c

hang

e

LE32163R0301300010036


MACTURN250/350 6 6ATC Logic Table 02 01

Operation S

equence No.

EA

Rotation

EA

Insert/Extract

T-tool U

nclamp

T-tool C

lamp

9Cam Angle

Retractedstate

Tool grippingoperation

Toolextractingoperation

Waitingfor ON

Retraction

Retractedstate

Toolinserted

state

CAM AXIS INPUT LOGIC

Tool grippedstate

180° rotation

Tool grippedstate

Waitingfor ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

Toolinserted

state


Toolinsertingoperation

0

2

60

75

112.5

140

220

247.5

285

300

358

LE32163R0301300010037


MACTURN250/350 7ATC Logic Table 02

Operation S

equence No.

EA

Rotation

EA

Insert/Extract

T-tool U

nclamp

RS

Air B

low

AT

C A

ir Blow

1

AT

C A

ir Blow

2 (End F

ace)

9Cam Angle

Retractedstate

Tool grippingoperation

Toolextracted

state

Retraction

Retractedstate

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Toolinserted

state

CAM AXIS OUTPUTLOGIC

Tool grippedstate

180° rotation

Tool grippedstate

ONTool

insertedstate


Toolinsertingoperation

0

2

60

75

112.5

140

220

247.5

285

300

358

LE32163R0301300010038


11-2. ATC Input/Output Bit Tables

INPUT

Portable pulse handle effective (CE)

Portable pulse handle ineffective (operation panel effective; CE)

Diagonal feed selection (MT)

Y-axis zero return

Y-axis manual feed

Y-axis manual feed

Y-axis mode

Y-axis selection for pulse handle

Signal name Address Label

[Panel input] <Machine with Y-axis or ATC>

I.008B

I.008A

I.016A

I.0164

I.0163

I.0162

I.0160

I.0161

I.0166

I.0165

I.0168

I.0169

I.018C

I.018D

I.0047

I.0046

I.020D

I.020C

I.020B

I.020A

I.0209

I.0208

I.0207

I.0206

I.021A

I.0219

I.0205

I.0204

I.0203

I.0202

I.0201

I.0200

ipHPHON

ipHPHOF

ipSLFED

ipYZPR

ipMNPY

ipMNNY

ipYMOD

ipPHY

ipMNPYB

ipMNNYB

ipVTOF

ipEAPS

ipWCL

ipWUC

ipCLAT4

ipCLMN4

ipMORQ

ipTIDA

ipTIDC

ipSGCY

ipRECY

ipSTFF

ipSTRE

ipAILOF

ipBFOFF

ipBFON

ipASHCL

ipASHOP

ipTCFT

ipTCRT

ipTTCL

ipTTUC

YB-axis manual +YB (HOB)

YB-axis manual -YB (HOB)

Orthogonal tool compensation 6/14add *1

ATC arm swing compensation

W-axis clamp (H1-W) 6/10add *1

W-axis unclamp (H1-W) 6/10add *1

1st coolant 4 auto

1st coolant 4 manual

Request for manual loading/unloading

Turret index to ATC position

Turret index to cutting position

1-cycle start

Return cycle start

1-step feed

1-step reverse

Interlock release

Bar feeder link OFF (CE)

Bar feeder link ON

ATC shutter close

ATC shutter open

Turret manual tool change L/Face mill/L (MT)

Turret manual tool change Side end mill/M tool (MT)

Turret tool clamp PB

Turret tool unclamp PB

LE32163R0301300020001


opSLFED

opMSPRE

opYMOD

opPHY

opVTOF

opBFON

opWCL

opWUC

opCLAT4

opCLMN4

opMORQ

opTIDA

opTIDC

opSGCY

opRECY

opSTFF

opSTRE

opAILOF

OUTPUT

[Panel output] <Machine with Y-axis or ATC>


0.010D

0.0105

0.0108

0.0109

0.010C

0.0147

0.011D

0.011E

0.0037

0.0036

0.0137

0.0136

0.0135

0.0134

0.0133

0.0132

0.0131

0.0130

Diagonal feed selection (MT)

M-tool spindle unclamp (H1) 6/10add *1

Y-axis mode

Y-axis selection for pulse handle

Not usable

Not usable

Orthogonal tool compensation 6/14add *1

Bar feeder link ON

W-axis clamp (H1-W) 6/10add *1

W-axis unclamp (H1-W) 6/10add *1

1st coolant 4 auto

1st coolant 4 manual

Request for manual loading/unloading

Turret index to ATC position

Turret index to cutting position

1-cycle start

Return cycle start

1-step feed

1-step reverse

Interlock release

Not usable

Not usable

LE32163R0301300020002


iEOF/

iOPOF/

iSEA/

iTMA/

iOHA/

iOLA/

iCBA/

iEMSTP/

iOCL/

iOCA/

iCPA/

iCPAL/

iACBA/

iSOA/

iAOLA/

iBOF

iBOL

iESUE

iALM/

iSSP/

iTSP/

iSTR

iCTIM

iRST

iOIL/

iCIL/

iEMMON/

iESIN

iINCC

iMOCLAL/

iMOCAL/

I.1008

I.100C

I.1006

I.1004

I.1003

I.1001

I.1000

I.100B

I.1032

I.1031

I.1030

I.1011

I.138F

I.1033

I.138E

I.1025

I.1024

I.1045

I.1044

I.1043

I.1042

I.1041

I.1060

I.1040

I.1155

I.1126

I.1009

I.1151

I.1150

I.1129

I.1128

INPUT

[EC input] <Standard model>


Emergency limit release/

Operation power OFF/

Travel end alarm/

CPU (control cabinet) temperature alarm/

Transformer overload alarm/

EC overload alarm/

EC circuit breaker alarm/

Emergency stop/

1st headstock oil cooler level alarm/

1st headstock oil cooler alarm/

1st spindle low chuck pressure/

Chip conveyor alarm/

ATC axis EC circuit breaker alarm/

Spindle lubricating oil low pressure/

ATC axis motor overload alarm/

Slideway lubricating oil flow

Slideway lubricating oil level low

External start impossible

External alarm/

External cycle stop/

External slide hold/

External start

Calendar timer input

External reset

1st spindle chuck interlock/

1st C-axis interlock/

Emergency stop monitor/

External command for 1st spindle CW in inching mode

External command for 1st spindle CCW in inching mode

M-tool spindle oil cooler level alarm/

M-tool spindle oil cooler alarm/ (H1)

LE32163R0301300020003


oCPCO

oNCRUN

oPWON1

oOPON1

oBKRLS2

oBKRLS1

oPWON2

oOPON2

oRUNO

oALMO

oPSP

oNCSTO

oNCUOF

oPWOF

oSDRPB

o2SDRPB

OUTPUT

[EC output] <Standard model> Multi-port


O.1027

O.100D

O.1000

O.1004

O.1009

O.1008

O.1001

O.1005

O.1015

O.1014

O.1013

O.1012

O.100E

O.1029

O.1200

O.1210

Chip conveyor ON

NC running

Axis power ON 1

Axis operation ON 1

Axis brake release 2

Axis brake release 1

Axis power ON 2

Axis operation ON 2

Work lamp

Alarm lamp

Operation end lamp

Running lamp

NC unit power OFF

Auto power shutoff

1st safety door lock release (PL, CE)

2nd safety door lock release (PL, CE)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

LE32163R0301300020004


iCECHOPP

iCECHCLP

iSHADC

iSHRTC

iCHOPC

iCHCLC

iUDOPC

iUDCLC

iDROP/

iARW/

iOPA/

iOPAL/

iTSCL2

iTSCL1

iTSCPLMC

iTSCPRTC

iTSRTC

iTSLMC

iTSOAC

i2CPA/

iDRSRB/

iDPON

iDPOFF

i2SHADC

i2SHRTC

i2CHOPC

i2CHCLC

I.154D

I.154C

I.1251

I.1250

I.1159

I.1158

I.1217

I.1218

I.1212

I.102C

I.1020

I.1021

I.1278

I.1277

I.127A

I.1279

I.1275

I.1274

I.1273

I.1038

I.121F

I.1071

I.1070

I.1259

I.1258

I.1169

I.1168

INPUT

[EC output] [EC output]


MP2:

MP2:

MP2: 1st spindle chuck open confirmation PS

MP2: 1st spindle chuck close confirmation PS

MP2: 1st sensor arm advance position confirmation

MP2: 1st sensor arm retract position confirmation

MP2:1st spindle chuck open confirmation

MP2:1st spindle chuck close confirmation

MP14: 1st ceiling door open confirmation

MP14: 1st ceiling door close confirmation

MP14:

MP14: 1st door open confirmation/

MP14: Air source pressure confirmation/

MP14: Low hydraulic oil pressure/

MP14:

MP14: Hydraulic oil level low/

MP10: Tailstock clamp confirmation 2

MP10: Tailstock clamp confirmation 1

MP10: Connection ON, tailstock-saddle connect pin IN confirmation)

MP10: Connection OFF (tailstock-saddle connect pin OUT confirmation)

MP10: Tailstock retract confirmation

MP10: Tailstock sizing position confirmation

MP10: tailstock over-advance confirmation

2nd spindle low chuck pressure/

Door open/close safety rubber switch/

Sub hydraulic oil drain pump ON confirmation

Sub hydraulic oil drain pump OFF confirmation

2nd sensor arm advance position confirmation

2nd sensor arm retract position confirmation

2nd spindle chuck open confirmation

2nd spindle chuck close confirmation

LE32163R0301300020005


oCBKRL

oCHLP

oCCP

oCBRK

oCHOPO

oCHCLO

oATAB2

oATAB1

oARB

oRSPP1

oRSPP2

oRSSP

oRSMGP

o2ASHC

o2ASHO

oRSAB

oATESOF

oATESON

oASHC

oASHO

oBHP

oBLP

oBCL

oTUC

oLTCLC

oLTUCLC

oMUCL

oMCL

O.1104

O.1139

O.1103

O.1102

O.1134

O.1133

O.133D

O.133C

O.1171

O.1352

O.1353

O.1351

O.1350

O.133B

O.133A

O.1358

O.136A

O.1369

O.1333

O.1332

O.1071

O.1070

O.1084

O.1081

O.1365

O.1364

O.1109

O.1108

OUTPUT



MP1: 1st C-axis brake pressure release

MP1: 1st spindle chuck low pressure

MP1: 1st C-axis clamp

MP1: 1st C-axis brake

MP1:1st spindle chuck open

MP1:1st spindle chuck close

Mp3:

MP3: ATC air blow 2 (tool)

MP3: ATC air blow 1 (turret)

MP3: 1st air blow B (MT thru)

MP4: Tool insertion by RS in standby position 1 (MT30)

MP4: Tool extraction by RS in standby position 2 (MT30)

MP4: RS swing to tool change position

MP4: RS swing to MG position

MP5: ATC shutter close 2

MP5: ATC shutter open 2

MP5:

MP5: RS air blow

MP5: ATC escape OFF

MP5: ATC escape ON

MP5: ATC shutter close

MP5: ATC shutter open

MP6: B-axis brake OFF (NC-B)

MP6: B-axis low-pressure brake (NC-B)

MP6: B-axis high-pressure brake OFF (MC-B) (H2)

MP6: A-turret unclamp

MP6: Tool clamp (MT20)

MP6: Tool unclamp (MT20)

MP6: M-tool spindle unclamp (H1)

MP6: M-tool spindle clamp (H1)

LE32163R0301300020006


iLTCLC

iLTUCLC

iMUCLC6

iMUCLC5

iMUCLC4

iMUCLC3

iMUCLC2

iMUCLC1

iMGPH

iMGIN

iMGOF

iTOLDS

iTOLPAL/

iTOLLAL/

iRSPP1

iRSPP2

iRSSP

iRSMGP

iRSTO

iMGTO

i2ASHC

i2ASHO

iUSM8A

iUSM7A

iUSM6A

iUSM5A

iUSM4A

iUSM3A

iUSM2A

iUSM1A

I.1375

I.1374

I.112F

I.112E

I.112D

I.112C

I.112B

I.112A

I.1389

I.138A

I.138B

I.1067

I.1066

I.1065

I.1365

I.1366

I.1362

I.1361

I.1360

I.137A

I.1391

I.1390

I.1307

I.1306

I.1305

I.1304

I.1303

I.1302

I.1301

I.1300

INPUT

[EC input] <Standard model> Multi-port


Tool clamp confirmation (MT30/50)

Tool unclamp confirmation (MT30/50)

M-tool spindle unclamp confirmation 6 (H1)






MG operation disabled

MG manual interrupt ON

MG manual interrupt OFF

Turret oil mist lube drop sensor (MT30/50)

Turret oil mist lube pressure alarm/ (MT30/50)

Turret oil mist lube level alarm (MT30/50)

MP11: Tool insertion by RS in standby position 1 (MT30)

MP11: Tool extraction by RS in standby position 2 (MT30)

MP11: RS swing to tool change position confirmation

MP11: RS swing to MG position confirmation

MP11: RS tool exists

MP11:ATC MG no-tool confirmation

MP11: ATC shutter close confirmation 2

MP11: ATC shutter open confirmation 2

M108 answer

M107 answer

M106 answer

M105 answer

M104 answer

M103 answer

M102 answer

M101 answer

LE32163R0301300020007


oTSLP

oTSUC

oTSRTO

oTSADO

o2CBKRL

o2CHLP

o2CCP

o2CBRK

o2CHOPO

o2CHCLO

o2TUC

oTABR

oTOLPAR

oTOLAR

oMGMI

oMGDLC

oUSM8

oUSM7

oUSM6

oUSM5

oUSM4

oUSM3

oUSM2

oUSM1

O.1252

O.1255

O.1251

O.1250

O.1114

O.1149

O.1113

O.1112

O.1144

O.1143

O.1089

O.108F

O.1060

O.1061

O.1339

O.1366

O.1287

O.1286

O.1285

O.1284

O.1283

O.1282

O.1281

O.1280

OUTPUT



MP7: Tailstock quill low pressure

MP7: Tailstock unclamp

MP7: Tailstock quill retract

MP7: Tailstock quill advance

MP9: 2nd C-axis brake depressurization

MP9: 2nd spindle chuck low pressure

MP9: 2nd C-axis clamp

MP9: 2nd C-axis brake

MP9: 2nd spindle chuck open

MP9: 2nd spindle chuck close

B-turret B unclamp

T-axis brake release

Turret oil mist lube pump drive air ON (MT30/50)

Turret oil mist lubrication air ON (MT30/50)

MG manual interruption ON

MG door lock output (MT30/50)

M108

M107

M106

M105

M104

M103

M102

M101

LE32163R0301300020008


i2CHP2

i2CHP1

iTHSFC

iTSRF

iTSA2

iTSA1

iCHP2

iCHP1

i2OCL/

i2OCA/

iMG1CL

iMG1LK

iDRCL/

iDRCL

i2CIL/

iBULC

iBCLC

iLTN

iASHC

iASHO

iTUCA

iTCLA

i2TUC

i2TCL

iCETSADP

iCE2CHOPP

iCE2CHCLP

I.1167

I.1166

I.1075

I.1272

I.1271

I.1270

I.1157

I.1156

I.103A

I.1039

I.1383

I.1382

I.1214

I.1210

I.1127

I.109A

I.109B

I.1377

I.1387

I.1386

I.1091

I.1090

I.1093

I.1092

I.1549

I.154F

I.154E

INPUT

[EC input] <Standard model>


2nd spindle chuck pedal 2

2nd spindle chuck pedal 1

Thru spindle filter clogged

Tailstock retraction pedal

Tailstock advance pedal 2 (hold)

Tailstock advance pedal 1 (inching)

1st spindle chuck pedal 2

1st spindle chuck pedal 1

2nd spindle oil cooler level alarm/

2nd spindle oil cooler alarm/

MG door 1 close confirmation

MG door 1 lock confirmation

1st door close confirmation/

1st door close confirmation

2nd C-axis interlock/

B-axis high-pressure brake release confirmation PS

B-axis clamp confirmation LS

No-tool confirmation

MP12:

MP12: ATC shutter close confirmation

MP12:ATC shutter open confirmation

A-turret unclamp confirmation

A-turret clamp confirmation

B-turret unclamp confirmation

B-turret clamp confirmation

MP8:

MP8: Tailstock advance confirmation PS

MP8: 2nd spindle chuck open confirmation PS

MP8: 2nd spindle chuck close confirmation PS

LE32163R0301300020009


oDPMT

oMOCON

oCLPU

o2CLI

oCPCLPU

oCLMT

oBOMT

oHYMON

oUDOP

oUDCL

oARE

oWKC

oINM3

oINM2

oINM1

oARMPO

oCMAO

oSHAD

oSHRT

o2ARA

oARA

oDROP

oDRCL

oACLMTL

oACL1

oARD

oARC

O.1023

O.110A

O.1192

O.1188

O.1194

O.1184

O.1022

O.1020

O.1206

O.1207

O.1174

O.1039

O.1032

O.1031

O.1030

O.1024

O.112E

O.1231

O.1230

O.1178

O.1170

O.1203

O.1202

O.1191

O.1180

O.1173

O.1172

OUTPUT

[EC output] <Standard model>

Signal name Address LabelSub hydraulic oil drain pump ON motor

M-tool spindle oil cooler ON (H1)

Suction pump

2nd coolant 1 (lower turret)

Chip flusher pump

Upper turret coolant pump

Slideway lubricating oil motor

Hydraulic motor ON

1st ceiling door open

1st ceiling door close

1st air blow E

Work count

Hourmeter 3

Hourmeter 2

Hourmeter 1

MP13: Air source pressure ON

MP13: 1st spindle chucking error detection air

MP13:1st sensor arm advance

MP13:1st sensor arm retract

MP13:2nd air blow A

MP13:1st air blow A

MP13:1st door open

MP13: 1st door close

1st coolant 1 (M-tool coolant)

1st coolant 1 (thru/L)

1st air blow D (touch setter/sensor air blow)

1st air blow C (touch setter/sensor air blow)

LE32163R0301300020010


iSOPO

iSCSF

iEXOR

iTRST

iSQAL/

iPCSBA

iPCSFR

iPCBA

iPCFR

iEARE

iEARD

iEARC

iEARB

iETSAD

iETSRT

iEDROP

iEDRCL

iTLB8

iTLB7

iTLB6

iTLB5

iTLB4

iTLB3

iTLB2

iTLB1

I.1154

I.1153

I.1152

I.1480

I.1010

I.128B

I.128A

I.1289

I.1288

I.1204

I.1203

I.1202

I.1201

I.127D

I.127C

I.1216

I.1215

I.110F

I.110E

I.110D

I.110C

I.110B

I.110A

I.1109

I.1108

INPUT

[EC input] <Options> <Standard model>


1st spindle orientation pin OUT confirmation

1st spindle orientation pin IN confirmation

External command for 1st spindle orientation

CEJ transfer start

Sequencer alarm/

MP21: Parts catcher slide retract confirmation

MP21: Parts catcher slide advance confirmation

MP21: Parts catcher retract confirmation

MP21: Parts catcher advance confirmation

External command for 1st air blow E

External command for 1st air blow D (touch setter)

External command for 1st air blow C (touch sensor)

External command for 1st air blow B

External command for tailstock quill advance

External command for tailstock quill retract

External command for 1st door open

External command for 1st door close

B-turret LS 8

B-turret LS 7

B-turret LS 6

B-turret LS 5

B-turret LS 4

B-turret LS 3

B-turret LS 2

B-turret LS 1

LE32163R0301300020011


oSSPP

oSCSP

oSPSP

oPCSBA

oPCSFR

oPCBAB

oPCFRB

oTADO

oTRTO

oDROPC

oDRCLC

oCHOPC

oCHCLC

o2TCC

o2TCW

O.1132

O.1131

O.1130

O.1261

O.1260

O.1263

O.1262

O.1254

O.1253

O.1205

O.1204

O.1138

O.1137

O.108B

O.108A

OUTPUT

[EC output] <Standard model>


1st spindle orientation pin IN/brake ON

1st spindle orientation being executed

1st spindle being stopped

MP21: Parts catcher slide retract

MP21: Parts catcher slide advance

MP21: Parts catcher retract

MP21: Parts catcher advance

Tailstock quill sizing confirmation output

Tailstock quill retract confirmation output

1st door open confirmation output

1st door close confirmation output

1st spindle chuck unclamp confirmation output

1st spindle chuck clamp confirmation output

B-turret CCW

B-turret CW

LE32163R0301300020012


iTIDRT

iTIDAD

iSACL

iSAWP

iSAMGP

iSARSP

iSAIN

iSAOU

iMTCLC

iMTUCLC

iMTCCL

iMTCUCL

iMTN

I.137F

I.137E

I.1347

I.1344

I.1343

I.1342

I.1341

I.1340

I.1373

I.1372

I.1379

I.1378

I.1376

INPUT

[EC input] <Machine with ATC> <MACTURN type>


TOOL-ID retract confirmation

TOOL-ID advance confirmation

Sub arm clamp (MT30)

Sub arm standby position confirmation

Sub arm magazine position confirmation

Sub arm ready station position confirmation

Sub arm tool insertion confirmation

Sub arm tool extraction confirmation

M-tool clamp confirmation (MT30/50)

M-tool unclamp confirmation (MT30/50)

MTC magazine tool clamp (MT50)

MTC magazine tool unclamp (FT SW) (MT50)

No M-tool

LE32163R0301300020013


oTIDRT

oTIDAD

oSAUCL

oSACL

oSAMA

oSAMB

oSAMC

oSAMD

oSAIN

oSAOU

oMTCLC

oMTUCLC

oMTCUCL

O.133F

O.133E

O.134B

O.134A

O.1342

O.1343

O.1344

O.1345

O.1341

O.1340

O.1363

O.1362

O.1368

OUTPUT

[EC output] <Machine with ATC> <MACTURN type>


TOOL-ID retract

TOOL-ID advance

Sub arm unclamp (MT30)

Sub arm clamp (MT30)

Sub arm travel A

Sub arm travel B

Sub arm travel C

Sub arm travel D

Sub arm insertion

Sub arm extraction

M-tool clamp (MT50)

M-tool projection (MT50)

MTC magazine tool unclamp (MT50)

LE32163R0301300020014


11-3. List of Data Formats

11-3-1.Tool Data Setting (T)

Data KindID

CodeData No.

G13/G14 Content of Data Remarks

Cutting ToolsOffset

T11 to 32

(64)(96)

G13/G14G13/G14

G13

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)Y (Yl-axis)

Load monitorReference

valueT12 1 to 64

G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14

G13

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)C (C-axis)S (Spindle No. 1)M (M-axis)W (W-axis)B (Spindle No. 2)Y (Yl-axis)

Load monitorfirst limit

valueT13 1 to 64

G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14

G13


Load monitorsecond limit

valueT14 1 to 64

G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14

G13



11-3-2.Zero Point Data Setting (0)

Data KindID

CodeData No.

G13/G14 Content of Data Remarks

Zero point O1 1 to 2 G13/G14

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)C (C-axis)W (W-axis)S (YS-axis)Y (Yl-axis)

N1: Zero offsetN2: Zero shift

Ball screw pitch

O2 1G13/G14G13/G14

G13

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)S (S-axis)

Pitch error compensatio

nO3 1 to 120

G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14

G13

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)C (C-axis)S (YS-axis)

Zero point of spindle No.2

O4 1 to 2

G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14

G13G13

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)C (C-axis)S (YS-axis)Y (Yl-axis)

N1: Zero offsetN2: Zero shift


11-3-3.Parameter Setting (P)

Data KindID

Code

Data No.

G13/G14

Content of Data Remarks

UserParameters

P1 1 to 9

G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13 G13


N1: Positive variable limit (P)N2: Negative variable limit (P)N3: Positive variable limit (M)N4: Negative variable limit (M)N9: Droop data

SystemParameters

P3 1 to 23

G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13G13G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)C (C-axis)W (W-axis)S (YS-axis)Y (Yl-axis)I (Rapid feedrate)J (Manual feedrate)K (Slowdown time)L (Encoder offset)M (Backlash)N (In-position)O (Unclamp timer)

N1: Positive stroke end limitN2: Negative stroke end limitN3: BacklashN4: Encoder connection offsetN5: Positive sensor position (P)N6: Negative sensor position (P)N7: Positive sensor position (M)N8: Negative sensor position (M)N9: Reference ring positionN10: ATC Tool Change positionN11: Encoder offsetN12: Rapid feedrate unit amountN13: Rapid feedrate acceleration unit amountN14: Manual feedrate unit amountN15: Manual feed acceleration unit amountN16: Z-W Zero point offsetN17: Torque set valueN18: Positive stroke offset amountN19: Negative stroke offset amountN20: ATC Tool Change position AN21: ATC Tool Change position BN22: ATC Tool Change position CN23: NC Turret Control parameterN28: Machine zero point offsetData from I to 0 are set only at N23

Turret position

P41 to 12

(20)

G13/G14G13/G14G13

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)Y (Yl-axis)

HomePosition

P14 1 to 8

G13/G14G13/G14G13

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)Y (YS-axis)


Spindle No. 2User

ParametersP16 1 to 9

G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13G13


N1: Positive variable limit (P)N2: Negative variable limit (P)N3: Positive variable limit (M)N4: Negative variable limit (M)N9: Droop data

Y-AXIS CONTROLParameters

P24 1 to 8

G13G13G13G13

X (Xl-axis)Z (Zl-axis)Y (Yl-axis)R (Data)

N1: Rapid feedrate unit amountN2: Rapid feedrate acceleration unit amountN3: Manual feedrate unit amountN4: Manual feedrate acceleration unit amountN5: Torque set valueN6: YS-X angle dataN7: TURNING POSITION (YS-axis Spindle Center Position)

Data KindID

Code

Data No.

G13/G14

Content of Data Remarks

This manual may be at variance with the actual product due to specification or design changes.Please also note that specifications are subject to change without notice.If you require clarification or further explanation of any point in this manual, please contact your OKUMA representative.

LIST OF PUBLICATIONS

Publication No. Date Edition

5947-E December 2011 1st

5947-E-R1 July 2012 2nd

5947-E-R2 October 2012 3rd

Original Instruction Manual

Documents

Okuma OSP-P300S Macturn Multus Series Operation Manual LE32-163-R03a